GPS500 Technical Reference Manual...

Version 4.0English

50403020

Technical Reference Manual

GPS System 500

2 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Congratulations on your purchase of Leica System 500

To use equipment in the permitted manner, please refer tothe detailed safety instructions in the User Manual.

System GPS500

3Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Support

Technical Support is provided by Leica Geosystem’s worldwide network ofrepresentatives. We are represented in almost every country in the world. Arepresentative directory is available at:

www.leica-geosystems.com


Symbols used in this manual

Symbols used in this manual

Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practiceas they enable the product to be used in a technicallycorrect and efficient manner.


Chapter 1 - Introduction

Chapter 2 - Equipment Setup and Connection

Chapter 3 - Using System 500 without a Terminal

Chapter 4 - TR500 Terminal Overview

Chapter 5 - Configuring the Receiver

Chapter 6 - Jobs and Points

Chapter 7 - Measuring with System 500

Chapter 8 - Coding

Chapter 9 - The CONFIG key

Chapter 10 - Status

Chapter 11 - Applications

Chapter 12 - Utilities

Chapter 13 - Transfer

Appendices

View of chapters

View of chapters

11

20

70

74

86

156

158

232

241

259

273

307

310

321

6 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0enContents

Contents

1. Introduction ..............................................111.1 The GPS Antenna ............................................... 121.2 The GPS Receiver ............................................... 131.3 The TR500 Terminal ............................................ 151.4 Data Storage ....................................................... 161.5 Batteries/Power Supply ........................................ 18

1.5.1 Charging the Batteries ......................................... 19

2. Equipment Set Up and Connection ....... 202.1 GPS Receiver ports ............................................. 212.2 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid

Static/Reference on Pillar .................................... 222.3 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid

Static/Reference on Tripod .................................. 252.4 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic,

Minipack and Pole ............................................... 282.5 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic,

All on Pole, Direct Clip of TR500 on to Sensor ...... 322.6 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic,

All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated ............ 352.7 Equipment Setup - Real Time Reference,

single tripod ....................................................... 382.8 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Reference,

Two Tripods ...................................................... 412.9 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover,

Pole and Minipack ............................................... 44

2.10 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover,All on Pole, direct clip of TR500 on to Sensor ....... 48

2.11 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover,All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated ............ 51

2.12 Equipment Setup - Real Time Rover, GIS Rover . 542.13 Equipment Setup - Repeater Station and

Repeater Box ...................................................... 582.14 Using the Minipack ............................................ 612.15 Measuring Antenna Heights ............................... 63

2.15.1 Mechanical Reference Planes ........................... 642.15.2 Antenna Height components ............................. 652.15.3 Measuring Slope Heights ................................... 69

3. Using System 500 without a Terminal ... 703.1 Setting up the Equipment ..................................... 713.2 Operation ............................................................ 713.3 Shut Down........................................................... 713.4 LED Indicators ..................................................... 72

3.4.1 Power LED .......................................................... 723.4.2 Satellite Status LED ............................................. 723.4.3 Memory Status LED ............................................ 73

3.5 Field Record Sheet .............................................. 73

4. TR500 Terminal Overview ....................... 744.1 Screen Layout ..................................................... 754.2 Status Icons ........................................................ 774.3 Keyboard ............................................................. 824.4 General Operating Principles ............................... 83


Contents, continued

Contents

5. Configuring the Receiver ........................ 865.1 Configuring the Receiver for Static and Rapid Static

Operations .......................................................... 885.1.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Static and Rapid

Static .................................................................... 955.2 Configuring the Receiver for Post-Processed

Kinematic Operations .......................................... 995.2.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Post-Processed

Kinematic ........................................................... 1125.3 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Reference

Operations ......................................................... 1165.3.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time

Reference Stations ............................................. 1245.4 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Rover

Operations ........................................................ 1275.4.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Rover 148

6. Jobs and Points..................................... 1566.1 Management of Jobs ......................................... 156

7. Measuring with System 500 ................. 1587.1 Static and Rapid Static Survey, Post-Processed

Kinematic Reference ......................................... 1597.1.1 Overview of Procedure ...................................... 1607.1.2 Adding the Point Id ............................................ 1607.1.3 Adding the Antenna Height ................................ 1617.1.4 Adding a Code ................................................... 1617.1.5 Adding a Starting Time ...................................... 163

7.1.6 Measuring procedure ......................................... 1637.1.7 Using the ADD key ............................................ 166

7.2 Post-processed Kinematic Survey (Rover) ......... 1677.2.1 Overview of Procedure ...................................... 1687.2.2 Adding the Point Id ............................................ 1687.2.3 Adding the Antenna Height ................................ 1697.2.4 Adding a Code ................................................... 1707.2.5 Adding a Starting Time ...................................... 1717.2.6 Measuring Procedure ........................................ 1727.2.7 Using the AUTO key .......................................... 1747.2.8 Using the ADD key ............................................ 174

7.3 Real-Time Reference Stations ........................... 1767.3.1 Measuring procedure ......................................... 1777.3.2 Using the ADD key ............................................ 180

7.4 Real-Time Rover, Surveying New Points ............ 1817.4.1 Overview of Procedure ...................................... 1827.4.2 Adding the Point Id ............................................ 1827.4.3 Adding the Antenna Height ................................ 1837.4.4 Adding a Code ................................................... 1847.4.5 Adding a Starting Time ...................................... 1857.4.6 Measurement Procedure ................................... 1867.4.7 Using the AUTO key .......................................... 1907.4.8 Using the INIT key ............................................. 1937.4.9 Using the ADD key ............................................ 1947.4.10 Using the NEAR key ........................................ 2067.4.11 Radio Down Infill .............................................. 206

8 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0enContents

Contents, continued

7.5 Real-Time Rover, Staking Out ............................ 2087.5.1 Entering Stakeout .............................................. 2087.5.2 Stake-Out Types ................................................ 2097.5.3 The Stake-Out Screen ....................................... 2107.5.4 Orientation ......................................................... 2117.5.5 Polar and Orthogonal ........................................ 2157.5.6 Using the Reverse function ................................ 2167.5.7 Using the Redraw function ................................. 2177.5.8 Picking up a new point ....................................... 2177.5.9 Using the INIT key ............................................. 2177.5.10 Using the NEAR key ........................................ 2187.5.11 Graph .............................................................. 2187.5.12 Aux Pt .............................................................. 2197.5.13 Point Stake-Out - Procedure ............................ 2207.5.14 Slope Stake-Out - Procedure ........................... 2227.5.15 Grid Stake-Out - Procedure ............................. 226

8. Coding .................................................... 2328.1 Thematical Coding ............................................. 232

8.1.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining aThematical Codelist ............................................ 233

8.1.2 Defining New Codes and Attributes ................... 2348.1.3 Defining and Activating/Deactivating Layers ...... 2358.1.4 Adding a Thematical Code to a Point ................. 236

8.2 Free Coding ...................................................... 2378.2.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining a

Free Codelist ...................................................... 2378.2.2 Defining New Codes .......................................... 2388.2.3 Adding a Free Code .......................................... 239

9. The CONFIG Key ................................... 2419.1 Survey - Satellite ................................................ 2429.2 General - Units .................................................. 2439.3 General - Language ........................................... 2449.4 General - Hot Keys ............................................ 2449.5 General - Time and Initial Position ...................... 2459.6 General - Start-Up ............................................. 2459.7 General - TR500 ................................................ 2469.8 General - Identification ....................................... 2479.9 Interfaces ......................................................... 2479.10 Interfaces - Real-Time ..................................... 2479.11 Interfaces - NMEA Output ................................ 2489.12 Interfaces - ASCII Input .................................... 2499.13 Interfaces - Hidden Point .................................. 2539.14 Interfaces - GSI/User Out ................................. 2539.15 Interfaces - Remote ......................................... 2549.16 Interfaces - PPS Out ........................................ 2559.17 Interfaces - Event Input .................................... 256

10. Status ................................................... 25910.1 Real-Time Input Status .................................... 25910.2 Stop and Go Indicator ...................................... 26110.3 Position ........................................................... 26310.4 Logging Status ................................................. 26610.5 Satellite Status ................................................. 26710.6 Point Log Status .............................................. 269


Contents, continued

Contents

10.7 Code Log Status .............................................. 27010.8 Message Log Status ........................................ 27010.9 Memory/Battery Status ..................................... 27010.10 Sensor Status ................................................ 27110.11 Software Version Status ................................. 27110.12 Interfaces Status ............................................ 272

11. Applications ......................................... 27311.1 Determining a Coordinate System .................... 27311.2 Adding Points to Existing Coordinate Systems .. 28311.3 Point Management ........................................... 28411.4 Calculator ........................................................ 28811.5 Wake-up Sessions ........................................... 28811.6 COGO ............................................................. 29011.7 Area ................................................................ 30311.8 Line Division .................................................... 304

12. Utilities ................................................. 30712.1 Directory of Memory Device ............................. 30712.2 Format Memory Module ................................... 30812.3 Enter Security Code ......................................... 30912.4 Self Test .......................................................... 309

13. Transfer ................................................ 31013.1 Job .................................................................. 31013.2 Config Set ....................................................... 31013.3 Coordinate System ........................................... 311

13.4 Antenna Info ..................................................... 31113.5 Codelist ............................................................ 31113.6 ASCII/GSI to Job ............................................ 31213.7 GSI / User ....................................................... 31413.8 Geoid Field File ................................................ 31613.9 CSCS Field File ............................................... 31613.10 Firmware ....................................................... 31613.11 Firmware TR500 ............................................ 31713.12 Language Version .......................................... 31713.13 Application Text .............................................. 31713.14 Almanac ........................................................ 31813.15 Account File ................................................... 31813.16 CFC Log Mask File ........................................ 31813.17 Beacon Station List ....................................... 31913.18 Modem/GSM Station List ............................... 31913.19 System ......................................................... 31913.20 Any File Type ................................................. 320

Appendix A - Operating and StorageTemperatures ............................................. 321

Appendix B - Observation Times ............. 322

Appendix C - Seismic Record Format ..... 323

Appendix D - Defined Line File Format ... 324


Contents, continued

Appendix E - NMEA Message Formats .... 325GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data ............... 327GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP ........................ 328GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP ................. 328GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ .......................... 329GLL - Geodetic Position - Latitude, Longitude ........... 329GNS - GNSS Fix Data ............................................. 330GSA - GPS DOP and Active Satellites ..................... 330GSV - GPS Satellites in View ................................... 331LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP ...................... 331LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality ..................... 332VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed ....... 332ZDA - Time and Date ............................................... 333

Appendix F - Pin Assignments andSockets ...................................................... 334

Appendix G - Data Device DirectoryStructure .................................................... 336

Appendix H - External Devices................. 338RS232 .................................................................... 339Radio and Repeaters ............................................... 340GSM ....................................................................... 344Modem ................................................................... 350

RTB Module (CSI) ................................................... 352RTS Module (Racal) ................................................ 354SAPOS ................................................................... 356

Using a SAPOS decoder box ..................................... 356Using a SMARTgate box ............................................ 357Using the Telemax Service ......................................... 359

Hidden Point ........................................................... 361

Appendix I - MC500 ................................... 364

Appendix J - RS500 ................................... 369

Appendix K- GS50 / GS50+ and GIS DataCollection ................................................... 377

Hardware and Accessories ...................................... 378Compact Flash and Sensor Transfer ........................ 382Operation and Configuration .................................... 383The CONFIG Key .................................................... 384The STATUS Key .................................................... 388Data Collection with the GS50 and GS50+ ............... 389

11 1. IntroductionTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

1. IntroductionSystem 500 is used to receive signalsfrom GPS satellites which are thenprocessed to obtain a position on theearth’s surface.

It can be used in many applications,the main ones being Land Survey,Stakeout and Hydrographic Survey.

The main components of System 500are the GPS Antenna and GPSReceiver. Ancilliary components arethe Terminal, Batteries, PC Cards andcables.

SKI-Pro, a PC based software is alsoused in conjunction with the hardwarelisted above for post-processing GPSdata and for downloading coordinatesrecorded in the field. Instructions forusing SKI-Pro can be found in theaccompanying printed guides and on-line help.

System 500 - main hardware components

12 1. Introduction Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

1.1 The GPS Antenna

There are several System 500 GPSAntennas available. These are:

• AT501 Single Frequency Antenna.• AT502 Dual Frequency Antenna.• AT503 Dual Frequency Choke

Ring Antenna.• AT504 JPL Design Dual Fre-

quency Choke Ring Antenna.• Single Frequency Choke Ring

Antenna.

The GPS Antenna is selected for usebased upon the application. The vastmajority of applications will requirethe AT501 or AT502 Antenna.

The AT501 is a L1 single frequencyantenna. Use it with the SR510Receiver. The AT502 is a dual fre-quency antenna. Use it with theSR520 or SR530 Receiver.

The Choke Ring Antennas aredesigned for use where the utmostprecision is required. Typical applica-tions include Static Surveys of longbaselines, Tectonic Plate monitoring,Reference Stations, etc.

Use the AT503 and AT504 with theSR520 or SR530 Receiver. Use theSingle Frequency Choke Ring withthe SR510 Receiver.

AT502 Antenna

AT504 Antenna

Also available is a combined GPS/RTB or GPS/ RTS antenna. Refer toAppendix K for further information.


1.2 The GPS Receiver

The GPS Receiver is the instrumentthat processes the GPS signalsreceived by the GPS Antenna.

There are six different models of GPSreceiver in System 500. The modelnumber is printed on the PC card lid.

See the detailed descriptions of eachof these receivers given down below.

SR510 - Tracks the L1 C/A code anduses it to reconstruct the carrierphase. Data can be stored for post-processing in SKI-Pro. Baselines canbe calculated with a precision of up toabout 5-10mm +2ppm.

With a radio modem attached thereceiver can be used for real-timemeasurements accepting RTCM codecorrections. Coordinates can becalculated with a precision of up toabout 0.5m.

SR520 - Tracks the L1 C/A code andL2 P-code to reconstruct the carrierphase. When Anti-Spoofing (A-S) isactivated, the receiver switches to apatented P-code aided trackingtechnique that provides full L2 carriermeasurements and L2pseudoranges. Data can be stored forpost-processing. Baselines can becalculated with a precision of up toabout 3-10mm +1ppm.

With a radio modem attached thereceiver can be used for real-timemeasurements accepting RTCMcode corrections. Coordinates can becalculated with a precision of up toabout 0.5m.

SR530 - Tracks the L1 C/A code andL2 P-code to reconstruct the carrierphase. When Anti-Spoofing (A-S) isactivated, the receiver switches to apatented P-code aided trackingtechnique that provides full L2 carrier

measurements and L2pseudoranges. A radio modemattaches and the receiver can beused for RTK operations. Coordinatescan be calculated with a precision ofup to about 1cm

Data can also be stored for post-processing. Baselines can be calcu-lated with a precision of up to about3-10mm +1ppm.

System 500 GPS Receivers can beoperated with or without the TR500Terminal (see section 1.3). TheTR500 is used for field data acquisi-tion and for configuring the receiver.

Details of using the Receiver withouta Terminal are given in Chapter 3.


MC500 - A ruggedized version of theSR530 designed specifically forMachine Control. Can also be utilisedas a dedicated GPS ReferenceStation. Please refer to Appendix I forspecific details.

RS500 - A dedicated GPS ReferenceSation receiver designed for perma-nent installation. Please refer toAppendix J for specific details.

GS50 - This receiver has beenspecifically designed for GIS applica-tions. Please refer to Appendix K formore information that is specific tothe GS50 and the corresponding PC-software GIS DataPRO.


1.3 The TR500 Terminal

The TR500 Terminal provides a fulluser interface to all System 500 GPSReceivers.

It can be used to set parameters inthe receiver and to steer the GPSmeasurement operation.

The TR500 can be used to set andstore parameters in one GPS receiverand then removed and used to setparameters in another System 500receiver. The receiver can then beused in the field without the TR500attached. Note that whilst this ispossible when measuring in anymode, for a Reference or Rover, it isrecommended that the Receiver onlybe used without a TR500 at Refer-ence stations or with Static/RapidStatic Rovers.

The TR500 is connected eitherdirectly to the receiver or via a cable.

Data input is via a fully alphanumericQWERTY keyboard and an LCDdisplay of 32 x 12 characters whichmay be illuminated.

TR500 mounted on the Receiver TR500 connected using the cable


1.4 Data Storage

Data is stored on either an InternalMemory or PC Card. The PC Card isthe preferred data storage medium.The Internal Memory is an option.

The PC Card is inserted into the sloton the front of the GPS Receiver. PCCards are available from Leica withvarying capacities. Note that whilstother PC Cards may be used, Leicarecommend Leica PC cards only andcannot be held responsible for dataloss or any other error that may occurwhilst using a non-Leica card.

To insert the PC Card in the GPSReceiver, open the card slot door,with the Leica Logo uppermost andfacing you, slide the card into the slotfirmly until it clicks into position. Pressthe eject button at the side of the cardto remove it.

Inserting the PC Card

The Internal Memory is available in8MB or 16MB capacities and residesin the Receiver. When data has to bedownloaded to SKI-Pro, connection ismade between port 2 on the Receiverand a serial port on the PC.

The memory device is checkedbefore starting a survey. If it is morethan 80% full, an information mes-sage appears.

Follow the care instructions shown onthe rear of the card. Keep the carddry, only use within the specifiedtemperature range, do not bend thecard and protect it from direct shock.Failure to follow these instructionscould result in data loss and/orpermanent damage to the card.

The card can become very hot duringuse. Avoid touching the metal parts ofthe card after prolonged use.


PC Card versus Internal MemoryThe PC Card is the preferred datastorage medium as it has the follow-ing advantages over internal memory:

• Faster download times. A PCCard download using a PCCard Reader or PCMCIA port isvirtually instantaneous. Internalmemory has to downloadthrough a serial connection andcan take time.

• Flexibility / no downtime ofGPS Receiver. A PC Card canbe removed from a receiverwhen it is full and replaced witha spare. The Receiver does nothave to be taken back to the officefor downloading.

Using an Internal Memory meanshowever that the data has lesschance of being misplaced or lost.This can happen when multiple PCCards are used for the same project.

If you are not sure about which typeof memory to use, try using a PC cardbut don’t remove it from the Receiver.You can still download as if it wereInternal Memory through any port.


1.5 Batteries/Power Supply

System 500 will normally be poweredby two GEB121 camcorder typebatteries. which plug into the under-side of the GPS receiver.

Two batteries, fully charged, willpower the SR510 and TR500 forabout 7.5 hours continuously and theSR520/530 for about 6 hours continu-ously.

Operating times will be shorter whenworking in cold weather and when aradio modem is connected.

Plug in and remove the GEB121batteries as shown opposite.

System 500 can also be powered bythe GEB71 7Ah battery or any 12VDC power supply via either powerport, on the front face of the receiverusing an appropriate cable.

Connecting a GEB121 Battery

With the Receiver upside down andthe Leica logo on the battery facingyou, locate one end into the batterybay. Press the opposite end of thebattery down until it audibly clicks intoplace.

Removing a GEB121 Battery

Pull and hold the battery catch.Withdraw the battery with the otherhand.

The battery contains toxic material and must be disposed of in an environmen-tally friendly manner. Do not dispose of the battery in normal household oroffice waste.


1.5.1 Charging the Batteries

GEB121 Batteries

GEB121 Batteries can be chargedusing the GKL122 or GKL111 batterychargers. The preferred model is theGKL122.

GEB71 Batteries

GEB71 Batteries can be chargedusing the GKL122 battery chargeronly.

Chargers

The GKL122 is an intelligent charger.It will charge the batteries by theexact amount required. This maxi-mizes battery life. The GKL122 cancharge up to 2 GEB121 batteries atonce. The GDI121 extension plateenables a further two batteries to becharged from the same charger at thesame time.

Additionally, the GKL122 can chargeup to two GEB71 batteries.

The GKL111 battery charger is asimple charger. It will charge oneGEB121 battery at a time. It willcharge the batteries by the exactamount required. This maximizesbattery life.

The batteries are deliveredfrom the factory totally

discharged. They will require a fullcharging cycle before the equipmentcan be used. For full instructions onbattery charging, refer to the manualaccompanying the charger you areusing.

202. Set-up and Connection Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

2. Equipment Set Up and ConnectionThe type of equipment set up that isused will vary with the type of siteoccupation and the measuring mode.This also applies to the way in whichthe various components are con-nected together. There are optimalsolutions for setting up the equipmenton a tripod, in a backpack and on thepole.

Set up on Tripod

Set up on Unipole

Set up on pole with Minipack

21 2. Set-up and ConnectionTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

ONOFF

LEICA SR530TERMINAL

PORT 3

PWR PORT 1PORT 2/PWRANTPPS

EVENT2

EVENT1

2.1 GPS Receiver ports

All other components of System 500connect to the GPS Receiver.

The TR500 Terminal fits eitherdirectly on the Receiver or can beconnected to the Terminal port usinga cable.

A Radio Modem in a housing can alsobe fitted directly to the Receiver.Alternatively, if the housing is notbeing used, the radio modem can beconnected to Port 1 or Port 3 using acable.

The Antenna is connected to theReceiver via the ANT Port.

External power can be connected viaa cable through Port 2.

1

3

4 6 8 9 10

1112

1. Port 3. 8 pin Lemo.Power/datain/out

2. Event Input 1 (Optional)3. 5 pin Lemo. Power4. Power ON/OFF5. PPS Output (Optional)6. GPS Antenna in7. Event Input 2 (Optional)

SR530 Receiver, front panel

8. Port 2. 5 pin Lemo. Power/datain/out.

9. Pressure equalisation vent.10. Port 1. 8 pin Lemo. Power/data

in/out.11. PC Card door.12. Terminal in/out or Remote

Interface in/out.

2

5 7


2.2 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid Static/Reference on Pillar

Use

Static/Rapid Static operations or as Reference for Kin-ematic.

The Receiver and TR500 (if used) can be assembled tomake one unit. One connection is made to the GPSAntenna which is mounted on the Pillar. The Receiver andTR500 can be kept in the case. Note that the Receivercan be programmed with the TR500 prior to use whichcan then be omitted from the set up.

Assumptions

1. GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting.If using stub and GAD 31 adapter, procedures mayvary slightly.

2. GPS Antennas are AT501 or AT502. Procedures/setup may vary if AT503, 504 or single frequencychoke ring are used.


Equipment Checklist

1. GPS Antenna AT501, 502, 503,504 or 505

2. GRT146 Carrier3. GDF122 or GDF112 Tribrach4. Pillar Plate (if required)5. GEV120 2.8m Antenna Cable6. 2, GEB121 Batteries7. SR510/520/530 GPS Receiver8. TR500 Terminal (if required)9. MCF XMB-3 PC Flash Card.

10. GVP602 System 500 TransportCase.


Procedure

1. If a pillar plate is being used,locate it on the pillar.

2. Screw the tribrach to the pillarplate or the pillar. Level thetribrach.

3. Place and lock the GRT146Carrier in the Tribrach.

4. Screw the Antenna onto theCarrier.

5. Check that the Tribrach is stilllevel.

6. Connect the GPS Receiver tothe Antenna using the GEV120Antenna cable.

7. Plug the GEB121 batteries intothe GPS Receiver.

8. Attach the TR500 Terminal tothe Receiver if required.

9. Insert the PCMCIA Flash Cardinto the Receiver.

10. Switch on the system using theON/OFF button.

11. The Receiver can be placed inthe Transport Case for additionalprotection.

The Next Steps

If the Receiver has been pre-pro-grammed and the TR500 is not beingused, further guidance is available inChapter 3.

If the Receiver has been pre-pro-grammed and the TR500 is beingused, further guidance is available inChapter 7.

If the Receiver requires programmingwith the TR500, further guidance isavailable in Chapter 5.

When Using the GAD31adapter and GRT144 carrier,

ensure that the Antenna and GAD31assembly slide down the full length ofthe GRT144 stub. An incorrectlymounted Antenna will have a directeffect on your results.

In wet conditions the Re-ceiver can be placed in the

transport case during use for extraprotection. Try to shut the case ascompletely as possible.

If the Receiver is left in thecase during use in tempera-

tures exceeding 25°C, the lid shouldbe left open. Refer to Appendix A foroperating and storage temperatures.

Use an external battery suchas GEB71 to extend the

operating time past 6 hours.


Use

Static/Rapid Static operations or as Reference for Kine-matic.

The Receiver and TR500 (if used) can be assembled tomake one unit. This clips to the tripod leg or is placed inthe transport container. One connection is made to theAntenna. Note that the Receiver can be programmed withthe TR500 prior to use which can then be omitted from theset up.

Assumptions


2. GPS Antennas are AT501 or AT502. Procedures/setup may vary if AT503, 504 or single frequencychoke ring are used.

2.3 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid Static/Reference on Tripod


Equipment Checklist

1. GPS Antenna AT501 or AT5022. GRT146 Carrier3. GDF122 or GDF112 Tribrach4. GST20, GST05 or GST05L

Tripod5. GZS4 Height Hook6. GEV120 2.8m Antenna Cable7. 2, GEB121 Batteries8. SR510/520/530 GPS Receiver9. TR500 Terminal (if required)10.MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA Flash

Card.11.GVP602 System 500 Transport

Case.


Procedure

1. Set up the tripod.2. Mount and level the tribrach on

the tripod.3. Place and lock the GRT146

Carrier in the Tribrach.4. Screw the Antenna onto the

Carrier.5. Check that the Tribrach is still

level.5. Insert the Height Hook into the

Carrier.6. Connect the GPS Receiver to

the Antenna using the GEV120Antenna cable.

7. Plug the GEB121 batteries intothe GPS Receiver.

8. Attach the TR500 Terminal tothe Receiver if required.

9. Insert the PCMCIA Flash Cardinto the Receiver.

10. Using the hook on the rear ofthe unit, hang it on the Tripod legor place it in the box.

11. Switch on the system using theON/OFF button on the Receiver.

The Next Steps













Use

Post Processed Kinematic Rover.

The Receiver is placed in the Minipack. Connections aremade to the Antenna and TR500. Recommended forextended periods of use in the field.

Assumptions


2. Aluminium poles are used. You may replace themwith their Carbon Fiber equivalents without anychange to these instructions.

2.4 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, Minipack and Pole


Equipment Checklist

1. GPS Antenna AT501 or 5022. GLS21 Upper half aluminium

pole with screw3. GHT25 Grip for pole4. GHT27 Holder for TR5005. GLS20 Lower half aluminium

pole6. GEV141 1.2m Antenna cable7. GEV142 1.6m Antenna cable8. TR500 Terminal9. 2, GEB121 Batteries

10. SR510, 520 or 530 GPS Re-ceiver

11. GVP603 Minipack12. MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA flash card13. GEV97 1.8m, 5pin Lemo cable


How to set up the equipment

1. Screw the two halves of the poletogether.

2. Slide the grip onto the pole.Attach the TR500 holder andtighten the screw.

3. Screw the GPS Antenna to thetop of the pole.

4. Slide the TR500 into the holderuntil it clicks into place.

5. Insert the PC Card into theReceiver and plug in theGEB121 batteries.

6. Place the Receiver front panelup in the Minipack with thebatteries facing outwards.Fasten the strap around theReceiver

7. Connect the GPS Antenna to theReceiver using the two Antennacables. Connect the longestcable to the Receiver, pass thecable through the cable brakeand down through the opening inthe bottom corner of theMinipack flap. Draw the required

amount of cable out of theMinipack and tighten the cablebrake. Refer to the diagram.

8. Connect the TR500 to the portlabelled “Terminal” on theReceiver using the 1.8m cable.Pass it through the opening inthe bottom of the Minipack flap,down through a cable brake andthen plug into the Receiver.Refer to the diagram.


To Terminal

To GPS Antenna

Connecting the TR500 Terminal and GPSAntenna in the Minipack


The Next Steps



Ensure a dry plastic weatherprotection cap is fitted to the

socket on the TR500 that is notconnected to the sensor.

If moisture or water shouldappear in the socket that is

not used on the TR500, allow thesocket and plastic weather protectioncap to dry naturally.

When using the upper polehalves with stub, ensure that

the Antenna and GAD31 screw/stubadapter slide down the full length ofthe stub before tightening the lockingring. An incorrectly mounted Antennawill have a direct effect on yourresults.

Advice on using the Minipackis given in Section 2.14.


Use

Post-processed Kinematic Rover.

The TR500 is mounted on the Receiver which is screwedonto the pole grip. One connection is made from theReceiver to the Antenna. Recommended for short periodsof use, especially where there are many obstacles (fencesetc.).

Assumptions



2.5 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, All on Pole, Direct Clip of TR500 on to Sensor


Equipment Checklist


pole with screw3. GHT25 Grip for pole4. GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver5. GLS17 Lower half aluminium

pole6. GEV141 1.2m Antenna cable7. 2, GEB121 Batteries8. TR500 Terminal9. SR510, 520 or 530 GPS Re-

ceiver10. MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA flash card




2. Slide the grip onto the pole.Attach the GPS Receiver holderand tighten the screw.

3. Screw the GPS Antenna ontothe top of the pole.

4. Attach the TR500 to the GPSReceiver. Screw the GPSReceiver to the GPS Receiverholder.


6. Connect the GPS Antenna tothe Receiver using the 1.2mantenna cable.

7. Switch on the system using theON/OFF button on the TR500.

The Next Steps






2.6 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated

Use

Post-processed Kinematic Rover.

The TR500 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. Withanother metallic holder and a holder piece, the receiver isfixed to the pole. One connection is made from the Re-ceiver to the Antenna. Another connection is made fromthe Receiver to the TR500. Recommended for shortperiods of use, especially where there are many obstacles(fences etc.).

Assumptions




1

2

3

5

9

11

10

L

4

8

67

Equipment Checklist



pole6. GHT37 Holder piece for GPS

Receiver with antenna cable and5pin Lemo cable

7. GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver8. TR500 Terminal9. 2, GEB121 Batteries


11. MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA flash card




2. Slide the grip onto the pole.Attach the TR500 holder to thegrip and tighten the screw.

3. Slide the holder piece for theGPS Receiver onto the pole.Attach the GPS Receiver holderand tighten the screw.

4. Screw the GPS Antenna ontothe top of the pole.

5. Slide the TR500 into the holderuntil it clicks into place.

6. Screw the GPS Receiver to theGPS Receiver holder.


8. Connect the GPS Antenna to theReceiver using the antennacable supplied with the GPSreceiver holder piece.

9. Connect the TR500 to the portlabelled “Terminal” on theReceiver using the 5 pin Lemocable.


The Next Steps






Use

Real Time Reference Station. May also collect raw obser-vation data for post-processing.

The Receiver and TR500 (if used) can be assembled tomake one unit. This clips to the tripod leg. Connectionsare made to the GPS and Radio Antenna. Note that theReceiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to usewhich can then be omitted from the set up.

The Radio Antenna is mounted on the Antenna Arm whichclips to the GPS Antenna.

The SR510 and SR520 can only be used as a DGPSreference station if they are fitted with the DGPS option.They cannot be used as a Real-Time Reference station.

The SR530 can be used as either a DGPS or Real-Timereference station. Real-Time and DGPS are fitted asstandard on the SR530.

Assumptions


2. Standard Radio modem is used. (Mounted in RadioHousing).

2.7 Equipment Setup - Real Time Reference, single tripod


Equipment Checklist

1. GPS Antenna AT501, 5022. GRT146 Carrier3. GDF122 or GDF112 Tribrach4. SR510/520/530 GPS Receiver5. TR500 Terminal (if required)6. GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable7. GST20/GST05/05L Tripod8. GAT1/GAT2 Radio Antenna9. GAD33 Radio Antenna Arm

10. GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable11. GZS4 Height Hook12. Radio Modem in GFU 5/6

Housing13. MCF XMB-3 PC card14. 2, GEB121 Batteries15. GVP602 Transport Case

��



Follow steps 1-10 as described insection 2.3.

11. Clip the Antenna Arm to theGPS Antenna. Screw the RadioAntenna onto the Arm.

12. Attach the Radio Modem in itshousing to the GPS Receiver.

13. Connect the Radio Antenna tothe Radio Modem using the1.2m Antenna Cable.

14. Switch the System On using theOn/Off button on the Receiver.

The Next Steps













Use

The Receiver and TR500 (if used) can be assembled tomake one unit. This clips to the tripod leg. Connectionsare made to the GPS and Radio Antenna. Note that theReceiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to usewhich can then be omitted from the set up.

The Radio Antenna is mounted on the second tripod. Thisincreases the height of the Radio Antenna and thereforemaximizes radio coverage.

The SR510 and SR520 can only be used as a DGPSreference station if they are fitted with the DGPS option.They cannot be used as a Real-Time Reference station.

The SR530 can be used as either a DGPS or Real-Timereference station. Real-Time and DGPS are fitted asstandard on the SR530.

Assumptions


2. Standard Radio modem is used. (Mounted in RadioHousing).

2.8 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Reference, Two Tripods


Equipment Checklist

1. GPS Antenna AT501/5022. GRT146 Carrier3. GDF122 or GDF112 Tribrach4. SR510/520/530 GPS Receiver5. TR500 Terminal (if required)6. GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable7. GST20\GST05\05L Tripod8. GZS4 Height Hook9. Radio Modem in GFU5/6

Housing10. MCF XMB-3 PC Card11. GEB121 Batteries12. GST20\GST05\05L Tripod13. GHT36 Base for Telescopic Rod14. GEV120 2.8m Antenna Cable15. GAT1\GAT2 Radio Antenna16. GAD34 Short Antenna Arm17. GAD32 Telescopic Rod18. GVP602 Transport Case

1

2

34

567

9

11

8

10

1812

14

1516

17

13





12. Set up the second Tripodnearby. Screw the Base onto theTripod. Push the Telescopic Rodinto the Base.

13. Screw the Short Antenna Armonto the telescopic Rod. Screwthe Radio Antenna onto the Arm.

14. Connect the Radio modem tothe Radio Antenna using the2.8m Antenna cable.

15. Switch the System On using theOn/Off button on the Receiver orTerminal.

The Next Steps









tures exceeding 25°C, the lid shouldbe left open. Refer to Appendix A foroperating and storage.


Use

The Radio Modem attaches to the Receiver and is placedin the Minipack. Connections are made to the GPSAntenna, Radio Antenna and TR500. Recommended forextended periods of use in the field.

The cables coming from the Minipack can be discon-nected in the event that an obstacle (E.g. a fence) has tobe crossed.

Assumptions



2.9 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover, Pole and Minipack


Equipment Checklist


pole with screw or stub3. GHT25 Grip for pole4. GHT27 Holder for TR5005. GLS20 Lower half aluminium

pole6. GEV141 1.2m Antenna cable7. GEV142 1.6m Antenna cable8. TR500 Terminal9. 2, GEB121 Batteries


11. Radio Modem in GFU5/6 Hous-ing

12. MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA flash card13. GEV97 1.8m, 5pin Lemo cable14. GEV141 1.2m Antenna cable15. GAT1/GAT2 Radio Antenna16. GAD34 Small Antenna Arm17. GAD32 Telescopic Rod18. GVP603 Minipack

��




6. Attach the Radio Modem Hous-ing containing the Radio Modemto the GPS Receiver.

7. Place the GPS Receiver frontpanel up in the Minipack with thebatteries facing outwards.Fasten the strap around theReceiver (refer to diagram)

8. Push the Telescopic Rodthrough the slit in the top of theMinipack. Ensure it is located inthe sleeve inside the Minipackand push it all the way to thebottom. Adjust the height of theTelescopic Rod to suit.

9. Screw the Short Antenna Armonto the Telescopic Rod. Screwthe Radio Antenna onto theShort Antenna Arm.

10. Connect the Radio Modem tothe Radio Antenna using a 1.2mAntenna Cable. The cableshould pass down underneath

the Receiver and then up throughthe slit in the top of the Minipack.

11. Connect the GPS Antenna to theReceiver using the two AntennaCables. The longest Cableshould be connected to theReceiver. Pass this cablethrough a cable brake and downthrough the slit under one of thereflective strips at the bottom ofthe Minipack. Draw the requiredamount of cable out of theMinipack and tighten the cablebrake. Refer to the diagram.

12. Connect the TR500 to the portlabelled “Terminal”on the Re-ceiver using the 1.8mcable.Pass it through the open-ing under one of the reflectivestrips at the bottom of theMinipack, up through a cablebrake and then plug into theReceiver. Refer to the diagram.

13. Switch the System ON using theON/OFF key on the Terminal.

To Terminal

To GPS Antenna

To Radio Antenna


The Next Steps





Advice on using the Minipackis given in Section 2.14.

Ensure a dry plastic weatherprotection cap is fitted to the

socket on the TR500 that is notconnected to the sensor.




Use

The TR500 is mounted on the Receiver which is clippedto the grip. Connections are made from the Receiver tothe GPS and Radio Antennas. Recommended for shortperiods of use, especially where there are many obstacles(fences etc.).

Assumptions



2.10 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover, All on Pole, direct clip of TR500 on to Sensor


��

Equipment Checklist


pole with screw or stub3. GHT25 Grip for pole4. GHT27 Holder for GPS Receiver5. GLS17 Lower half aluminium

pole6. GAT1/GAT2 Radio Antenna7. GAD33 Antenna Arm8. GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable9. 2, GEB121 Batteries

10. TR500 Terminal11. SR510/520/530 GPS Receiver12. Radio Modem in GFU5/6 Hous-

ing13. MCF XMB-3 PC Card14. GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable



Follow steps 1-6 described in section2.5.

7. Clip the Antenna Arm to theGPS Antenna. Screw the RadioAntenna onto the Arm.


9. Connect the Radio Antenna tothe Radio Modem using a 1.2mAntenna Cable.

10. Switch the System ON using theON/OFF key on the Terminal.

The Next Steps





The Radio Antenna may alsobe connected directly to the

Radio Housing. Note however thatrange and quality of signal receivedmay be affected.


2.11 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover, All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated

Use

The TR500 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. Withanother metallic holder and a holder piece, the receiver isfixed to the pole. The Radio Modem plus radio antennaattaches to the Receiver. One connection is made fromthe Receiver to the Antenna. Another connection is madefrom the Receiver to the TR500. Recommended for shortperiods of use, especially where there are many obstacles(fences etc.).

Assumptions




1

2

3

5

9

13

10

L

4

8

67

11

12

Equipment Checklist



pole6. GHT37 Holder piece for GPS

Receiver with antenna cable and5pin Lemo cable

7. GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver8. TR500 Terminal9. 2, GEB121 Batteries


11. GAT1/GAT2 Radio Antenna12. Radio Modem in GFU5/6 Hous-

ing13. MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA flash card



Follow steps 1-9 described in section2.6.


11. Screw the Radio Antenna ontothe housing.


The Next Steps






2.12 Equipment Setup - Real Time Rover, GIS Rover

Use

The TR500 is held in the hand with the hand pouch.Connections are made from the Receiver to the GPS (or ifbeing used the combined GPS/DGPS antenna). Recom-mended for long periods of use, for mainly GIS type datacollection surveys.

The setup described in the following pages assumes anRTB or RTS module is being used (see also Appendix Kfor further information on GIS applications).

You may also use the Real-Time GIS Rover setup with astandard radio device but note the following differences:

1. With a standard radio device being used you will need aseparate radio antenna: attach the GAT1/GAT2 RadioAntenna to the pole using the GAD33 Antenna Arm (seethe RT-Rover, All on Pole chapter for further illustration).

2. The RTB/ RTS module cable will not be needed then:Connect the Radio antenna to the Radio modem housingusing the GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable (see the RT-Rover, Pole and Minipack chapter for further illustration).


Equipment Checklist

1. Combined RTB (or RTS)/GPSantenna

2. GAD32 Telescopic Rod3. GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable4. RTB (or RTS) differential

receiver module5. 0.3m GPS receiver to RTB (or

RTS) module cable6. MCF XMB-3 PC Card7. GEV97 1.8m, 5pin Lemo cable8. TR500 Terminal9. 2, GEB121 Batteries

10. GS50 GPS Receiver11. Handstrap with beltclip for

TR500 Terminal12. GVP603 Minipack

�

�

4

6

3

5

7

2

1

10

11

9

8

12




2. Place the Receiver front panelup in the Minipack with thebatteries facing outwards.Fasten the strap around theReceiver

3. Connect the RTB/GPS Antennato the Receiver using the An-tenna cables. Connect the cableto the RTB/RTS module androute the cable around thebottom of the Receiver and up toto the GPS antenna. Refer to thediagram.

4. Connect the TR500 to the portlabelled “Terminal” on theReceiver using the 1.8m cable.Pass it through the opening inthe bottom of the Minipack flap,down through a cable brake andthen plug into the Receiver.Refer to the diagram.

5. Connect the RTB/RTS module tothe Receiver GPS antenna portusing the 30 cm antenna cable.


To GPS/RTB (or RTS) antenna

From RTS/RTB moduleto GPS antenna portTo Terminal


The Next Steps



Ensure a dry plasticweather protection cap is

fitted to the socket on the TR500 thatis not connected to the sensor.



Advice on using theMinipack is given in Section2.14.


2.13 Equipment Setup - Repeater Station and Repeater Box

Use

The repeater box attaches to a tripod and the radio modemto the repeater box. An external battery also attaches to thetripod. The Radio Antenna is mounted on the tripod. Oneconnection is made from the battery to the repeater box.Another connection is made from the radio to the radioantenna.

For more information on repeaters and the repeater box seeAppendix H.

Assumptions

1. A RTK reference is set up, pre-programmed accordingto chapter 5.3 and running according to chapter 7.3.

2. A RTK rover is prepared and pre-programmedaccording to chapter 5.4.

3. The same type of radios are used on reference,repeater and rover station.

4. The radio modem at the repeater station isprogrammed to repeater mode.

5. All radio modems at reference, repeater and roveroperate on the same frequency.

6. The reference and rover receivers run standardfirmware 3.00 or higher.


Equipment Checklist

1. GAT1\GAT2 Radio Antenna2. GAD34 Short Antenna Arm3. GAD32 Telescopic Rod4. GHT36 Base for Telescopic Rod5. GEV120 2.8m Antenna Cable6. Radio Modem in GFU5/6

Housing7. GHT38 Repeater Box8. 1.8 m Connection cable for

external battery9. GEB71 Battery

10. GST20\GST05\05L Tripod

234

5

67

98

10

1



1. Set up the tripod.2. Screw the Base for the

Telescopic Rod onto the Tripod.Push the Telescopic Rod intothe Base.

3. Screw the Short Antenna Armonto the Telescopic Rod. Screwthe Radio Antenna onto the Arm.

4. Connect the Radio Modem tothe Repeater Box. Attach theRepeater Box to the tripod.

5. Connect the Radio Modem to theRadio Antenna using the 2.8mAntenna Cable.

6. Connect the Repeater Box to theGEB71 battery.

The Next Steps

As soon as the Repeater Box isconnected to the battery, it is ready toreceive and broadcast data.

Start surveying or a staking-out withthe rover. Further guidance isavailable in Chapter 7.4 and 7.5.


2.14 Using the Minipack

The Minipack has several featureswhich may not be readily apparent atfirst. These features help to makeusing System 500 more comfortable.

2. Hip BeltThe Hip Belt transfers most of theweight from the shoulders to the hipswhen properly adjusted.

It also contains velcro attachmentsthrough which cables can be passed.

Use the attachments as shown in thephotograph.

1. Antenna Pole StrapEnsures the Antenna Pole does notsway around and remains as uprightas possible.

Pass the strap around the pole andfasten using the clip as shown in thephotograph.


3. Internal Net PouchThe Backpack has an internal netpouch designed for carrying anAT501 or AT502 Antenna when not inuse. It can also be used for storingcoiled cables or carrying a nonstand-ard radio modem.

4. Using the Minipack in hightemperaturesIn high temperatures it is desirable toincrease air flow around the Receiver.Therefore the backpack can be kepthalf or even fully open when in use.

Open the Minipack halfway. Tuck theflap inside. Secure it with the velcropad.

Open the Minipack flap fully and foldthe flap under the Receiver duringuse in extremely hot temperatures.


2.15 Measuring Antenna Heights

The height of the GPS Antenna above the point consistsof several components - the Height Reading, the VerticalOffset and the Phase Center Eccentricities. When astandard System 500 Antenna mounted on standardSystem 500 accessories is selected, the only measure-ment you will have to input is the Vertical Height (shownas VR in the following section). When a pole is used, eventhis value is automatically suggested by the Receiver as2.00m (the height of the System 500 pole).

This means that for most operations, you will only need toinput the height measurement from the height hook or usethe default height measurement of 2.00m for the pole.

However, there may be cases when you need to calculatethe height components, such as when using non-Leicaaccessories or Antennas or when not using a tripod orpole.

It is also important to realize where the Antenna Heightsare measured to. This Datum is referred to as the Me-chanical Reference Plane. This varies for different Anten-nas. It is also the datum from which the Phase CenterEccentricities are calculated.

Phase Center Eccentricities of Leica Antennas arehandled automatically by System 500. They will have to beentered manually when using non-Leica Antennas. Adviceon how to create a new Antenna Type for non-LeicaAntennas is given in the Online Help of SKI-Pro (AntennaManagement).

Finally, the Antenna Height is sometimes calculated bytaking a slope distance from the point on the ground to theoutside edge of the Antenna. In this case, the VerticalHeight must be calculated using the Slope Height and aHorizontal Offset.

Special care must be taken when using System 300 GPSAntennas with a System 500 Receiver or when using theAT501/502 GPS Antenna on the System 300 pole.


2.15.1 Mechanical Reference Planes

The Mechanical Reference Plane or datum to which theAntenna Height is measured and from which the PhaseCenter Eccentricities are calculated is shown for eachLeica System 500 Antenna.

AT501 and AT502

The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of thethreaded metal insert.

AT503

The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of theAntenna itself.

MRP

AT504

The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of thePreamplifier Housing. The AT504 is built to a JPL designspecified by the IGS for Reference Stations. The Me-chanical Reference Plane is always referred to as theBottom of Preamplifier or BPA by the IGS.

MRP

0.0345m

0.1897m

MRP 0.1501m


1. Pillar Setup

2.15.2 Antenna Height components

VO=0

VR

MRPVE1 VE2

VO Vertical OffsetVR Vertical Height ReadingVE1 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1.VE2 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L2MRP Mechanical Reference Plane

Although an AT501/502 Antenna is shown, the same principles apply to theAT504 and AT303.

The Vertical Height (VR) value is measured from the pillar benchmark to theMechanical Reference Plane of the Antenna. As there is no accessory avail-able to measure the Vertical Height in this case, it is usually obtained throughlevelling. Refer to the details on the next page for help in measuring theVertical Height.

The Vertical Offset is not required in this case and therefore is input as zero.

The Vertical Phase Center Eccentricities are stored in the Receiver for allLeica System 500 Antennas and any non-Leica Antenna that you define. Aslong as the correct antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value intothe Receiver. These values do need to be calculated when a new type ofAntenna that does not exist in the Antenna Setup Records is used.


Pillar Setup II - Carrier and Adapter dimensions36

.5

145.

5

9.3

99.7

36.5

145.

5

109

All dimensions are shown in millime-ters and may be required whendetermining the Vertical HeightReading on a pillar or other nonstand-ard setup. They allow you to deter-mine the height to a surface on thecarrier (which is probably easier thandetermining it to the MechanicalReference Plane), and then add theremaining value to the MechanicalReference Plane.

GRT44 Carrier with GAD31 Stub toScrew Adapter

GRT46 Carrier


2. Tripod Setup

VO

VR

MRPVE1 VE2



The Vertical Height Reading (VR) value is measured using the Height Hook.

The Vertical Offset (VO) value is stored in the Antenna Setup record and for aTripod Setup with the Height Hook as shown is 0.36m. This will need to bemeasured if you are entering a new Antenna Setup Record without using theHeight Hook. There are two methods for mounting Leica Antennas - using aGRT46 with a 5/8 inch screw or using a GRT44 with stub and a GAD31 stub toscrew adapter. The VO value remains constant whichever setup is used.

The Vertical Phase Center Eccentricities are stored in the Receiver for allLeica System 500 Antennas and any non-Leica Antenna that you define. Aslong as the correct antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value intothe Receiver. These values do need to be calculated when a new type ofAntenna that does not exist in the Antenna Setup Records is used.


3. Pole Setup

VO = 0

VR

MRPVE1 VE2



The Vertical Height Reading (VR) value fixed at the height of the pole. With astandard Leica System 500 pole this is 2.0m. There are two System 500 upperpole halves. One has a 5/8 inch screw - the Antenna screws on directly. Theother has a stub and uses a GAD31 stub to screw adapter. Whichever poletype is used, the height remains at 2.00m. Additional 1.00 m pole sectionsmaybe easily added or subtracted. In some special cases where the lower halfof the pole alone is used, the height will be 1.00m.

The Vertical Offset (VO) value is zero in this case.

The Vertical Phase Center Eccentricities are stored in the Receiver for allLeica System 500 Antennas and any non-Leica Antenna that you define. Aslong as the correct Antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value intothe Receiver. These values do need to be calculated when a new type ofAntenna that does not exist in the Antenna Setup Records is used.


2.15.3 Measuring Slope Heights

VE1-VO

SR

VE2

HO

MRP

VO Vertical OffsetHO Horizontal OffsetSR Slope Height ReadingVE1 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1.VE2 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L2MRP Mechanical Reference Plane

If you are using the Slope Height Reading the antennaheight is calculated as follows:

Antenna Height = √(√(√(√(√(SR² - HO²) ± VO

If the Offset Point on the antenna is above the MechanicalReference Plane MRP, the Vertical Offset VO is negative.

The Slope Height Reading is measured from the point onthe ground to the outside edge of the antenna. TheAntenna used for this example is a Dorne Margolin T(Leica AT504) as specified by the IGS. The MechanicalReference Plane will differ depending on the Antenna typeused.

703. Using System 500 without a Terminal Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

The SR510, 520 and 530 receiverscan be used without the TR500attached.

Applications and set ups most suitedto this type of configuration areReference Stations for Post-Process-ing and Real-Time and Static/RapidStatic measurements.

The receiver can be programmed inthe office using the TR500. Thisgreatly reduces the knowledgerequired to operate the instrument inthe field.

Full instructions on how to programthe receiver are given in Chapter 5.

3. Using System 500 without a Terminal

71 3. Using System 500 without a TerminalTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

The Receiver and Antenna willusually be mounted on a tripod orpillar. Refer to Chapter 2 for detailsof equipment set up and connec-tions.

Measure the Antenna Height usingthe Height Hook. Note this valuedown. You will need to enter it intoSKI-Pro when you get back to theoffice. You should also note the PointId and start and stop times.

A suggested form for recordingnecessary data is given in section3.5.

The Receiver needs to be configuredcorrectly before it will work. Theparameters that are especiallyimportant for working without aTerminal are in Occupation Settings.Full details are given in Chapter 5.

3.1 Setting up the Equipment

Once the equipment is set up, switchit on using the ON/OFF switch on theReceiver.

The equipment will automaticallybegin to acquire and track satellitesand record data as set up in theReceiver configuration.

Wait at the point for the required time.Note that the required observationtime does not begin until the SatelliteStatus LED is constant green (seenext section). A list of approximateobservation times for Rapid Staticand Static baseline measurements isgiven in Appendix B.

3.2 Operation 3.3 Shut Down

To shut down the equipment pressand hold the ON/OFF button for 3seconds. The LED indicators will notbe lit when the equipment is switchedoff.

723. Using System 500 without a Terminal Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

3.4 LED Indicators

Every System 500 Receiver has threeLED indicators that inform the opera-tor of basic Receiver status. The LEDindicators are located at the top of theReceiver and are only visible whenthe TR500 Terminal is not attached.

The top LED gives power information,the middle gives satellite trackinginformation and the lower givesmemory status.

PowerSatellite TrackingMemory Status

3.4.1 Power LED 3.4.2 Satellite Status LED

Power LED off -No Power

Power LEDgreen - PowerOK

Power LEDFlashing Green -Power Low

Satellite StatusLED off - NoSatellites tracked

Satellite StatusLED flashinggreen - firstsatellite tracked,position not yetavailable

Satellite StatusLED Green -Enough satellitestracked to com-pute position

73 3. Using System 500 without a TerminalTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

3.4.3 Memory Status LED

Memory StatusLED off - MemoryDevice notavailable (PCCard not insertedor InternalMemory notfitted).

Memory StatusLED Green -Memory capacityOK on selecteddevice

Memory StatusLED flashinggreen - Memorycapacity 75% fullon selecteddevice

3.5 Field Record Sheet

Memory StatusLED red -Memory full onselected device

Field Record - Static/RapidStatic Survey point

Operator Name:

Start time (Local):

Stop Time (Local):

Point ID:

Antenna Height:

Receiver Serial No.:

Date:

744. TR500 Terminal Overview Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

4. TR500 Terminal OverviewThe TR500 Terminal performs three main functions:

1. Program the GPS Receiver2. Enable input of information to the GPS Receiver3. Display information from the GPS Receiver

The Terminal must be connected to the GPS Receiver to function. It can beconnected using a cable or mounted directly onto the receiver.

Once connected, the Terminal and Receiver can be switched on using the ON/OFF key on the Terminal.

A GHT28 handstrap/beltclip is available which fits on the rear of the Terminal.This improves handling of the Terminal in applications where it is held con-stantly in the hand. (E.g. GIS applications).

TR500 Terminal attached to GPS Receiverwith cable

75 4. TR500 Terminal OverviewTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

When activated for the first time, theTerminal runs through several boot upscreens and then the Main Menuappears.

The basic layout consists of a row ofstatus icons over a main display areawith a row of six softkeys (F1-F6) atthe bottom.

The Status Icons provide informationrelated to basic Receiver functions.

The Directory Bar gives your locationwithin the menu structure.

The Main Display Area shows infor-mation regarding the receiver and/orongoing survey operation.

The Softkeys (F1-F6) indicate whichcommand may be executed bypressing the relevant key.

4.1 Screen Layout

Status IconsDirectory Bar

Main Display AreaSoftkeys F1-F6


On certain screens a shift symbol willappear in the bottom right cornerabove the softkey. It indicates thatfurther choices are available on thesoftkeys.

At this time, the shift key appears so:

When it is pressed, it appears so:

Pressing it again will toggle back tothe original softkeys.

When a function is being carried outthat will take a significant amount oftime, the hourglass symbol (shownbelow) will appear.

This indicates that the system is busy.


Accuracy Status

High Precision Navigation (cm level)

Precision Navigation (0.5 - 5m level)

Navigation (<100m)

When no position is available, no icon is shown.

4.2 Status Icons

AccuracyStatus

PositionMode

No. visibleSatellites

No. Satellitesused on L1/L2

GSMStatus

MemoryStatus

LocalTime

BatteryStatus

RadioStatus

Note that the icons that appear depend uponwhich System 500 Receiver you are using, the

options set on it and the configuration that you are using.

ObservationRecording

Status

Auto PositionRecordingStatus


Position Mode

Static - the GPS Antennashould be held stationary.

Moving - The GPS Antennamay move.

The Position Mode is governed by thetype of operation defined in theConfiguration.

No. Visible Satellites

The number of theoretically visiblesatellites according to the currentalmanac are displayed.

When the Track Mode is set toMaxTrak this will be indicatedwith a little “T” being added tothe icon.

No. Satellites used on L1/L2

When an Accuracy Status icon isdisplayed the number of satellitescurrently used for the position compu-tation are shown. Satellites that aretracked but with a poor signal qualityare not shown.

When no Accuracy Status icon isdisplayed the number of trackedsatellites are shown, irrespective ofthe signal quality.


Radio Status

Radio Transmitting (blinks)

Radio Receiving (blinks)

If two radio modems are being usedsimultaneaously, the icon will alter-nate between each modem.

GSM Status

The GSM phone is connectedto the network.

If this icon blinks, the GSM phone iseither trying to connect to or discon-nect from the network.

Memory Status

Internal Memory selected

PC-Card selected

Safe to remove PC-Card

Memory level Indicator. Has 12levels between:

Memory Empty and

Memory Full


Observation Recording Status

The Receiver is recording rawGPS observations inStationary mode. TheReceiver should be heldstationary.

The Receiver is recording rawGPS observations in Movingmode. The Receiver maymove.

Auto Position Recording Status

Will appear when Auto PositionRecording has been activated in theConfiguration Set.

Positions are being recordedaccording to distance.

Positions are being recordedaccording to time.

Local Time

The local date can be set to displayeither 12 or 24 hour clock.


Battery Status

Battery Voltage OK

Battery supplying 2/3 peakvoltage

Battery supplying 1/3 peakvoltage

Battery empty

The battery being used is denoted bythe letter next to it. A and B are theplug-in camcorder batteries, E is theexternal battery.

This example shows that an externalbattery is fully charged and is beingused to power the system.

The system will always use thebattery with the highest voltage level.

Due to the discharge characteristicsof the batteries, the lengths of timebetween the four voltage level iconsmay not be consistent. The voltagelevel will decrease more quickly thelower it gets.


4.3 Keyboard

The Terminal keyboard is a QWERTYlayout designed for use in tempertureextremes and also for gloved hands ifnecessary.

The six keys F1-F6 at the top of thekeyboard correspond to the sixsoftkeys that appear on the screenwhen the Terminal is activated.

Pressing Shift followed by F1 willalways activate the Help screen.Pressing Shift followed by F6 will quitthe Help and return you to the screenyou were on.Alternatively, pressing Shift followedby F6 will quit Survey, Stake Out orApplication.

Use the Esc key to step back to theprevious screen at any time.

Use the key combination Alt + L tolock and unlock the terminal.Use the key combination Alt + B toswitch the screen illumination on andoff.

Use the Shift key when the Shiftsymbol is displayed to reveal furtherchoices on the softkeys F1-F6.

Use the CONFIG key to enter theConfiguration menus at any time.

The CE key is used to clear the lastcharacter entered when enteringnames, numbers etc. into the Re-ceiver.

Use the ENTER key to confirm anentry into the system.

Use the STATUS key to accessstatus information at any time.

Use the Cursor keys to move aroundthe screen.

The keys F7-F10 are user definablefunction keys. They can be defined toexecute commands or access anyscreen of your choosing. See section9.4.


4.4 General Operating Principles

There are several conventions usedin the user interface of System 500.

2. Entering DataAt times you will have to enter PointIds, Names etc. Enter the data usingthe keyboard and press the Enter key.

Special characters such as ä, á, çetc. can be entered using thealphanumeric input. When thecharacter you wish to input is not onthe keyboard, press the Enter key.The F1-F6 keys will then contain 5characters on each. Press the keythat contains the character yourequire. The F1-F6 keys will thencontain one of each of the five thatyou selected. Use the up and downcursor keys to scroll through all thepossible characters. Press the keythat corresponds to the character yourequire.This will then be entered. Theextra characters that are available foruse can be configured in theConfigure menu.

1. Function KeysF1-F6 function keys appear below sixbars on the screen. These bars willappear with commands in them oneach screen. To execute the com-mand, press the correspondingfunction key.


Working Example

Application - Entering a special character.

Technique - N/A

Requirement - You need to enter the Job name “Cézanne”. All the charac-ters are contained on the keyboard except “é”.

Field Procedure - The “C” is entered. To select the “é”, press F1. Thefunction keys will then change as follows:

Press F3 to select the “é”.

3. Selecting items from list boxesAt times you will have to select anitem from a list box. This could be apoint Id, Job, code etc. There are twotypes of list boxes.

1. The list box appears as thewhole screen.

2. An item appears with an arrownext to it indicating a drop downlist box.

When a list box appears on the wholescreen, a search field will appear inthe directory line with a blinkingcursor. If you know the name of theitem you are search for you may typein the first few letters. The item(s) thatmatch what you type will be automati-cally highlighted. This is case sensi-tive. List boxes that contain morelines than is possible to fit on thescreen have a scroll bar at the side.This indicates your position within thelist.


Alternatively you can move down thelist item by item using the cursorkeys.

Pressing Shift will reveal HOME (F2),END (F3), PG UP (F4) (Page Up) andPG DN (F5) (Page Down) keys. Youmay also use these keys to scroll upand down the list.

When a drop down list box is avail-able, a small arrow appears next tothe selected item, as with Ant Nameshown below.

Press the right or left cursor key tocycle through the choices or pressENTER to make the drop down boxappear.

A search field will appear at the top ofthe list box with a blinking cursor. Ifyou know the name of the item youare search for you may type in thefirst few letters. The item(s) that

match what you type will be automati-cally highlighted. This is case sensi-tive.

Alternatively you can move down thelist item by item using the cursorkeys.

Pressing SHIFT will reveal HOME(F2), END (F3), PG UP (F4) (PageUp) and PG DN (F5) (Page Down)keys. You may also use these keys toscroll up and down the list.

865. Configuring the Receiver Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

5. Configuring the ReceiverThe receiver has numerousparameters and functions which canbe configured by the user.

Different Configuration Sets are usedfor different measuring techniques.Several default Configuration Setsare programmed into the receiverbefore delivery. These default filesshould cover the majority ofapplications.

However, you also have theopportunity to define your ownConfiguration Sets. You may defineseveral Configuration Sets to coverevery type of operation that you arelikely to carry out. This can be doneusing the TR500 Terminal.

There are two methods for definingthe Configuration. You can selectConfigure from the Main Menu orpress the CONFIG key.

Selecting Configure from the MainMenu enables a sequentialconfiguration. Parameters can eitherbe defined one after each other orexplicitly selected from a list. Theseparameters are saved permanently inthe Configuration Set and will be usedas defaults each time theConfiguration Set is used.

Pressing the CONFIG key enters amenu from which you can choose theparameter you wish to define. Certaininfrequently used parameters are onlyavailable through the CONFIG keyand are not contained in thesequential configuration.

It is recommended that the CONFIGkey is only used when you are alreadymeasuring and realize that you needto change a parameter temporarily(for the duration of the currentsurvey), or need to configure aparameter not contained in thesequential configuration.

When Configure is selected from theMain Menu there are twoconfiguration levels available,Standard and Advanced. Standardis recommended for most users.Advanced enables definition ofparameters required for specializedapplications.

To start defining a Configuration Set,attach the Terminal to the Receiverdirectly or connect it using a Lemocable.

Switch on the Receiver and Terminalby pressing the ON/OFF key.

87 5. Configuring the ReceiverTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

The following screen will appear thefirst time you switch on.

The most frequently used functionsare displayed. Use SHOW/HIDE (F4)to reveal/hide all of the functions.

This chapter covers configurationusing the sequential configuration(Configure) from the Main Menu.Details about configuration using theCONFIG key can be found in Chapter9.Select Configure from the MainMenu. Press CONT (F1).

The following screen will appear:

You can select a Configuration Set bymoving up and down the list andpressing CONT (F1) or entering thename of the Configuration Set. PressEDIT (F3) to edit it. Changes indefault Configuration Sets are onlytemporary until the sensor is turnedof. Permanent changes, require thecreation of a new Configuration Set.

To enter a new Configuration Setpress NEW (F2).To delete a Configuration Set pressDEL (F4). You will be asked forconfirmation before the ConfigurationSet is deleted.

Pressing INFO (F5) toggles betweenthe date of creation, creator anddescription of the Configuration Sets.

Entering a new Configuration SetAfter NEW (F2) has been selected,the following screen will appear.

Enter the Name and, if required aDescription and Creator. Press theENTER key after each entry. PressCONT (F1) when you are finished.

If you create a new Configuration Seta copy of the highlightedConfiguration Set will be created.


This section covers configuration ofthe receiver for post-processedStatic, Rapid Static or KinematicReference operations.

Highlight the Configuration Set youwish to edit and press EDIT (F3).Note that you cannot edit defaultConfiguration Sets. You have tocreate a new Set and then edit it.

Operation ModeSelect the Operation Mode that yourequire. The Operation Mode defineswhich Configuration screens will beavailable to you.

You may choose between Standardand Advanced. Standard isrecommended for most users.Advanced enables definition ofparameters required for specializedapplications.

When you have made your selectionpress CONT (F1) to go through thefixed order of parameter panels.

Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing ofthe available parameter panels whichcan then be accessed individuallywith CONT (F1). Changes areautomatically stored at the end of thelist. Changes in individual parameterpanels can be stored with STORE(F3) without the need to go to the endof the list.

The Standard Operation Mode isdescribed from here on. The extraconfigurable features available whenAdvanced is selected are described insection 5.1.1.

5.1 Configuring the Receiver for Static and Rapid Static Operations


AntennaSelect the Antenna configuration thatyou are using.

Ant. Name - Displays and selects thecurrently selected antenna setup.

Vert Offset - Displays the verticaloffset defined in the Antenna setup(Ant Name).

Deflt Hgt - Displays a default heightfor the Antenna setup. This is of littleuse for Static or Rapid Static applica-tions where the Antenna height differswith each setup.

Meas Type - Also, enter the meansby which the Antenna height wasmeasured. For the majority of GPSAntennas (including all Leica anten-nas), this will be Vertical. The heightof some non-Leica GPS antennascan only be measured by taking theslope distance to the outer edge ofthe Antenna. If this is the case, selectSlope and enter the averaged value.You will then be required to enter aHorizontal Offset also. See Section2.15.3 for more details on measuringslope height.

To select an antenna setup, highlightAnt. Name and press ENTER toopen the drop down box. All of theexisting antenna setups are listed.

You may select from this list or enteryour own Antenna configuration bypressing the NEW (F2) key. Note thatthe settings from the currently high-lighted antenna setup are taken overas suggested default values.

Most Static and Rapid Static Surveysor Reference Stations are carried outusing a tripod or pillar setup.

When a factory default tripod setup ischosen, the Vertical Offset is auto-matically set at 0.36m. You will onlyneed to measure the height with theheight hook when setting up over apoint.


Note that factory default antennasetups contain an elevation depen-dent correction model. This is notseen by the user. When setting upyour own configuration with theReceiver, this model is not taken over.This model is required for real-timerover operations. If you need to inputyour own antenna setup and it re-quires an antenna correction model,use SKI Pro to configure the antennasetup and transfer it to the Receiver.

Advice on calculating Antennaheights and offsets for Leica and non-Leica Antennas is given in Chapter2.15.Use the EDIT (F3) key to edit thehighlighted Antenna configuration.Note that factory default Antennaconfigurations can only be viewedand not edited.

Use the DEL (F4) key to delete anAntenna configuration.

Use the DEFLT (F5) key to revealfactory default Antenna configurationswith current System 500 GPS Anten-nas. This will then change to ALL.Use ALL (F5) to reveal System 300Antenna configurations also. You canpick out the Antenna configurationsthat you will use the most and deletethe rest. All possible factory defaultAntenna configurations may still beaccessed in the future by using theDEFLT and ALL keys.

PositionThis screen defines the way in whichposition is displayed. These settingsare mostly used for Real-Time Roversetups.

Update Rate - Defines the rate atwhich the position will be updated onthe display.

Coord Sys - You may select acoordinate system which will be usedto display the positions. The WGS84coordinate system will always beavailable and should be sufficient forStatic/Rapid Static work. You maydetermine other coordinate systemsin SKI Pro and upload them or youmay determine other coordinate


systems in the field usingApplications\Determine CoordSystem (see section 11.1).

Further options are available on thisscreen in Advanced mode. Seesection 5.1.1 for details.

Highlight Coord Sys and pressENTER to reveal the list of coordinatesystems currently available.

Select the coordinate system that youwish to use.

Use NEW (F2) to define a newcoordinate system. Use EDIT (F3) toedit a coordinate system. Use DEL

(F4) to delete the selected coordinatesystem and INFO (F5) to reveal thetype of transformation used.

When NEW (F2) is pressed, thefollowing screen appears.

Coord Sys - Defines the name of thenew coordinate system.

Further advice on Coordinate Sys-tems is given in Section 11.

When you have set the parameterspress CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\Position screen.

When using EDIT (F3) the samedescriptions apply.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\Position screen.


Formats

You can configure the way in whichinformation is presented whensurveying.

Format Grid - The format of gridcoordinates if they are being used.

Format Geodetic - The format ofgeodetic coordinates if they are beingused.

Quality Type - The way in which thequality of a position is displayed in theMain Survey screen. This is Hard-wired to DOP for Static/Rapid StaticConfigurations. It will display aDilution of Precision according to thecomponents defined.

Defined by - Defines the componentsused to calculate the DOP. Thedefinitions of the DOP are as follows:

Height - VDOPPos - HDOPPos + Hgt - PDOPPos + Hgt + Time - GDOP

OCUPY Counter - Defines how thelength of time spent occupying a pointis displayed. Select from Time -normal time or Observations - thenumber of observations recorded.

CodingIf you wish to select a coding systempress ENTER and choose fromThematical or Free coding. Completedescriptions of the coding systemsused by System 500 are given inChapter 8.

Press CODES (F3) to review thecodes in the chosen codelist. Youmay also edit the codelist here.


Real-TimeFor Static or Rapid Static post-processing operations select Noneand press CONT (F1).

Logging

Log Static Obs - Switches logging onor off when the Receiver is in Staticmode. The receiver has to bestationary.

Obs Rate - The rate at whichobservations will be logged. For Staticobservations over long baselines andlong periods of time 15-30 seconds isa reasonable rate. For Rapid Staticapplications, 10-15 seconds isnormally used. For Referencestations for post-processed and real-time kinematic rovers, the rate shouldbe set the same as at the Rover.

Log Moving Obs - Only availablewhen Log Static Obs = YES. Setsthe observation rate when thereceiver is in Moving mode. This isonly used in Real-Time kinematic andPost-Processed kinematic operations.

Log Auto Positions - Willautomatically log positions at aspecified rate. This is mostly used forreal-time rover operations. Seesection 5.4 for details.

Press CONT (F1) to continue to thenext screen.



Occupation SettingsThese settings control the way inwhich points are occupied andrecorded.

OCUPY Mode - Sets the way inwhich coordinates will be recorded fora point. For Static, Rapid Static andPost-processed Reference Stationapplications Normal only will beavailable.This means that observations will berecorded until the STOP key ispressed. The last observation that isrecorded is the one that expireddirectly before STOP was pressed.

Auto Store - Allows you toautomatically store a point after theSTOP key has been pressed.


Id TemplatesAn Id template is used to pre-define aPoint Id. This feature is mainly usedin post-processed and real-timekinematic operations where manypoints are collected quickly. ForStatic, Rapid Static and Real-TimeReference operations, set all fields toNo template used.


Press CONT (F1) to complete theconfiguration. You will return to theMain Menu.


The Advanced Mode contains extraconfigurable parameters that may berequired for certain specializedapplications.

Select Advanced inCONFIGURE\Operation Mode.

Only the screens that differ fromthose seen in Standard Mode aredescribed here.

PositionIn addition to the functionality given inStandard mode, details about thechosen coordinate system are given.

Residuals - Available when editing acoordinate system. The method bywhich residuals will be distributedthroughout the transformation area isdisplayed.This may help the transformationresult be more realistic and helpdisperse any strains in thetransformation. 1/Dist, 1/Dist2 and 1/Dist3/2 distributes the residuals of thecontrol points according to thedistance between each control pointand the newly transformed point.

5.1.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Static and Rapid Static

Multiquadratic distributes theresiduals using a multiquadraticinterpolation approach.

Transform - The name of thetransformation set used is displayed.Ellipsoid - The name of the localellipsoid is displayed.Projection -The name of theprojection used is displayed.Geoid Model - The name of thegeoid model used is displayed.CSCS Model - The name of theCSCS model used is displayed.

Note that the details that aredisplayed depend upon the type oftransformation used. Certain types oftransformation do not use all of thedescribed parameters to calculatelocal coordinates.


LoggingIn addition to the functionality given inStandard mode, you can also specifythe observables to be recorded andaccess further functionality via theFILES (F6) key.

Observables - Defines what isrecorded in the raw GPS data.Extended records extra observablesincluding the Doppler observable.

Pressing the FILES (F6) key enablesyou to configure further options.

Log File Segments - Will split upthe recorded data into files of aspecific time-based length unless 1File is selected. If a time is selectedthe option Split Tracks will becomeavailable. Select No will only recorddata into a new file if the time isreached and a new track is observed.

Auto Del Log Files - Will delete therecorded data after the specifiedlength of time unless Never is se-lected.

Press CONT (F1) to return toCONFIGURE\Logging.

Occupation SettingsAdditional functionality available inthis panel over Standard mode isAuto OCUPY, Auto Stop, STOP P-PRC and END Survey.

Auto OCUPY - will automaticallyoccupy the point as soon as thesurvey is started. Timed is chosen forautomatic point occupations at acertain time. The time is specified inthe SURVEY panel.

Auto Stop - will automatically stopthe measurements according to thesetting in the STOP P-PRC function.The measurements stop when thecriteria for the setting reach 100%.


STOP P-PRC - Defines the methodused for Auto Stop when Auto Stop isset to YES.When Auto Stop is set to NO apercentage value will be displayednext to the Time or Epochs in theMain Survey screen. This indicateshow much of the Auto Stop criteriahas elapsed. The Auto Stop criteria isdefined using the P-PRC (F5) key(see below).

END Survey - Defines how thesurvey will be ended. Manual lets youexit the survey yourself. Automaticwill exit the survey automatically.Auto & Shut-down will exit thesurvey and turn the sensor off.

When one of the STOP P-PRCoptions is selected the P-PRC (F5)key will become available. Pressingthis key will enable you to configurethe option you have selected.

# of Sats is selected, set the length oftime to observe depending on thenumber of satellites available. Youmay edit the value for each number ofsatellites. Should the number ofavailable satellites change duringobservations, the observationsalready recorded will be taken intoaccount. Should the number ofsatellites decrease, more time will beadded. Should the number of satel-lites increase, time will be subtracted.The Receiver stops recording whenthe time limit is reached.

Press CONT (F1) to return toCONFIGURE\Occupation Settings.

When:

Time is selected, set the requiredobservation time for each point. Thetime starts counting when OCUPY ispressed. The Receiver stops record-ing when the set length of time isreached.

STOP&GO Indicator is selected, setthe baseline range. When measuring,an observation time will be calculatedbased on the selected baselinerange, the number of availablesatellites and the GDOP. This isdisplayed as a percentage value.

Observations is selected, set thenumber of epochs that should berecorded at each point.


Working Example

Application - Post Processed Rapid Static Observation Recording

Technique - Rapid Static

Requirement - You wish to view the Stop and Go Indicator on the MainSurvey screen but do not want to automatically stop the survey.

Settings -

Other Settings - Use P-PRC (F5) to set the Baseline Length.

Field Procedure - After pressing OCUPY the time or epoch counter willstart. The Stop and Go Indicator percentage value will be shown in bracketsnext to this. It will run until STOP is pressed. The observations will not stopbeing recorded at 100% automatically. Further information regarding theSTOP & GO indicator is available in STATUS\SURVEY\STOP&GOIndicator.

Id TemplatesId Templates are not normally of usefor Static, Rapid Static or KinematicReference Stations and should be setto No Template Used.

However, should you wish to usethem, you will find you may alsoconfigure Id Templates for AuxiliaryPoints in exactly the same way as fornormal points.


5.2 Configuring the Receiver for Post-Processed Kinematic Operations

This section covers configuration ofthe receiver for Post-ProcessedKinematic operations.


You may choose between Standardand Advanced. Standard isrecommended for most users.Advanced enables definition ofparameters required for specializedapplications.


Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing ofthe available parameter panels which

can then be accessed individuallywith CONT (F1). Changes areautomatically stored at the end of thelist. Changes in individual parameterpanels can be stored with STORE(F3) without the need to go to the endof the list.

The Standard operation mode isdescribed from here on. The extraconfigurable features available whenAdvanced is selected are described inSection 5.2.1.





Deflt Hgt - Displays a default heightfor the Antenna setup. If the antennawill always be mounted at a fixedheight (E.g. on a pole or always at thesame fixed location), enter the value.You will also get a chance to enter theheight for each set up during surveyoperations.

Meas Type - Also, enter the meansby which the Antenna height wasmeasured. For kinematic measure-ments using a pole, this will beVertical.

To select an antenna setup, highlightAnt. Name and press ENTER toopen the drop down box. All of theexisting antenna configurations arelisted.

You may select from this list or enteryour own antenna configuration bypressing the New (F2) key andentering the required information.

Most Post-Processed KinematicSurveys are carried out using theSystem 500 pole. When a factorydefault pole setup is selected, (AT501Pole/AT502 Pole) the Vertical Offsetis set automatically at zero and theDeflt Hgt at 2.00m. Note that thesettings from the currently highlightedantenna setup are taken over assuggested default values.

Advice on calculating AntennaHeights and offsets for Leica andnon-Leica Antennas is given inChapter 2.15.

Use the Edit (F3) key to edit thehighlighted Antenna configuration.Use the DEL (F4) key to delete anAntenna configuration.

Use the DEFLT (F5) key to revealdefault antenna configurations withcurrent System 500 GPS antennas.This will then change to ALL.


Use ALL (F5) to reveal System 300antenna configurations also. You canpick out the antenna configurationsthat you will use the most and deletethe rest. All possible antennaconfigurations may still be accessedin the future by using the DEFLT andALL keys.

PositionThis screen defines the way in whichposition is displayed. These settingsare mostly used for Real-Time Roversetups.


Coord Sys - You may also select acoordinate system which will be usedto display the positions. The WGS84coordinate system will always beavailable and should be sufficient forpost-processed kinematic work. Youmay define other coordinate systemsin Applications in Determine CoordSystem (see section 11.1).




Use NEW (F2) to define a newcoordinate system. Use EDIT (F3) toedit a coordinate system. Use DEL(F4) to delete the selected coordinatesystem and INFO (F5) to reveal thetype of transformation used.




Further information about CoordinateSystems is given in Chapter 11.




Formats

You can configure the way in whichinformation is presented when sur-veying.



Quality Type - The way in which thequality of a position is displayed in theMain Survey screen. This is Hard-wired to DOP for Post-processedKinematic Configurations.

It will display a Dilution of Precisionaccording to the components defined.



OCUPY Counter - Defines how thelength of time spent occupying a pointis displayed. Select from Time -normal time or Observations - thenumber of observations recorded.




Real-TimeFor Static or Rapid Staticpostprocessing operations selectNone and press CONT (F1).

Logging

Log Static Obs - Switches logging onor off when the Receiver is in Staticmode. The receiver has to bestationary. This is used whenperforming Static Initializations orwhen occupying distinct points in akinematic chain.

Obs Rate - The rate at whichobservations will be logged when thereceiver is stationary or when it ismoving. For Static intializations oroccupying distinct points in akinematic chain, the rate should beset at between 0.1-2 seconds.


Log Moving Obs - Only availablewhen Log Static Obs = YES. Acti-vates observation recording when thereceiver is in moving mode. The rateis set in Obs Rate.

Static Init - Sets whether a StaticInitialization will be performed at thebeginning of a kinematic chain. Whenusing the SR510 set this option toYES.

Log Auto Positions - Will automati-cally log positions at a specified rate.This is mostly used for real-timeoperations. See section 5.4 fordetails.

Moving Ant Height - Sets theAntenna Height when the receiver isin moving mode. When a standardSystem 500 pole setup is used, thesuggested default will be 2.00m.



Occupation SettingsThese settings control the way inwhich points are occupied andrecorded.

OCUPY Mode - Sets the way inwhich coordinates will be recorded fora point.Normal means that the observationswill be recorded when the STOP keyis pressed. A type of averaging isperformed on the measurementsobserved over the time spent on thepoint. This helps filter out effects ofslight movement. (E.g. tremblinghands).Instantaneous means that a time tagwill be recorded when the OCUPY


key is pressed. During post-processing, A coordinate will beinterpolated between the positions atthe neighboring two epochs.

For post-processed kinematicsurveys, it is possible to use either ofthe settings.

Auto Store - Allows you toautomatically store a point after theSTOP key has been pressed.


Overview of Normal and Instantaneous settings

NormalOCUPY Button

Pressed

Time in Epochs

STOP ButtonPressed

Instantaneous

Time in Epochs

Plan View

OCUPY ButtonPressed and Point

Coordinatesinterpolated basedon Epochs 2 and 3


Coordinatesinterpolated based

on Epochs 4 and 5


Coordinatesinterpolated basedon Epochs 2 and 3

OCUPY ButtonPressed and PointCoordinatesinterpolated basedon Epochs 4 and 5

Post-processed coordinatescomputed by averagingresulting positions of epochs2 and 3


Id TemplatesAn Id template is used to pre-define aPoint Id. This feature is mainly usedin post-processed kinematic and real-time kinematic operations wheremany points are collected quickly.When set up correctly it will save youhaving to type in the Point Id at eachpoint.

OCUPY Pts - Displays the Idtemplate selected for use withmanually recorded points.Auto Log Pos - Displays the Idtemplate selected for use withautomatically recorded points.

Select the template that you wish touse. Press ENTER to reveal the list ofavailable templates.

In this panel two default templates aredisplayed and also a template that auser has previously defined.Inc stands for Increment and denotesthe amount by which any specifiednumber will increment at each point.Crsr stands for Cursor and denotesthe character number at which thecursor will be automatically placed.

The arrow means that thistemplate is set to operate in theRemain Running mode.

No Template Used - if this option isselected the last Point Id entered inthe Survey panel will be displayed.The Point Id will be automaticallyincremented if that Point Id containsany numerical characters.If you overtype this Point Id the autoincrement will start from the newPoint Id.

Time and Date - will automaticallyuse the current local time and date asthe Point Id.

Point ##### - automatically writesthe word “Point” followed by anautomatically incrementing 5 figurenumber (denoted by #).


To define your own Id Template pressNEW (F2).

Pt Id. Mode - Is the Mode how the PtTemplate will be used. If you selectRemain Running and you enter adifferent Point Id manually in theSurvey panel the new Point Id will beused as the new Id Template. Thefollowing Point Id’s will then be basedon this new Template. If you selectChange to Indiv. and then enter aPoint Id manually in the Survey panelthe Point Id will return to the IdTemplate as it is defined.

Id - Displays the way in which thetemplate is currently configured. Youmay also enter any standard text herethat you would like to see in the IdTemplate. (In this example thestandard text is the word “Point”. The# symbols indicate automaticallyincrementing numbers).Note that leading spaces cannot beaccepted.

Num Start - Defines the start positionof any automatically incrementingnumber.

Num End - Defines the end positionof any automatically incrementingnumber.

Auto Inc - Defines whether thenumber will increment automaticallyat subsequent points.

Num Inc - Defines the amount bywhich any automatically incrementingnumber will increment.You may entera negative increment if required.

Cursor Pos - Defines the position atwhich the cursor will start at.

Press CONT (F1) until you return tothe CONFIGURE\ Id Templatesscreen.

To edit an existing Id Template pressEDIT (F3).

To delete an existing Id Templatepress DEL (F4).



You are completing a survey where you will require many different point IDs. Most point IDs willneed an incrementing number behind the text. The first points you measure will need the point ID“Bolt ###”.

In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point ID templateas shown here.Note that the Id type is set to “Remain Running”.

Within the Survey panel, the first point willautomatically show the Point Id “Bolt 001” uponpressing STORE, the next Point Id will automaticallyshow “Bolt 002”.

Working Example 1

Requirement -

Field Proc -

Settings -


Working Example 1 (cont)

You now wish to survey points with the Id“Road####” starting with Id “Road0723”. Enter thispoint Id into Survey panel. The next point Id willautomatically be “Road0724”.

You now wish to survey one individual point and giveit the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, pressSHIFT and then INDIV (F5) and enter this point Id.

Survey this point and upon pressing STORE, thenext point Id will revert back to “Road0724”.

Field Proc (cont) -

Note: Should you wish to store any new point Id as a template into the “library” then access theCONFIGURE\ ID Templates panel (CONFIG, 1 Survey, 5 Point Id Templates) and then pressCONT (F1). The point Id currently in use is now stored as a template.


Working Example 2

Field Proc -

You are completing a survey where you need only one point ID that needs an incrementing numberbehind the text. These points will need the point ID “Point####”. However you will also surveysome individual points that will need unique point Ids.

In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point IDtemplate as shown here.Note that the Id type is set to “Change to Indiv.”.

Within the Survey panel, the first point willautomatically show the Point Id “Point0001”. Uponpressing STORE, the next Point Id willautomatically show “Point0002”.

Requirement -

Settings -


You now wish to survey one individual point and giveit the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, enter thispoint ID. Survey this point and upon pressingSTORE, the next point Id will revert back to“Point0002”.

Note - When entering the individual point Id “BM98”you did not need to press SHIFT INDIV (F5) as inWorking Example 1. This is because the “Point####”template is operating in the Change to Individualmode.

Suppose you do now wish to survey points using anew point Id “###Fence” and you wish this templateto operate in the Remain Running mode.

Enter the point Id “001Fence” and then press SHIFTRUN (F5). Occupy and store this point. The nextpoint Id will be “002Fence”

Field Proc (cont) -


Note: Numerical characters in front of any text will also increment. This allows any type ofincrementing point Ids to be created.


5.2.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Post-Processed Kinematic

The Advanced Mode contains certainextra configurable options that maybe required for specializedapplications.




Residuals - The method by whichresiduals will be distributedthroughout the transformation area isdisplayed.Transform - The name of thetransformation set used is displayed.Ellipsoid - The name of the localellipsoid is displayed.Projection -The name of theprojection used is displayed.Geoid Model - The name of thegeoid model used is displayed.CSCS Model - The name of theCSCS model used is displayed.



LoggingIn addition to the functionality given inStandard mode, you can also specifythe observables to be recorded andaccess further functionality via theFILES (F6) key (not on the GS50/GS50+).

Observables - Defines what isrecorded in the raw GPS data.Extended records extra observablesincluding the Doppler observable. Fulldetails of what is recorded in eachmode is given in Appendix D.


Log File Segments will split up therecorded data into files of a specificlength unless 1 File is selected. If atime is selected the option SplitTracks will become available. SelectNo will only record data into a new fileif the time is reached and a new trackis observed.

Auto Del Log Files will delete therecorded data after the specifiedlength of time unless Never is se-lected.


Occupation SettingsAdditional functionality available inthis panel over Standard mode isAuto OCUPY, Auto Stop, STOP P-PRC and END Survey.


Auto Stop - will automatically stopthe measurements according to thesetting in the STOP P-PRC function.The measurements stop when thecriteria for the setting reach 100%.


STOP P-PRC - Defines the methodused for Auto Stop when Auto Stop isset to YES.When Auto Stop is set to NO apercentage value will be displayednext to the Time or Epochs in theMain Survey screen. This indicateshow much of the Auto Stop criteriahas elapsed. The Auto Stop criteria isdefined using the P-PRC (F5) key(see below).

END Survey - Defines how thesurvey will be ended. Manual lets youexit the survey yourself. Automaticwill exit the survey automatically.Auto & Shut-down will exit thesurvey and turn the sensor off.

When one of the STOP P-PRCoptions is selected the P-PRC (F5)key will become available. Pressingthis key will enable you to configurethe option you have selected.

When:

Time is selected, set the requiredobservation time for each point. Thetime starts counting when OCUPY ispressed. The Receiver stops record-ing when the set length of time isreached.

STOP&GOIndicator is selected, setthe baseline range. When measuring,an observation time will be calculatedbased on the selected baselinerange, the number of availablesatellites and the GDOP. This isdisplayed as a percentage value. TheReceiver stops recording as soon as100% is reached.

Observations is selected, set thenumber of epochs that should berecorded at each point. This setting isrecommended for post-processedkinematic surveys.

# of Sats is selected, set the length oftime to observe depending on thenumber of satellites available. Youmay edit the value for each number ofsatellites. Should the number ofavailable satellites change duringobservations, the observationsalready recorded will be taken intoaccount. Should the number ofsatellites decrease, more time will beadded. Should the number of satel-lites increase, time will be subtracted.The Receiver stops recording whenthe time limit is reached.

Press CONT (F1) to return toCONFIGURE\Occupation Settings.


Working Example

Application - Picking up distinct points in a Kinematic chain

Technique - Post-Processed Kinematic on the Fly. (Not possible withSR510).

Requirement - You wish to automatically stop recording and store eachpoint after pressing OCUPY.

Settings -

Other Settings - Use P-PRC (F5) to set the Observations to 1 or 2.

Field Procedure - At the point you wish to measure, place and level thepole on the point. Press OCUPY. The point will be recorded and storedautomatically as soon as the set number of observations are recorded. Notethat the Point Id must be correctly defined and any code (if required) se-lected BEFORE OCUPY is pressed due to Auto Store being set to YES.

Id TemplatesYou may also configure Id Templatesfor Auxiliary Points in exactly thesame way as for normal points.


5.3 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Reference Operations

This section covers configuration ofthe receiver for Real-Time ReferenceOperations. Note that Real TimeReference Operations are onlypossible with an SR530 (Real-Time tocentimeter level) or an SR510 or 520that has the RTCM 2.x optionactivated (DGPS to 0.5 - 5m level).

Highlight the Configuration Set youwish to edit and press CONT (F1).Note that you cannot edit defaultConfiguration Sets. You have tocreate a new one and then edit it.


You may choose between Standardand Advanced. Standard isrecommended for most users.Advanced enables definition ofparameters required for scientificresearch and other specializedapplications.


Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing ofthe available parameter panels whichcan then be accessed individuallywith CONT (F1). Changes areautomatically stored at the end of thelist. Changes in individual parameterpanels can be stored with STORE(F3) without the need to go to the endof the list.

The Standard Operation mode isdescribed from here on. The extraconfigurable features available whenAdvanced is selected are described inthe next section.





Deflt Hgt - Displays a default heightfor the Antenna configuration. This isof little use for Real-Time Referencestations where the Antenna heightdiffers with each setup.

Meas Type - Also, enter the meansby which the Antenna height wasmeasured. For the majority of GPSAntennas (including all Leicaantennas), this will be Vertical. Theheight of some non-Leica GPSantennas can only be measured bytaking the slope distance to the outeredge of the Antenna. If this is thecase, select Slope and enter thevalue. You will then be required toenter a Horizontal Offset also. SeeSection 2.15.3 for more details onmeasuring slope height. Note that thesettings from the currently highlightedantenna setup are taken over assuggested default values.


Most Real-Time Reference Stationsare setup on a tripod or pillar.

You may select from this list or enteryour own Antenna configuration bypressing the NEW (F2) key. Note thatthe settings from the currentlyhighlighted antenna setup are takenover as suggested default values.

When a factory default tripod setup ischosen, the Vertical Offset isautomatically set at 0.36m. You willneed to measure the Antenna Heightwith the height hook when setting up.


Setting up on a pillar will require thatyou use the default pillar setup.

Advice on calculating Antennaheights and offsets for Leica and non-Leica Antennas is given in Chapter2.15.

Use the EDIT (F3) key to edit thehighlighted Antenna configuration.Note that factory default Antennaconfigurations can only be viewedand not edited.

Use the DEL (F4) key to delete anAntenna configuration.

Use the DEFLT (F5) key to revealfactory default Antenna configurationswith current Leica GPS Antennas.This will then change to ALL.

Use ALL (F5) to reveal System 300Antenna configurations also. You canpick out the Antenna configurationsthat you will use the most and deletethe rest.

All possible factory default Antennaconfigurations may still be accessedin the future by using the DEFLT andALL keys.

PositionThis screen defines the way in whichposition is displayed.


Coord Sys - You may also select acoordinate system which will be usedto display the positions. The WGS84coordinate system will always beavailable. You may define othercoordinate systems in Applicationsin Determine Coord System (seesection 11.1).



It is especially important to define alocal coordinate system for a Real-Time Reference Station if you intendto use a known local grid coordinateat the Reference Point. The Receivermust be able to calculate an equiva-lent coordinate in the WGS84 coordi-nate system for transmission to theRover(s).






Further advice on Coordinate Sys-tems is given in Section 11.





Formats




Quality Type - The way in which thequality of a position is displayed in theMain Survey screen. This is Hard-wired to DOP for Real-TimeReference Configurations. It willdisplay a Dilution of Precisionaccording to the components defined.



OCUPY Counter - Defines how thelength of time spent occupying a pointis displayed. Select from Time -normal time or Observations - thenumber of computed navigationsolutions recorded.

CodingNormally, when setting up a Real-Time Reference Station, theReference Point will be selected froma predefined point list. These pointswill have been measured previouslyand any required code alreadyassigned. Therefore a Coding Systemis not usually required.

If you still wish to select a codingsystem press ENTER and choosefrom Thematical or Free coding.Complete descriptions of the codingsystems used by System 500 aregiven in Section 8.



Real-Time 1/2Configures the parameters used forReal-Time operations. If needed, it ispossible to configure two real-timeinterfaces.

R-Time Data - defines the operationmode of the receiver. SelectReference to broadcast real-timedata.

Data Format - Defines the formatused to broadcast the real-time data.

Port - defines the port to which theReal-Time data will be sent. Normallya radio modem or GSM phone will beconnected to the port. When the radiomodem is a Satelline, Pacific Crest orGSM phone it will be mounted in theradio housing box and attached to

either Port 3 or Port 1.You may also attach a radio modemor phone via a cable to any port.

Use the right or left cursor keys toselect a port for transmission of real-time data. The device that is currentlyassigned to this port will be displayed.

Rate - Set the rate at which you wishto output messages. System 500supports rates of 0.1 to 60 seconds.

To define the Data Format, highlightthe Data Format field and pressENTER.

Leica is the proprietary Leica real-time GPS data format. This is thebest format to use when workingexclusively with Leica System 500Rover units.

CMR and CMR+ are compactedformats used to broadcast data forthird party receivers.

RTCM is for use when Rover unitsfrom a different manufacturer will beused. RTCM message 3 is alwaysgenerated irrespective of which othermessage types are chosen.RTCM 18, 19 - Uncorrected Carrierphase and pseudorange. Use forRTK operations where theambiguities will be resolved at theRover (RTK). An accuracy of around1-5cm (rms) can be expected after asuccessful ambiguity resolution.RTCM 20, 21 - RTK Carrier phasecorrections and high-accuracypseudorange corrections. Use forRTK operations. There is little or nodifference in the accuracy obtainedusing these messages as comparedto messages 18 and 19.RTCM 1, 2 - Differential and DeltaDifferential GPS corrections. Use forDGPS applications. An accuracy of0.5-5m rms can be expected at theRover.


Pressing the DEVCE (F5) key letsyou configure and assign a device tothe selected port.

Select the device you wish to assignto the port. If no default devices aredisplayed press DEFLT (F5) to revealthem. Default devices have anasterisk before the device name.

Select a device from the list. To viewthe configuration of your chosendevice, press EDIT (F3). If the deviceyou wish to use requires a differentconfiguration, select Unknown Radioand press NEW (F2) and enter theName and Port Settings for thedevice.A complete list of all available devicesis given in Appendix H.

stations simultaneously, broadcastingon different frequency channels anduse frequency switching at the rover.or2. The Reference is being movedfrom one point to another.

If it is required to configure the sec-ond real-time interface press SHIFTR-T 2 (F2) in the CONFIGURE\ Real-Time 1 panel.

Configure the parameters for theReal-Time 2 interface as describedabove. The second Real-Time 2interface is completely independent tothe Real-Time 1 interface so that adifferent Data Format and Rate maybe selected.

Press CONT (F1) to return to CON-FIGURE\ Real-Time1.

Pressing REF (F6) enables you toconfigure further options concerningthe broadcast messages from thereference station.

You may define a number for thereference station ID, select a carriagereturn at the end of each messageand, if RTCM format has beenselected, choose the RTCM Versionto output. Note that the Referenceand Rover must use the same RTCMversion.

You will need to define a Ref Stn Id if:1. You intend to work with 2 reference


LoggingIf required, you may log the rawobservations. This may be used ifthere are problems with the datareception at the Rover and a Real-Time position could not be calculated.The observation data can be post-processed when back in the office tofill in any gaps in the Real-Timepositions. Of course, observationsmust be logged at the Rover also.

Log Static Obs - Switches logging onor off when the Receiver is in Staticmode.

Obs Rate - The rate at which obser-vations will be logged.

For Real-Time Reference stations therate should be set the same as thePosition Update Rate at the Rover.This will normally be between 0.1-2s.



Press CONT (F1) to complete theconfiguration.

Note that a different port must beselected to that used for the Real-Time 1 interface.

Use SHIFT R-T 1 (F2) to accept theconfiguration settings and return toReal-Time 1.

Use CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\ Interface panel.

The Port/ Device configured for bothreal-time interfaces is now visible.


5.3.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Reference Stations





Residuals - The method by whichresiduals will be distributed through-out the transformation area is dis-played.Transform - The name of the trans-formation set used is displayed.Ellipsoid - The name of the localellipsoid is displayed.Projection -The name of the projec-tion used is displayed.Geoid Model - The name of thegeoid model used is displayed.CSCS Model - The name of theCSCS model used is displayed.

Note that the details that are dis-played depend upon the type oftransformation used. Certain types oftransformation do not use all of thedescribed parameters to calculatelocal coordinates.


Real-Time 1/2Configures parameters used for Real-Time operations.

Data Format - There are two extraformats available for RTCM. Youhave the possibility to output bothCode corrections together with rawGPS data or high-precision phasecorrections by selecting the optionsRTCM 1, 2, 18, 19 or RTCM 1, 2, 20,21.

Also, the extra key RATES (F3) isavailable.

RATES enables different messagesto be output at different rates.

If RTCM is selected as the DataFormat, you may select different ratesfor the various message types.E.g. Message 3 is always outputregardless of which RTCM messagesare selected. As this message doesnot usually have to be constantlyoutput, you may select a lower ratefor it.

If Leica Data Format is selected, youmay select different rates for the rawdata transmission (Data Rate), therate at which the reference coordi-nates are output (Coord Rate) andthe rate at which Reference Stationinformation (Point Id, etc.) is output(Info Rate).

In addition to the configuration op-tions in the standard mode, pressingREF (F6) enables you to configureTime Slicing. Time Slicing is thepossibility to send RTK messagesdelayed. This is required when RTKmessages from different referencestations are sent on the same radio

channel. Time Slicing on System500works for radios, GSM and theRS232 interface.

Time Slicing - Activates time slicing.If set to Yes, two more lines becomeavailable.

Used Ref Stations - Set the numberof reference stations in use. You canhave up to 4 reference stations fromwhere RTK messages are sent.

Time Slot - The time slot representsthe actual time delay. The number oftime slots is the number of referencestations in use. The time delay equals1 sec devided by the total number ofreference stations. If two referencestations are used, the number of timedelay is 0.50.





Log File Segments - Will split up therecorded data into files of a specificlength unless 1 File is selected.If a time is selected the option SplitTracks will become available. SelectNo will only record data into a new fileif the time is reached and a new trackis observed.

Auto Del Log Files - Will delete therecorded data after the specifiedlength of time unless Never is se-lected.


Therefore, the time slots are at 0.00sec and at 0.50 sec. With threereference stations, the time delay is0.33. The time slots are at 0.00, 0.33and 0.66 sec.

The second Real-Time 2 interface iscompletely independent to the Real-Time 1 interface so that the numberof reference stations and time slotscan be configured differently.


5.4 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Rover Operations

This section covers configuration ofthe receiver for Real-TimeRover Operations. Note that RealTime Rover Operations are onlypossible with an SR530 (Real-Time tocentimeter level) or an SR510 or 520that has the RTCM 2.0 optionactivated (DGPS to 0.5 - 5m level).

Highlight the Configuration Set youwish to edit and press EDIT (F3).Note that you cannot edit defaultConfiguration Sets. You have tocreate a new Set and then edit it. Ifthe only existing Configuration Setsare default Sets, highlight the Set thatcorresponds to the type of operationyou wish to configure (in this case,RT_ROV), and press NEW (F2).After entering the Name, etc., selectthe new Configuration Set and pressEDIT (F3).


You may choose between Standardand Advanced. Standard isrecommended for most users.Advanced enables definition ofparameters required for scientificresearch and other specializedapplications.


Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing ofthe available parameter panels which

can then be accessed individuallywith CONT (F1). Changes areautomatically stored at the end of thelist. Changes in individual parameterpanels can be stored with STORE(F3) without the need to go to the endof the list.

The Standard Operation mode isdescribed from here on. The extraconfigurable features available whenAdvanced is selected are described inthe next section.



Ant. Name - Displays and selects thecurrently selected antenna setup.This will normally be AT502 Pole forreal-time Rover operations.


Deflt Hgt - Displays a default heightfor the Antenna configuration. If theantenna will always be mounted at afixed height (E.g. on a pole or alwaysat the same fixed location), enter thevalue. This will normally be 2.00m for

Real-Time Rover operations. You willalso get a chance to enter the heightfor each set up during survey opera-tions.

Meas Type - Also, enter the meansby which the Antenna height wasmeasured. For Real-Time Roveroperations this will usually be Verti-cal.


You may select from this list or enteryour own antenna configuration bypressing the NEW (F2) key andentering the required information.

Most Real-Time Rover Surveys arecarried out using the System 500pole. When a factory default polesetup is selected, (AT501 Pole/AT502Pole) the Vertical Offset is setautomatically at zero and the DefltHgt at 2.00m. Note that the settingsfrom the currently highlighted antennasetup are taken over as suggesteddefault values.

Advice on calculating AntennaHeights and offsets for Leica andnon-Leica Antennas is given inChapter 2.15.

Use the EDIT (F3) key to edit thehighlighted Antenna configuration.Use the DEL (F4) key to delete anAntenna configuration.


Use the DEFLT (F5) key to revealdefault antenna configurations withcurrent Leica GPS antennas. This willthen change to ALL. Use ALL (F5) toreveal System 300 antennaconfigurations also. You can pick outthe antenna configurations that youwill use the most and delete the rest.All possible antenna configurationsmay still be accessed in the future byusing the DEFLT and ALL keys.

PositionThis screen defines the rate for andthe way in which position is displayed.If you wish to work in localcoordinates, you MUST define thecoordinate system here.


Coord Sys - You may also select acoordinate system which will be usedto display the positions. The WGS84coordinate system will always beavailable. You may define othercoordinate systems in Applicationsin Determine Coord System (seesection 11.1).











Formats




Quality type - For real-time rover,select Quality. This will display aCoordinate Quality in cm within whichthe position lies. This is calculatedusing the standard deviations of thecoordinate components.

Defined by - Defines the componentsused to calculate the Quality.

Height - 1D Height QualityPos - 2D Position QualityPos + Hgt - 3D Position QualityPos + Hgt + Time - 3D PositionQuality

OCUPY Counter - Defines how thelength of time spent occupying a pointis displayed. Select from Time -normal time or Positions - thenumber of position calculations.




Real-Time Use the right or left cursor keys toselect a port for transmission of real-time data. The device that is currentlyassigned to this port will be displayed.

Ref Sensor - Select the Receivertype used at the Reference Station. Ifthis is not a Leica Receiver selectUnknown.

Ref Antenna - select the Antennaused at the reference station. AllAntennas in the current antenna listare available. If you do not knowwhich Antenna is being used at thereference or an Antenna is beingused which is not in the list, selectUnknown. If the reference data iscorrected by absolute antenna cali-bration values and you want to useLeica standard antenna models onthe rover side, selectADVNULLANTENNA.

Use Phase - Set to NO if only a codesolution is required.

R-Time Data - defines the operationmode of the Receiver. Select Roverto receive real-time data.

Data Format - Defines the formatused to broadcast the real-time data.

Port - defines the port to where theReal-Time receive device will beconnected. Normally this will be aradio modem or GSM phone. Whenthe radio modem is a Satelline 1AS/2ASx/2ASxE, Pacific CrestRFM96(W) or GSM phone it will bemounted in a housing and attached toeither Port 3 or Port 1. You may alsoattach a radio modem or phonewithout a housing via a cable to anyport.


Radio Down - Raw observations canbe logged for post-processing in caseof radio link interuption.

To define the Data Format received,highlight the Data Format field andpress ENTER.

Leica is the proprietary Leica real-time GPS data format. This is thebest format to use when workingexclusively with Leica System 500Rover units.CMR and CMR+ are compactedformats used for receiving data fromthird party receivers.RTCM is used for receiving data froma non-System 500 Reference Station.RTCM Message 3 will always bereceived by default.RTCM 18, 19 - Uncorrected Carrierphase and pseudorange. Use forRTK operations where theambiguities will be resolved at theRover (RTK). An accuracy of around1-5cm (rms) can be expected after asuccessful ambiguity resolution.

RTCM 20, 21 - RTK Carrier phasecorrections and high-accuracypseudorange corrections. Use forRTK operations. There is little or nodifference in the accuracy obtainedusing these messages as comparedto messages 18 and 19.RTCM 1, 2 - Differential and DeltaDifferential GPS corrections. Use forDGPS applications. An accuracy of0.5-5m rms can be expected at theRover.RTCM 9, 2 - GPS Partial CorrectionSet and Delta Differential GPSCorrections. Use for DGPSapplications. An accuracy of 0.5-5mrms can be expected at the Rover.Use this when a slow data link isbeing used in the presence ofinterference.

Pressing the DEVCE (F5) key letsyou configure and assign a device tothe selected port.

Select the device you wish to assignto the port. If no default devices aredisplayed press DEFLT (F5) to revealthem.


A complete description of all availabledevices and detailed configurationsand uses is given in Appendix H.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\Real-Time screen.

Press CONT (F1) again. The nextscreen will depend on the device thathas just been chosen. For example, ifthe chosen device is the Pacific Crestradio, the user will be able to choosethe radio channel. If the chosendevice is a GSM device, the user willbe able to configure parameters foruse with a GSM device such as PINcode.

A complete description of the differentscreens is given in Appendix H.

Press SHIFT and then PRED (F3) toactivate and deactivate Prediction onthe rover.

If an SR530 is being used as the RTKreference station, then the Leica dataformat should always be used. In thiscase Prediction should always be setto YES.

If however, the reference istransmitting a 3rd party data formatsuch as RTCM, CMR or CRM+, thenprediction on the rover may be turnedon or off. Prediction is only of use inRTK cm accuracy surveys.

The default setting is that predictionwill be activated.

There are two advantages in usingprediction:1. Update rate: Prediction allows RTpositions to be computed on the roverat a rate greater than thetransmission rate of the data from thereference station. This means RTpositions can be computed on therover at a rate up to 10Hz, regardlessof the rate at which data istransmitted from the referencestation.2. Reduced latency: Positionscomputed with prediction will have alatency of around 30 to 40ms.

However, should the RTK messagestransmitted from the reference stationbe effected by latency, then theaccuracy of the positions computedusing prediction may be reduced. Inthese circumstances, it may benecessary to deactivate positionscomputed by prediction. In this casePrediction should be set to NO.


However deactivating predictionwould mean:1. Update rate: Positions can only becomputed at the rate at which data istransmitted from the referencestation.2. Increased latency: Computedpositions would have an increasedlatency.

In all RTK surveys where the refer-ence station is not an SR530 and theRTK message is not Leica format, itis up to the user to decide if theperformance of the rover is betterwith prediction activated or deacti-vated.

Press CONT (F1) to continue.

LoggingIf required, you may log the rawobservations. This may be used ifthere are problems with the real-timedata reception at the Rover and aReal-Time position could not becalculated, or if you wish to be able tocheck your work back in the office.Observations must be logged at theReference also.

Another alternative for post-process-ing infill is to use the Radio Downoption. This is available in Advancedmode in CONFIGURE\Real-Time.(See section 5.4.1).

Log Static Obs - Switches logging onor off when the Receiver is in Staticmode. The receiver has to be station-ary. This is used when occupyingdistinct points in a kinematic chain.

Obs Rate - The rate at which obser-vations will be logged when thereceiver is stationary or when it ismoving. For Static intializations oroccupying distinct points in a kine-matic chain, the rate should be set atbetween 0.1-2 seconds.

Log Moving Obs - Only availablewhen Log Static Obs = YES. Acti-vates observation recording when thereceiver is in moving mode. The rateis set in Obs Rate.

Static Init - Available when LogMoving Obs = YES. Defines whetheror not a static initialization will beperformed at the beginning of eachkinematic chain.


Log Pos by - Defines the criteria bywhich an automatic position will belogged.When Time is selected, the PositionRate defined in Configure\Position isdisplayed. This may be multiplied bythe Log Factor to give a positionlogging rate displayed in the LogEvery line.

Store Pt DB – If this parameter is setto YES the Auto-Points will be storedto the GeoDB. This is the setting thatis needed if it is intended to storecodes with Auto-Points. Auto-Pointsstored to the GeoDB may additionallybe viewed and edited in the PointManagement, they may be outputwith an .FRT file, they may be stakedout or viewed in the Graph panel.

Log Auto Positions - Will automati-cally log positions at a specified rate.

Moving Ant Height - Sets theAntenna Height when the receiver isin moving mode. When a standardSystem 500 pole setup is used, thesuggested default will be 2.00m.



When Log Auto Positions is set toYES, the POS (F3) key becomesavailable. Use this key to define thecriteria for automatic position record-ing.

Note, if it is chosen to store Auto-Points to the GeoDB, the maximumrecording rate is 1Hz.

Start Mode – You may select fromeither Immediate or Controlled. Ifyou select Immediate the system willautomatically start with logging Auto-Points as soon as you start thesurvey. If you select Controlled youwill decide when you start the loggingof Auto-Points. Press the AUTO keyin the main Survey panel to enter themode for measuring Auto-Positions.In the AUTO-POS panel the START(F6) key will be available to you.


Quality Info - Defines which qualityinformation should be recorded withthe position. You may select from theFull covariance information or justthe coordinate quality (CQ only).

Use Beep - If YES, the terminal willbeep when an automatic position islogged.

Monitor CQ - If YES, the CQ of theautomatic position will be monitoredand the point will only be recorded ifless than the specified quality. WhenYES is chosen an additional lineappears below Monitor CQ to enterthe specified quality.

Use Annot - This line is visible, ifStore Pt DB is set to YES. If YES,point annotations will be stored in theGeoDB with each auto logged point,too. Point Annotations may be usedas an electronic notepad whereevents, notes etc. may be written.They are then taken with the point Idinformation into SKI-Pro.

Point annotations for auto loggedpoints are independant from pointannotations for manually occupiedpoints.

You may type in 4 notes with up to 26characters in each note.

Press CLEAR (F6) to delete thecontent of all input fields and CONT(F1) to leave the panel.

After doing so and reentering thepanel SURVEY\Point Annotationswith ANNOT (F5), the keys LAST(F3) and LAST# (F5) will be active. #stands for the numbers 1 to 4 of thepoint annotations and changes withthe cursor position. LAST (F3)reactivates all previous four pointannotations. LAST# (F5) onlyreactivates the previous annotation ofthe last line.

Annotations are ignored whenentering point annotations first andthen changing USE ANNOT to NO.With setting USE ANNOT to YESagain, the last annotations areremembered.Point Annotations are remembereduntil the system is turned off.

Point annotations can be viewed inPoint Management. See chapter 11.3.

An ANNOT (F5) key becomesavailable.


Instantaneous means that a time tagwill be recorded when the OCUPYkey is pressed. A coordinate will beinterpolated between the positions atthe neighbouring two epochs.

More details about Normal andInstantaneous occupy modes aregiven in section 5.2.

Auto Store - Allows you to automati-cally store a point after the STOP keyhas been pressed.


The logging of Auto-Positions mayalso be configured from inside theAUTO-POS panel. See chapter 7.4.7Using the AUTO key for moreinformation.

When Distance is selected, a posi-tion will be recorded every time thedistance from the previously recordedpoint matches the value set in theLog Every line. You can also definethe Quality Info recorded with thepoint in the same way as when Timeis selected.

When Height is selected, a positionwill be recorded every time the heightdifference from the previously re-corded point matches the value set inthe Log Every line. You can alsodefine the Quality Info recorded withthe point in the same way as whenTime is selected.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\Logging screen.


Occupation Settings

OCUPY Mode - Sets the way inwhich coordinates will be recorded fora point.Normal means that the coordinateswill be recorded using an average ofthe positions calculated betweenpressing OCUPY and STOP. Thishelps filter out effects of slight move-ment. (E.g. trembling hands).


Id Templates

An Id template is used to pre-define aPoint Id. This feature is mainly usedin post-processed kinematic and real-time kinematic operations wheremany points are collected quickly.When set up correctly it will save youhaving to type in the point Id at eachpoint.

OCUPY Pts - Displays the Id tem-plate selected for use with manuallyrecorded points.Auto Log Pos - Displays the Idtemplate selected for use with auto-matically recorded points.

Select the template that you wish touse.

Press ENTER to reveal the list ofavailable templates.

Inc stands for Increment and denotesthe amount by which any specifiednumber will increment at each point.Crsr stands for Cursor and denotesthe character number at which thecursor will be automatically placed.

The arrow means that this tem-plate is set to operate in the RemainRunning mode.

No Template Used - if this option isselected an automaticallyincremented Point Id of the lastentered Point Id will be displayed inthe Survey panel. If you overtype thisPoint Id the auto increment will startfrom the new Point Id.

Time and Date - will automaticallyuse the current local time and date asthe Point Id.

To define your own Id Template pressNEW (F2).

Pt Id. Mode - Is the Mode how the PtTemplate will be used. If you selectRemain Running and you enter aPoint Id manually in the Survey panelthe new Point Id will be used as thenew Id Template and the followingPoint Id’s will be based on this newTemplate. If you select Change toIndiv. and then enter a Point Idmanually in the Survey panel thePoint Id will return to the Id Templateas it is defined.


Id - Displays the way in which thetemplate is currently configured. Youmay also enter any standard text herethat you would like to see in the IdTemplate. (In this example thestandard text is the word “Point”. The# symbols indicate automaticallyincrementing numbers).

Num Start - Defines the start positionof any automatically incrementingnumber.

Num End - Defines the end positionof any automatically incrementingnumbers.

Auto Inc - Defines whether thenumber will increment automaticallyat subsequent points.

Num Inc defines the amount bywhich any automatically incrementingnumber will increment.

Cursor Pos - Defines the position atwhich the cursor will start at.Press CONT (F1) until you return tothe CONFIGURE\ Id Templatesscreen.



You are completing a survey where you will require many different point IDs. Most point IDs willneed an incrementing number behind the text. The first points you measure will need the point ID“Bolt ###”.

In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point ID templateas shown here.Note that the Id type is set to “Remain Running”.

Within the Survey panel, the first point willautomatically show the Point Id “Bolt 001” uponpressing STORE, the next Point Id will automaticallyshow “Bolt 002”.

Working Example 1

Requirement -

Field Proc -

Settings -



You now wish to survey points with the Id“Road####” starting with Id “Road0723”. Enter thispoint Id into Survey panel. The next point Id willautomatically be “Road0724”.

You now wish to survey one individual point and giveit the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, pressSHIFT and then INDIV (F5) and enter this point Id.

Survey this point and upon pressing STORE, thenext point Id will revert back to “Road0724”.

Field Proc (cont) -

Note: Should you wish to store any new point Id as a template into the “library” then access theCONFIGURE\ ID Templates panel (CONFIG, 1 Survey, 5 Point Id Templates) and then pressCONT (F1). The point Id currently in use is now stored as a template.


Working Example 2

Field Proc -

You are completing a survey where you need only one point ID that needs an incrementing numberbehind the text. These points will need the point ID “Point####”. However you will also surveysome individual points that will need unique point Ids.

In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point IDtemplate as shown here.Note that the Id type is set to “Change to Indiv.”.

Within the Survey panel, the first point willautomatically show the Point Id “Point0001”. Uponpressing STORE, the next Point Id willautomatically show “Point0002”.

Requirement -

Settings -


You now wish to survey one individual point and giveit the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, enter thispoint ID. Survey this point and upon pressingSTORE, the next point Id will revert back to“Point0002”.

Note - When entering the individual point Id “BM98”you did not need to press SHIFT INDIV (F5) as inWorking Example 1. This is because the “Point####”template is operating in the Change to Individualmode.

Suppose you do now wish to survey points using anew point Id “###Fence” and you wish this templateto operate in the Remain Running mode.

Enter the point Id “001Fence” and then press SHIFTRUN (F5). Occupy and store this point. The nextpoint Id will be “002Fence”

Field Proc (cont) -


Note: Numerical characters in front of any text will also increment. This allows any type ofincrementing point Ids to be created.


Threshold Settings

These settings are used as checks ifmore than one set of measuredcoordinates are recorded for thesame point.

Avg. Limits Pos - Only available ifAvg is selected. Sets the averaginglimit for position. When two or morecoordinates are recorded for thesame point, the system will computean average for the positions andcheck that each position does notdiffer from the average by more thanthe defined amount. If they do differby more than the defined amount, youwill be alerted and can then decidewhether to raise the averaging limitsand record the coordinates or toignore the coordinates.

Avg. Limits Height. - Only availableif Avg is selected. Sets the averaginglimit for height. The system willcompute an average for the heightsand check that each height does notdiffer from the average by more thanthe defined amount. If they do differby more than the defined amount, youwill be alerted and can then decidewhether to raise the averaging limitsand record the coordinates or toignore the coordinates.

Avg/Abs Diffs - A check can either bedefined as an averaging functionality oras an absolute coordinate differencefor X, Y, Z and E, N, H (with localcoordinate system). Avg is the defaultoption. When selecting Abs, theaverage position is still calculated.

Regardless of whether Avg or Abs isselected, points with more than oneassociated measured point will still beshown as average in PointManagement.

Monitor CQ - Allows to check thequality (CQ) of a point before it isstored. It is possible to choose to seta Pos only, Height only, Pos +Height CQ limit or no limit at all(None).

Quality - Sets the value for MonitorCQ.


If Abs is chosen then the Avg. LimitsPos and Avg. Limits Height are notshown but the ABS (F6) key be-comes available.

Press ABS (F6) to set the limits forthe absolute position difference in E,N, H and X, Y, Z.

Stakeout

Stake from - Sets the source fromwhich target points will be taken. Jobmeans that the Rover will look fortarget points from a Job that you use.ASCII File means that you can stakeout using an ASCII file. The ASCII filemay be uploaded to the Receiverusing SKI Pro or by copying the ASCIIfile onto a PC Card and using theTransfer function. Alternatively usethe ASCII / GSI to Job converter anduse Stake from Job. See section 13.6for more information.

Store →→→→→ Job - Appears when ASCIIFile is selected in Stake from. Thisparameter takes the original ASCIIcoordinate and stores it in the Job,together with the staked point. This isuseful when comparing design pointsto actually staked points.

Show Path - Will display a track onthe graphics screen of your previouspositions when set to Yes.

Def. Orient - Defines the defaultorientation direction for stake out.This is the direction from whichbearings or offsets will be taken. Notethat this is the default orientation. Adifferent orientation may always bedefined when running Stakeout.

The options are:North - orient towards north.Sun - the sun is used as the orienta-tion direction. System 500 can calcu-late the position of the sun for anytime and location on the earth’ssurface.

Press DEFLT (F5) to set the defaultvalue of 0.07 m in all lines.



Last Point - Use the last recordedpoint.Known Point - Use any point in thejob. The point can be defined whenrunning Stakeout.Line - Orient parallel to any linedefined in the current job. The linecan be defined when running Stake-out.Arrow - Shows an arrow on thegraphical side of the stake-out panel.Simply walk in the direction of thisarrow to find the point to be stakedout.

Use Beep - Will make the systembeep whenever you are within thedistance of the chosen target pointset in Dist from Pt.

Diff Check - Possible options tocheck the difference between thedesign coordinates and the stakedcoordinates are by Height only,Position only, Pos + Hgt or not tocheck the difference at all (None).

This functionality will make thesystem automatically display thedifferences if the defined Limit isexceeded.

Use DTM - Appears when the DTMStakeout option has been purchasedand enables you to use a DigitalTerrain Model as the height datumand will show cut and fill valuesrelative to the DTM. DTMs are storedon the PC card or sensor internalmemory.

When ASCII File is selected in Stakefrom, the ASCII (F4) key becomesavailable. Use this to define theformat of the ASCII file.

Delimiter - Sets the character usedto separate the various point compo-nents. Choose from Comma (,), LineFeed (new line), Semicolon (;), andSpace (blank).

ID Pos - Sets the position of the PointId.


East Pos - Sets the position of theeasting.

North Pos - Sets the position of thenorthing.

Height Pos - Sets the position of theheight.

An example of what is selected isdisplayed. Use the DEFLT (F5) key toreset the format to its original values.Define the delimiter used to separatethe information for each point andthen define the position of eachcomponent of each point. An exampleof what you have defined is given atthe bottom of the screen.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\Stakeout screen andCONT (F1) again to complete theconfiguration.






Residuals - The method by whichresiduals will be distributedthroughout the transformation area isdisplayed.

Transform - The name of thetransformation set used is displayed.

Ellipsoid - The name of the localellipsoid is displayed.

Projection -The name of theprojection used is displayed.

Geoid Model - The name of thegeoid model used is displayed.

CSCS Model - The name of theCSCS model used is displayed.


Pressing Shift followed by FILT (F4)will access the panel CONFIGURE\Filter.

Height Smoothing - Enables you toactivate or deactivate the heightsmoothing filter. With YES, smoothingis applied to all heights measured inthe WGS84 or in a local coordinatesystem or output via NMEA. The filterdefaults are best suited for highdynamic variations in height up to1 m/s as carried out by graders.

5.4.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Rover


Height Smoothing and Filter techniques with kinematic GPS

Due to the nature of GPS, the heightis the weakest part in GPS measure-ments. Height information can onlybe received from satellites above theantenna. Signals from the satellitesof the other half of the orbits areblocked off by the earth.Therefore, the GPS heights are less“stabilised” than the positions whereinformation all around the horizon isavailable.

In kinematic surveys, this fact resultsin height variations of a few centime-ters as shown in the blue curve.Some GPS monitoring applications,however, require a stabilised height.

By applying the filter, the heightvariations are smoothed and most ofthe noise in height component iseliminated. In the diagram below,smoothed heights are shown in red.


Real-Time

Use Phase - Enables you to definewhether or not to use the phase databroadcast from the reference station.For normal centimeter level Real-Time surveying this will be set toYES.

When MaxTrak is selected UsePhase will automatically be set to NOand the ability to edit the Use Phaseoption is disabled. For furtherinformation on MaxTrak refer tochapter 9.1 Survey - Satellite.

Radio Down - Enables you to lograw GPS data in the event that radiocontact is lost to the referencestation.

The observation rate is fixed at 1second. When Radio Down is set toLog Obs, two further options appear.

Log After - Defines the length of timethat should elapse without radiocontact before logging commences.

For minimum - Defines the length oftime that GPS raw data will be loggedfor after an interruption is detected.Even if radio contact is re-established, raw data logging willcontinue for the specified time.

If radio contact is lost again, thesetwo options will be used to log rawdata again automatically.

If the chosen Data Format is RTCM,the RTCM (F6) button is available.

RTCM Versn - Choose betweenRTCM v2.1 and v2.2.

#Bits/Byte - Choose between 6 and8 bits per byte.

Change Ref Net to YES if correctionsfor a virtual reference shall be used.

Telemax - To make use of theGerman SAPOS reference stationservice via Telemax, set to YES. Formore information see Appendix H.

Accountfile - Only available ifTelemax = YES. Select theappropriate Accountfile, which youhave transferred to the receiverbefore.





Log File Segments will split up therecorded data into files of a specificlength unless 1 File is selected. If atime is selected the option SplitTracks will become available. SelectNo will only record data into a new fileif the time is reached and a new trackis observed.

Auto Del Log Files will delete therecorded data after the specifiedlength of time unless Never isselected.


Occupation SettingsAdditional functionality available inthis panel over Standard mode isAuto OCUPY, Auto Stop, STOP R-TME and END Survey.


Auto Stop - will automatically stopthe measurements according to thesetting in the STOP R-TME function.The measurements stop when thecriteria for the setting reach 100%.


STOP R-TME - Defines the methodused for Auto Stop when Auto Stop isset to YES.When Auto Stop is set to NO apercentage value will be displayednext to the Time or Epochs in theMain Survey screen. This indicateshow much of the Auto Stop criteriahas elapsed. The Auto Stop criteria isdefined using the R-TME (F3) key(see below).

The criteria available to automaticallystop a real-time Rover are:Accuracy -Stop when a specifiedaccuracy is reached.Positions - Stop after a set numberof positions have been calculated.Note that these are positions (positionrecording rate) and not raw observa-tions.STOP&GOIndicator - Stop when theStop and Go Indicator has reached100%.

Auto Store - Will automatically storethe point information and GPS datawhen the survey is stopped.

END Survey - Sets how the Surveyoperation will be ended. Manual letsyou exit the survey yourself. Auto-matic will exit the survey automati-cally. Auto & Shut-down will exit thesurvey and turn the sensor off.

Id TemplatesYou may also configure Id Templatesfor Auxiliary Points in exactly thesame way as for normal points.


Threshold SettingsIn addition to the functionality given inStandard mode you can also specifya DOP limit. If the limit is exceededno position will be recorded.

Press DOP (F3).

Limit - Select the type of DOP limit. Ifno limit shall be active select None.

DOP - Enter the DOP limit value.


Hidden PointA hidden point is defined as a pointthat cannot be measured by GPS butby an external device. This is usuallydue to satellite shading. Satelliteshading can be caused by the closeproximity of tall buildings, trees etc.

Include Hgt - Will compute a heightfor a hidden point and include a qualitycomponent for height difference.

Pos Qlty - The position qualitydefined here has to come from yourown knowledge or experience withthe device you are using. System 500will not check any recordedmeasurements against the positionand height qualities. It will however beused in any least squares adjustmentthat may be carried out later.

Hgt Qlty - The height quality definedhere has to come from your ownknowledge or experience with thedevice you are using. System 500 willnot check any recordedmeasurements against the positionand height qualities. It will however beused in any least squares adjustmentthat may be carried out later.

Press IFACE (F5) and then selectYES for Use Device to choose theport and device to be used.

Port - Use the right or left cursor keysto select the port to where the devicewill be connected. This will normallybe port 2.


Pressing DEVCE (F5) allows thedevice to be chosen.

System 500 supports several devicessuch as Leica Disto memo, Disto pro,DistoTM pro4 and DistoTM pro4 a. All ofthem are hand held lasermeter thatcan be used to record otherwiseinaccessible points. You may also usea simple tape to measure to suchpoints and input the measurementsmanually.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theprevious panel.

Dist Offset - Enter a distance offset ifnecessary. Refer to Appendix H formore information.

Hgt Offset - Available if Include Hgtin the previous panel and Use Devicein the current panel are set to YES.The options are:

None - Neither instrument nor targetheight is considered. The result is thedelta height between the center of theexternal device and the aimed point.This delta height can be measured,estimated or left as zero.Inst Height - The instrument height isconsidered. If the delta heightbetween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point ismeasured or estimated, the result isthe height difference between therover point on the ground and theaimed point. Enter the instrumentheight into the corresponding newline.Inst Height & Trgt Height -Instrument as well as target height tobe considered. If the delta heightbetween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point ismeasured or estimated, the result isthe ground height difference betweenrover and aimed point. Enter thevalues in the corresponding two newlines.

Refer to Appendix H for a completelist of all supported Hidden Pointdevices, their configurations,sketches and more information onhidden points.


EAO (F3) allows the default methodto be set that will be used to enter anExternal Angle Offset whenmeasuring hidden points using adevice that measures azimuths.

The options are None, Permanent orNew For Each Point. If permanent ischosen a default EAO can also beentered.

If None is chosen it will not bepossible to enter an EAO during themeasurement of hidden points.


SeismicYou can set whether or not to store aseismic record with each point. If UseSeismic Record is set to YES,the seismic records for manuallyoccupied points are stored in pointannotation #4. The same holds truefor auto logged points as long asStore Pt DB and Use Annot in panelCONFIGURE\ Position Logging areset to YES. For detailed informationsee section 5.4.

The format for seismic records isgiven in Appendix C.

Press CONT (F1) to complete theconfiguration.

1566. Jobs Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

6.1 Management of Jobs

Jobs are managed from the Joboption in the Main Menu. PressSHOW (F4) to reveal all of the MainMenu choices.

Select Job and press ENTER.

The currently available Jobs aredisplayed together with the date theywere created or last edited.

Keys to help you navigate through thelist are available by pressing SHIFT.

6. Jobs and PointsJobs exist in order for you to be ableto structure and organize your work.They define a common location withinthe System 500 file system for points.

All points that are recorded will bestored within a particular Job. ThisJob may cover a whole project or partof a larger project. It may covercertain classes of points for a projectsuch as control points, detail pointsetc.

Whole Jobs can then be downloadedto and uploaded from SKI Pro. Jobsare downloaded to SKI Pro for post-processing operations or for datatransfer to a further program (such asa GIS). Points contained within Jobsthat are uploaded can be used forReal-Time Stakeout operations.

A copy of the Coordinate System thatwas used with the last active Job willalso be stored.

157 6. JobsTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Editing a JobTo edit an existing Job press EDIT(F3). The Job Name, Description,Creator and Device are displayedand are available for editing.

Deleting a JobTo delete a Job, select the Job andpress the DEL (F4) key. You will beasked for confirmation before the Jobis deleted. All points and data con-tained in the Job will be lost.

Selecting the DeviceJobs may be stored on the PC-Cardor the Internal Memory if fitted. Tochange the device viewed, press theDEVCE (F5) key.

Creating a New JobPress NEW (F2) to create a new Job.

Name - Defines the Job name. Thename may be up to 16 characterslong and may include spaces.

Description - A description of the jobcan be entered. This could be forexample, work to be performed or thetype/class of points contained in thejob. (Optional)

Creator -The name of the person thatcreated the job may be entered.(Optional).

Device - Sets the device upon whichthe Job is stored. Note that InternalMemory is not fitted as standard andtherefore may not be an option.

Press CONT (F1) to confirm the entryand return to JOB\PC-Card orJOB\Internal.

1587. Measuring with System 500 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Application Post-ProcessedStatic/R. Static

Post-ProcessedKinematicReference

Post-ProcessedKinematic (Static

Initialisation)

Post-ProcessedKinematic on

the Fly

Real-TimeDGPS (1-5 m)

Real-TimeRTK (1-5cm)

SR510 ✓ ✓

SR520 ✓ ✓ ✓

SR510 withRTCM2.0option

✓ ✓ ✓

SR520 withRTCM2.0option

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

SR530 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

7. Measuring with System 500The use of System 500 with the most common techniquesof measurement are described.

The correct Receiver must be used for the techniquechosen. An overview is given below.

159 7. Measuring with System 500Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

7.1 Static and Rapid Static Survey, Post-Processed Kinematic Reference

Set up the equipment as described inChapter 2. Attach the Terminal.

Switch on. The Main Menu will bedisplayed. The system willautomatically start searching forsatellites.

Select Survey and press CONT (F1).

Config Set - Defines theConfiguration Set to be used. The lastConfiguration Set used or created willbe taken by default although anyother Configuration Set may beselected.Job - Defines the Job to be used.This is the Job where any point andobservation data will be stored.

Coord Sys - Displays the coordinatesystem that will be used for thedisplay of coordinates. For post-processed work, this will normally beWGS84

Antenna - Defines the Antenna setupto be used. The Setup defined in theConfiguration Set will be taken bydefault although any other setup maybe selected. For post-processedStatic/Rapid Static or KinematicReference work, this will normally beAT501/502 Tripod.

Press CONT (F1) when you havemade your selection.


The Main Survey Panel appears.

From here you can add Point Id, andAntenna Height and observe theDOP.

If configured, you will also be able toadd a Code.

If configured, you will also be able toenter a start time for the pointoccupation.

As soon as the receiver has enoughinformation, the DOP will bedisplayed.

7.1.2 Adding the Point Id

The Point Id is an identifier for aparticular point. It also collates allmeasurements made on that pointand all other associated data such ascodes, point annotations andmeteorological data.

If a point Id template has beenconfigured in the Configuration Set, aPoint Id will be suggested. You canoverwrite this with a different Id ifrequired.

If no point Id is suggested then entera point Id. By default if the point Idcontains any numerical values, thesewill be incremented by 1.

7.1.1 Overview of Procedure

The Moving Icon is displayed at thispoint. This indicates that the Antennacan be moved around and that noStatic Observations are beingrecorded.

Use the OCUPY (F1) key to start datarecording. The icon changes to atripod, indicating that the Receivershould remain stationary.

Press STOP (F1) when you haveenough data and STORE (F1) torecord the point information.

The ADD (F5) key is available inAdvanced mode and is explained insection 7.1.7.

Further details about this procedureare given in the sections that follow.


To break the auto numbering pressShift INDIV (F5) and enter an indi-vidual Point Id. After this point hasbeen stored it will return to the previ-ously suggested Point Id.

If you define a Point Id Template inthe Configuration Set you have evenmore flexibility to automatically defineyour Point Id’s.

Further information about Point IdTemplates and two working examplesare given in Chapter 5.2.

It will be possible to add a code to apoint if a coding system has beendefined for use in the ConfigurationSet.

System 500 supports two codingmethods; Thematical Coding andFree Coding. Both methods of codingare explained in Chapter 8.

Thematical Coding

The fields Point Code and CodeName will be displayed as above.Highlight the Point Code and either:

1. Use the left or right cursor keys tocycle through the code list.or

7.1.4 Adding a Code7.1.3 Adding the Antenna Height

Measure the Antenna Height. Whenusing a Tripod this will be measuredusing the Height Hook. Whenmounted on a pillar, you must usesome other way of measuring theheight. Enter the value in Ant Height.

Further details on measuring theAntenna height can be found insection 2.15.


2. Press ENTER and select the codefrom the list.or3. Type in the first few characters ofthe code until the desired code isdisplayed.

The Code Name will be displayed forthe Point Code that you have cho-sen. Enter any attributes for the codeusing the ATRIB (F4) key.

The code is stored along with thePoint Id information.

Free Coding

The Last Code and second last code(2Last Code) that were used areshown.

The CODE (F4) key will be available.Press this key to access the codelist.

To select the code:1. Use the left or right cursor keys tocycle through the code list.

or2. Press ENTER and select the codefrom the list.or3. Type in the first few characters ofthe code until the desired code isdisplayed.

An asterisk next to a code indicatesthat it has attributes.

Press CONT (F1) to select the code.

Further information about CodingSystems is available in Section 8.


7.1.5 Adding a Starting Time

It will be possible to add a startingtime for a point occupation if autooccupy has been set to Timed in theOccupation Settings of theConfiguration Set.

Initially, the time displayed in StartTime is the current time with theseconds rounded to zero.

Enter the time in Start Time inhours:minutes:seconds.

7.1.6 Measuring procedure

Measuring procedure withoutstarting timePress the OCUPY (F1) key to beginrecording observations. The iconchanges to a tripod, indicating thatthe Receiver should remainstationary.

Static Obs/Time - The method bywhich you have selected to counttime will be shown. In Advancedmode, you may select to display theamount of data required according toone of four criteria. If this has beenset, a percentage value will be shownnext to the expired Epochs/Time.


Press STORE (F1) to store the PointId and any Thematical Code that youmay have assigned. If Auto Store hasbeen set in the Configuration, this willhappen automatically.

Leave the survey by pressing SHIFTfollowed by QUIT (F6). To switch off,press the ON/OFF key on theterminal.

This percentage value is the amountof data recorded with 100% being theamount required. If Auto Stop wasselected, the recording ofobservations will automatically stopwhen 100% is reached.

The ADD (F5) key is available.Further information is available in thenext section.

Further information about the Stopand Go indicator, satellites tracked,data logged etc. can be accessedthrough the STATUS key. Moreinformation about this key is given inChapter 10.

When the required length of time haspassed, press the STOP (F1) key tostop raw observation recording. IfAuto Stop has been set in theConfiguration, this will happenautomatically.

Measuring procedure with startingtimeAfter entering a point ID, the antennaheight and a start time, press theOCUPY (F1) key.

The line Start Time changes to Timeto go. The time before themeasurement starts automatically isdisplayed in hours:minutes:secondsand is counted down.

Once the entered start time isreached, the measurement beginns.The icon changes to a tripod,indicating that the Receiver shouldremain stationary.


The line Time to go changes toStatic Obs/Time.

Static Obs/Time - The method bywhich you have selected to counttime will be shown. In Advancedmode, you may select to display theamount of data required according toone of four criteria. If this has beenset, a percentage value will be shownnext to the expired Epochs/Time.This percentage value is the amountof data recorded with 100% being theamount required. If Auto Stop wasselected, the recording ofobservations will automatically stopwhen 100% is reached.

The ADD (F5) key is available.Further information is available in thenext section.

Further information about the Stopand Go indicator, satellites tracked,data logged etc. can be accessedthrough the STATUS key. Moreinformation about this key is given inChapter 10.



Once the point is stored, again theOCUPY (F1) key becomes availableand the start time line is shown withthe current time and the secondsrounded to zero. To start a newoccupation enter the next start time.Then press OCUPY (F1).

Leave the survey by pressing SHIFTfollowed by QUIT (F6). To switch off,press the ON/OFF key on theterminal.


Adding Meteorological DataMeteorological data may be requiredwhen very precise work is beingcarried out or when very differentweather conditions exist between theRover and Reference. This data willnot be used by SKI-Pro but may beexported in RINEX format from SKI-Pro and used in a scientificprocessing software that acceptsmeteorological data for troposphericmodelling.

Select Meteorological Data from thelist and press CONT (F1).

Adding Point AnnotationsPoint Annotations may be used as anelectronic notepad where events,notes etc. may be written. They arethen taken with the Point Idinformation into SKI-Pro.

To add Point Annotations, selectPoint Annotations from the list andpress CONT (F1).

You may type in 4 notes with up to 26characters in each note. Press CONT(F1) when you are finished.

Press CLEAR (F6) to delete thecontent of all fields.

When the Advanced Mode isselected, the ADD (F5) key isavailable.

This key can be used to add PointAnnotations, and MeteorologicalData.

Press ADD (F5)

7.1.7 Using the ADD key


7.2 Post-processed Kinematic Survey (Rover)


Switch on. The Main Menu will bedisplayed. The system willautomatically start searching forsatellites.


Config Set - Defines theConfiguration Set to be used. The lastConfiguration Set used or created willbe taken by default although anyother Configuration Set may beselected.Job - Defines the Job to be used.This is the Job where any point andobservation data will be stored.

Coord Sys - Displays the coordinatesystem that will be used for thedisplay of coordinates. For post-processed work, this will normally beWGS84.

Antenna - Defines the Antenna setupto be used. The Setup defined in theConfiguration Set will be taken bydefault although any other setup maybe selected. For post-processedKinematic work, this will normally beAT501/502 Pole.


Enter the data and press STORE(F1). The data will be stored with atime tag. During long observationperiods you may need to storeseveral sets of meteorological data asthe weather changes.


The Main Survey screen appears.

From here you can add Point Id,Code, Antenna Height and observethe DOP.

If configured, you will also be able toenter a start time for the pointoccupation.

As soon as the receiver has enoughinformation, the DOP will bedisplayed.

The PP_KIS default post-processedkinematic configuration set is definedsuch that you must perform a staticinitialization.

This will always be the case whenusing a SR510. SR520 and SR530users may set the static initializationparameter to NO and performinitialization on the fly.

Further details about this procedureare given in the sections that follow.

7.2.2 Adding the Point Id7.2.1 Overview of Procedure

The Point Id is an identifier for aparticular point. It also collates allmeasurements made on that pointand all other associated data such ascodes, point annotations andmeteorological data.




Usually, in post-processed kinematicsurveys the Antenna will be mountedon a pole and therefore the height willremain constant. When an AT501/502Antenna is used together with aSystem 500 pole, the Antenna Heightis 2.00m. This may have beenspecified as the default height in theConfiguration Set.

Otherwise, measure the Antennaheight and enter it.

The only time when the Antennaheight will not remain constant iswhen a Static Initialization is carriedout on a Tripod and the Antenna isthen transferred onto a pole. In thiscase, measure the Antenna height onthe Tripod, add the offset (with aheight hook this is 0.36m) and enterit. Then, after pressing STOP (F1) tofinish the initialization, the MovingAntenna height specified in theConfiguration Set will be used for themoving part of the Kinematic chain.

7.2.3 Adding the Antenna Height

To break the auto numbering pressShift INDIV (F5) and enter anindividual Point Id. After this point hasbeen stored it will return to thepreviously suggested Point Id.





System 500 supports two codingmethods; Thematical Coding andFree Coding. The principles of bothmethods of coding are explained inChapter 8.

Thematical Coding


1. Use the left or right cursor keys tocycle through the code list.

or2. Press ENTER and select the codefrom the list.or3. Type in the first few characters ofthe code until the desired code isdisplayed.

The Code Name will be displayed forthe Point Code that you havechosen. Enter any attributes for thecode using the ATRIB (F4) key.


Free Coding



7.2.4 Adding a Code


To select the code:1. Use the left or right cursor keys tocycle through the code list.or2. Press ENTER and select the codefrom the list.or3. Type in the first few characters ofthe code until the desired code isdisplayed.









As soon as this key is pressed themoving part of the chain will beginand observations recorded at thepredefined rate. You may move alongthe course you wish to record.

When carrying out a post-processedkinematic survey where a staticinitialization has been performed, theReceiver will automatically monitorthe number of satellites tracked. If atany time this number falls below 4,observation recording will stop and amessage will show on the screeninforming you that the satellite counthas fallen below 4 and you mustreinitialize. You must then perform thestatic initialization again.

Measuring with Static Initializationwithout starting timeIf you have selected to perform astatic initialization, press OCUPY (F1)as soon as you are ready. The staticinitialization will begin. The Receiverneeds to be kept perfectly steadyduring this time. For this reason, it isadvised to use a quickstand or tomount the sensor on a tripod for theinitialization period.

The initialization may be thought of asa Rapid Static point. You will need tomeasure for several minutes, theexact time being determined by thebaseline length (distance betweenrover and reference). The exact timerequired may be shown using theStop and Go Indicator.

You may configure this to be shown inthe Main Survey panel and may alsoaccess it through the STATUS key.The moving part of the chain will notbegin until you have completed theinitialization and pressed STOP (F1).

The exact measuring procedurevaries depending upon whichReceiver you are using and theConfiguration Set.

When using an SR510, you mustperform a Static Initialization beforecommencing the moving part of thesurvey. The option to do this isactivated in the Configuration Set.When using a SR520 or SR530, youmay also perform a Static Initializationif required although there is notstrictly any need to do so. Whenusing the SR520 and SR530, thenormal way to work will be to initializeon the fly. No Static Initialization isthen required.

7.2.6 Measuring Procedure


Initialization on the Fly withoutstarting timeThis is the method that will bepreferred by SR520 and SR530users. No Static Initialization isrequired. Observations will berecorded as soon as CONT (F1) inthe SURVEY\Begin screen ispressed.

Recording Distinct Points withoutstarting timeTo record distinct points within themoving part of the kinematic chain(whether a static initialization hasbeen performed or not), occupy thepoint, level the pole and pressOCUPY (F1). The point will berecorded in accordance with what hasbeen defined in the Configuration Set.Check the Point Id and AntennaHeight. Add a code if required. PressSTOP (F1) followed by STORE (F1)to store the point.

Initialization and point recordingwith starting timeAfter entering a point ID, the antennaheight and a start time, press theOCUPY (F1) key.

The line Start Time changes to Timeto go. The time before themeasurement starts automatically isdisplayed in hours:minutes:secondsand is counted down.

Once the entered start time isreached, the measurement beginns.

The line Time to go changes toStatic Obs/Time.




7.2.7 Using the AUTO key 7.2.8 Using the ADD key

If Log Auto Positions is set to YESin the CONFIGURE\ Logging screenthe Auto (F3) key is available in themain Survey screen.

Auto (F3) can be used to switch tothe mode for measuring Auto-Positions in the Auto-Pos panel.

This functionality is mostly used inReal-Time Rover operations. Fordetails on measuring Auto-Positionsrefer to chapter 7.4.7 Using theAUTO key in Real-Time Rovermeasurement procedures.


This key can be used to add PointAnnotations, Meteorological Data andHidden Points.

Press ADD (F5).

Once the point is stored, again theOCUPY (F1) key becomes availableand the start time line is shown withthe current time and the secondsrounded to zero.

To start a new occupation - either thefirst point recording after initializationor a subsequent point recording -enter the next start time. Then pressOCUPY (F1).


Adding Meteorological DataMeteorological data may be requiredwhen very precise work is beingcarried out or when very differentweather conditions exist between theRover and Reference. When carryingout post-processed kinematic work, itonly makes sense to inputmeteorological data at distinct points,(not during the moving parts). Thisdata will not be used by SKI-Pro butmay be exported in RINEX formatfrom SKI-Pro and used in a scientificprocessing software that acceptsmeteorological data for troposphericmodelling.



Adding Point AnnotationsPoint Annotations may be used as anelectronic notepad where events,notes etc. may be written. They arethen taken with the Point Idinformation into SKI-Pro. PointAnnotations may only be added whena distinct point is being recorded.





7.3 Real-Time Reference Stations

This chapter assumes that you willuse the default Real-Time ReferenceFile.

Set up the equipment as described inChapter 2. Attach the Terminal, butonly attach the radio modem if youare sure that the port is correctlyconfigured. Attaching a radio modemto an incorrectly configured port mayresult in damage to the radio modem.

Switch on. The Main Menu will bedisplayed. The system will automati-cally start searching for satellites.


Config Set - Defines the Configura-tion Set to be used. The last Configu-ration Set used or created will betaken by default although any otherConfiguration Set may be selected.

Job - Defines the Job to be used.This is the Job where any point andobservation data will be stored.

Coord Sys - Displays the coordinatesystem that will be used for thedisplay of coordinates. This coordi-nate system is attached to the se-lected Job. Press CSYS (F6) tochange the Coordinate System.Information on determining thecoordinate system is given in section11.1.

Antenna - Defines the Antenna setupto be used. The Setup defined in theConfiguration Set will be taken bydefault although any other setup maybe selected. For Real-Time Refer-ence Stations, this will normally beAT501/502 Tripod.



You will need to select the way inwhich you define the reference point.You may select either a known pointfrom the drop down list or use theLAST (F3) key to use the coordinatesthat were used when the sensor waslast used as a reference station.Alternatively, use the HERE (F4) keyto select the present navigationposition or use the Single PointPositioning SPP (F6) feature todetermine the reference point.

7.3.1 Measuring procedure

Using a known pointSelect a point from the drop down listbox. This point will have beenpreviously entered into the databasemanually, from SKI Pro, or may be apoint resulting from a previous real-time rover measurement.

Use the COORD (F2) key to switchdisplay between coordinate systems.

Measure and input the AntennaHeight (Ant Height). When using aTripod this will be measured using theHeight Hook.


Using the last used ReferenceStation coordinatesTo use the same coordinates thatwere used when the sensor was lastused as a reference station, chooseLAST (F3).

When a sensor is used as areference station and is turned off, thereference station coordinates arestored within the System RAM. Theycan then be used again the next timethe sensor is used as a referencestation.

This means that even if the PC cardthat previously contained thereference station coordinates isformatted, the last used coordinatescan still be used.


Using the current NavigationPositionTo use the current navigation positionas the coordinates for the referencepoint, press the HERE (F4) key.

The current navigation position will betaken. Input the Point Id and pressSTORE (F1). The point will be addedto the database and will be taken overinto the Main Survey screen.

Measure and input the AntennaHeight (Ant Height). When using aTripod this will be measured using theHeight Hook.


The navigated position is normallyused in preference to the Single PointPosition (SPP) if there is no previ-ously measured point available andthe baseline between Reference andRover is 5km or less. In situationswhere the baseline is greater than10km, it is probably better to useSPP.

Using Single Point Position (SPP)A SPP is where the GPS codeobservations for a single point arecollected over a period of time andrefined into a position that is generallymore accurate than a navigatedposition.

To activate the Single Point position-ing, press SPP (F6).

The suggested Point Id is automati-cally created based on the Time andDate Point Id Template. It may ifrequired be overwritten. The Timeand Date Point Id Template followsthe following format:


RRRRMMDD_HHMMSSS

Where:RRRR = last four numbers ofReceiver serial number.MM = monthDD = DayHH = HourMM = MinutesSSS = seconds to 1 decimalplace.

Input the length of time over whichthe single point should be processed.The longer the time, the moreaccurate the single point. A goodcompromise is 20 minutes.

Press OCUPY (F1) to begin thesingle point occupation.

The occupation will run for the lengthof time specified. After this time, thepoint will be automatically recordedand the Main Survey screen will beshown. Alternatively, if you wish to cutthe single point processing short,press STOP (F1).

As soon as the Main Survey screen isshown, observation data will bebroadcast. Up to this point, only PointId and battery status etc. will bebroadcast.

Single Point Processing is generallyused in preference to the navigationposition as a means of definingreference station coordinates when

either there is no previouslymeasured point available and thebaseline distance from the referenceto the rover exceeds 10km.

The HERE and SPP methods areonly suitable for use at the start of aproject. On subsequent days,reference station coordinates shouldbe the results of the previous dayswork!

When the reference point has beendefined and the Main Survey panel isshown, there is little more to be done.Data will be transmitted and, if soconfigured, will also be recorded.

If working in Advanced mode, youmay use the ADD (F5) key to addPoint Annotations or Meteorologicaldata.

To shut the Receiver down, pressSTOP (F1) and then switch OFF. Thestore function is executedautomatically.


When the Advanced Mode is se-lected, the ADD (F5) key is available.

This key can be used to add Meteo-rological Data.

Press ADD (F5), followed by CONT(F1)

Meteorological data may be requiredwhen very precise work is beingcarried out and/or when very differentweather conditions exist between theRover and Reference. This shouldonly be used when recording data forpost-processing. This data will not beused by SKI-Pro but may be exportedin RINEX format from SKI-Pro and

used in a scientific processingsoftware that accepts meteorologicaldata for tropospheric modelling.





7.4 Real-Time Rover, Surveying New Points


Switch on. The Main Menu will bedisplayed. The system will automati-cally start searching for satellites.


Config Set - Defines the Configura-tion Set to be used. The last Configu-ration Set used or created will betaken by default although any otherConfiguration Set may be selected.

Job - Defines the Job to be used.This is the Job where any point andobservation data will be stored.

Coord Sys - Displays the coordinatesystem that will be used for thedisplay of coordinates. For this type ofwork, a local coordinate systemshould be used although this is notstrictly essential. Press CSYS (F6) tochange the Coordinate System.Information on determining thecoordinate system is given in section11.1.

Antenna - Defines the Antenna setupto be used. The Setup defined in theConfiguration Set will be taken bydefault although any other setup maybe selected. For Real-Time Roverwork, this will normally be AT501/502Pole.



7.4.1 Overview of Procedure

As soon as data is received from theReference, and the Rover itself istracking sufficient satellites, theambiguity resolution process willbegin. This processes the data andcalculates the baseline from Refer-ence to Rover to within 1-5 cm.

When the ambiguities are resolved,the Accuracy Status Icon will showthe position to be between 1 and5cm.

Additionally, the Coordinate Quality(Quality) in the Main Survey screenshould show between 0.01 and 0.05.

To record a point, place and level thepole, Input the Point Id and Code (ifrequired). If configured, you will alsobe able to enter a start time for thepoint occupation. If working in Ad-vanced mode, use the ADD key toadd point annotations and/or hiddenpoints.

Then press the OCUPY (F1) key.

Then according to what has been setin the Occupation Settings, pressSTOP (F1) and STORE (F1).

When working with DGPS (code only)corrections, the accuracy will bearound 0.5-5m. Ambiguity resolutionwill not be attempted. The AccuracyStatus Icon will show between 0.5and 5m

The Coordinate Quality (Quality) inthe Main Survey screen should showbetween 0.5 and 5.0.

Raw GPS observation data may belogged during the Real-Time surveywith no change to the procedure.

7.4.2 Adding the Point Id

The Point Id is an identifier for aparticular point. It also collates allmeasurements made on that pointand all other associated data such ascodes, point annotations and meteo-rological data.




Usually, in Real-Time Rover surveysthe Antenna will be mounted on apole and therefore will remainconstant. When an AT501/502Antenna is used together with aSystem 500 pole, the Antenna Heightis 2.00m. This may have beenspecified as the default height in theConfiguration Set.

Otherwise, measure the Antennaheight and enter it.

The only time when the Antennaheight will not remain constant iswhen a Static Initialization is carriedout on a Tripod and the Antenna isthen transferred onto a pole.

In this case, measure the Antennaheight on the Tripod and enter it.Then, after pressing STOP (F1) tofinish the initialization, the MovingAntenna height specified in theConfiguration Set will be used for themoving part of the Real-Time Roverwork.

It will be possible to add a code if acoding system has been defined inthe Configuration Set.

7.4.3 Adding the Antenna Height

To break the auto numbering pressShift INDIV (F5) and enter anindividual Point Id. After this point hasbeen stored it will return to thepreviously suggested Point Id.





System 500 supports two codingmethods; Thematical Coding andFree Coding. The principles of bothmethods of coding are explained inChapter 8.

Thematical Coding


1. Use the left or right cursor keys tocycle through the code list.or2. Press ENTER and select the codefrom the list.or3. Type in the first few characters ofthe code until the desired code isdisplayed.

The Code Name will be displayed forthe Point Code that you havechosen. Enter any attributes for thecode using the ATRIB (F4) key.

The code is stored then along withthe Point Id information.

Auto-logged points may also becoded if a coding system has beendefined. The procedure will be thesame as with Occupy Pointsdescribed above.

For further information on how to usecodes with Auto-logged Points referto chapter 7.4.7 Using the AUTO key.

Free Coding

The Last Code and second lastcode (2Last Code) that were usedare shown.


7.4.4 Adding a Code






Auto-logged points may also be free-coded if a corresponding codingsystem has been defined. Theprocedure will be the same as withOccupy Points described above.

For further information on how tofree-code Auto-logged points refer tochapter 7.4.7 Using the AUTO key.






The Accuracy Status Icon will bedisplayed as follows:

Additionally, the Coordinate Qualityshould show between 0.01 and 0.05.

To record a point, place and level thepole. Input information such as PointId and Code (if required). If working inAdvanced mode, use the ADD (F5)key to add point annotations. Pressthe OCUPY (F1) key.

Then, according to what has been setin Occupation Settings, press STOP(F1) and STORE (F1).

Measuring procedure withoutstarting timeSwitch on the instrument. SelectSurvey. Select a Real-Time RoverConfiguration Set in which autooccupy has not been set to Timed inthe Occupation Settings.

During this time, the unit shouldacquire satellites and should pick upthe signal from the Reference.

When enough of the same satellitesare tracked simultaneously at theRover and Reference and the signalfrom the Reference is received, theReceiver will automatically start theambiguity resolution process.

7.4.6 Measurement Procedure

Note that if code only measurementsare being used, the ambiguityresolution process is not required andtherefore will not start.

The ambiguity resolution process willrun. When the ambiguities areresolved, the baseline from theReference to the Rover is calculatedto between 1-5cm.


Measuring procedure with startingtimeSwitch on the instrument. SelectSurvey. Select a Real-Time RoverConfiguration Set in which autooccupy has been set to Timed in theOccupation Settings.

During this time, the unit shouldacquire satellites and should pick upthe signal from the Reference.

When enough of the same satellitesare tracked simultaneously at theRover and Reference and the signalfrom the Reference is received, theReceiver will automatically start theambiguity resolution process.

Note that if code only measurementsare being used, the ambiguityresolution process is not required andtherefore will not start.

The line Start Time changes toTime to go.The time before the measurementstarts automatically is displayed inhours:minutes:seconds and iscounted down.

Once the entered start time isreached, the measurement beginns.The icon changes to a tripod,indicating that the Receiver shouldremain stationary.

The ambiguity resolution process willrun. When the ambiguities areresolved, the baseline from theReference to the Rover is calculatedto between 1-5cm.

The Accuracy Status Icon will bedisplayed as follows:

Additionally, the Coordinate Qualityshould show between 0.01 and 0.05.To record a point, place and level thepole. Input information such as PointId, Code (if required) and start time. Ifworking in Advanced mode, use theADD (F5) key to add pointannotations. Press the OCUPY (F1)key.


Averaging ProcedureWhenever more than one coordinatefor the same point is recorded, thesystem does the following:

In any case, it carries out anaveraging procedure.

Depending on the ThreshholdSettings, either the differencebetween the average and theindividual point coordinates or theabsolute coordinate differencesbetween two points in X, Y, Z and E,N, H (with local coordinate system)can be displayed. Limits for theaveraging procedure as well as forthe absolute coordinate differencesare also set in Threshold Settings.

Should a point fall within thesethreshold settings and the system isset to the averaging functionality, youmay press AVRG (F2) to display thedifferences between the average andthe individual point coordinates.

The line Time to go changes todepending to the OCCUPY counterset Positions / Time at point.

Then, according to what has been setin Occupation Settings, press STOP(F1) and STORE (F1).

Once the point is stored, again theOCUPY (F1) key becomes availableand the start time line is shown withthe current time and the secondsrounded to zero. To start a newoccupation enter the next start time.Then press OCUPY (F1).

The intervals are displayed with timewhen they were recorded, and thedifferences in position and height.

Should a point fall outside of thesethreshold settings, this panel will beaccessed automatically. The asteriskmarks the measurement exceedingthe threshold settings. Commonreasons for this happening are anincorrect antenna height or a wrongpoint Id.

You may either:Press ESC to return to the surveyscreen, check and correct theantenna height or point Id, thenrerecord the interval. Your previous,incorrect interval will be deleted.


You may either:Press ESC to return to the surveyscreen, check and correct theantenna height or point Id, thenrerecord the interval. Your previous,incorrect interval will be deleted.orHighlight an interval that is incorrectand press DEL (F4) to delete theinterval. Then press CONT (F1) toreturn to the survey screen.orWith INFO (F5) toggle betweendifferent information for each interval.orHighlight an interval and press USE(F2) to include or exclude ameasurement from calculating theabsolute coordinate difference. Anabsolute coordinate difference canonly be calculated between twomeasurements. After having set theuse flag for two measurements to Y,press DIFF (F3) to display theabsolute coordinate differences.

Should a point fall within the thresholdsettings and the system is set toabsolute coordinate differences, youmay press ABS (F2).

orHighlight the interval that is incorrectand press USE (F2) to deselect theinterval. Then press CONT (F1) toreturn to the survey screen.orHighlight the interval that is incorrectand press DEL (F4) to delete theinterval.Then press CONT (F1) toreturn to the survey screen.orWith INFO (F5) toggle betweendifferent information for each interval. The intervals are displayed with time

when they were recorded, and thecoordinate quality and class.

Should a point fall outside of thesethreshold settings, this panel will beaccessed automatically. Commonreasons for this happening are anincorrect antenna height or a wrongpoint Id. The use flag for this point isthen set to N for no.


AutoPt Id – If no Auto Log Pos PointId template has been chosen thedefault template Time and Date willbe used. Alternatively a Point Idtemplate may be defined (see chapter5.4. Configuring the Receiver forReal-Time Rover Operations).

Mov Ant Hgt – Sets the AntennaHeight when the receiver is in movingmode. When a standard System 500pole setup is used, the suggesteddefault will be 2.00m.

Quality – Displays the quality of yourcurrent position.

If a coding system has been definedfor use in the Configuration Set it willbe possible to add a code to the auto-logged point. This may be either athematical code or a free code.

If Log Auto Positions is set to YESin the CONFIGURE\ Logging screenthe Auto (F3) key is available in themain Survey screen.

Auto (F3) can be used to switch tothe mode for measuring Auto-Positions in the Auto-Pos panel.

The absolute differences for Easting,Northing and Height can only bedisplayed if the survey is carried outin a local coordinate system.

An asterisk identifies those whichexceed the threshold settings.

CONT (F1) returns you to the surveyscreen.

7.4.7 Using the AUTO key


Note that adding a code is onlypossible if Store Pt DB is set to YESin the CONFIGURE\ Position Loggingscreen (see chapter 5.4).It is also only possible to change thecode for auto-logged points when noauto-logged points are beingmeasured.

Thematical Coding with auto-logged points

The procedure of thematically codingauto-logged points is very similar tothe thematical coding of OccupyPoints. For further information oncoding Occupy Points see chapter7.4.4 Adding a Code.

The fields AutoPt Code and CodeName will be displayed as above.

Highlighting the AutoPt Code youmay either select a code from thegiven codelist or enter a new code.The Code Name will be displayed forthe AutoPt Code that you havechosen.Using the ATRIB (F4) key youmay enter up to three attribute valuesfor the code.

The code is stored then along withthe AutoPt Id information.

Free Coding with auto-loggedpoints

The procedure of free-coding auto-logged points is very similar to thefree-coding of Occupy Points. Forfurther information on coding OccupyPoints see chapter 7.4.4 Adding aCode.

The Last Code and the second lastcode (2Last Code) that were usedare shown.

To access the codelist and enter adifferent or new code press theCODE (F4) key.


The fields Free Code andDescription will be displayed asabove.

Highlighting the Free Code you mayeither select a code from the givencodelist or enter a new code. TheDescription will be displayed for theselected Free Code. Using the NEW-I (F4) key you may enter up to 20attributes (Infos) for the code.

Press STORE (F1) to record thecode.

To start the logging of Auto-Pointspress the Start (F6) key.

To view or change the configuration ofthe Auto-Position logging press thePOS (F5) key, which accesses theCONFIGURE\ Position Loggingpanel. For further information on howto configure the logging of Auto-Positions see chapter 5.4 Cofiguringthe Receiver for Real-Time RoverOperations.

If you also wish to measure “normal”Occupy Points whilst still recordingauto-logged points press the SURV(F3) key to move back to the mainSurvey panel.

Note that the storing of Auto-Positionsstops as soon as OCUPY (F1) ispressed. When STOP (F1) is pressedto stop the measurement on theOccupy Point the system will startagain with storing Auto-Positions. Assoon as STORE (F1) is pressed theAUTO (F3) key becomes visibleagain to enter the AUTO-POS panel.

While Auto-Positions are collectedthe number of Positions alreadymeasured will be displayed.

Press STOP (F6) to terminate thelogging of Auto-Points.


The INIT (F6) key shows in the mainsurvey screen and is available inAdvanced Mode.

When a Real-Time RoverConfiguration Set is chosen, theReceiver will automatically start theinitialization process as On-the-Fly assoon as the conditions are right.

INIT (F6) can be used to select theinitialization method and also to forcea new initialization. Ensure that thecorrect Antenna height has beenentered before starting theinitialization.

Static - Initializes using Static. TheAntenna should be mounted either onthe pole with a quickstand or on atripod. This method may be used if forsome reason it is proving difficult toinitialize on the fly and no known pointis available.

Known Point - Initializes on a knownpoint. If you have a point, thecoordinates of which are alreadyaccurately known in position andheight, you may use it to initialize.This method is used when it isproving difficult to initialize on the fly.

On-The-Fly - Initializes as you aremoving with the Antenna. This is themost common and useful method andis used automatically by default. Itmay be used again here after asuccessful initialization on the fly as aquality check.

Select the method you wish to useand press CONT (F1).

When Static and On-the-Fly havebeen chosen, the initializationprocedure will begin immediately.

When Known Point has beenchosen you will be prompted to selectthe point you wish to use to initializeon. This point must be contained inthe Job you are working in.

7.4.8 Using the INIT key



This key can be used to add PointAnnotations, Meteorological Data andHidden Points.

Press ADD (F5)

Adding Point AnnotationsPoint Annotations may be used as anelectronic notepad where events,notes etc. may be written. They arethen taken with the Point Idinformation into SKI Pro.




Adding Meteorological DataMeteorological data may be requiredwhen very precise work is beingcarried out or when very differentweather conditions exist between theRover and Reference. When carryingout Real-Time Rover work, it onlymakes sense to input meteorologicaldata when recording data for post-processing as well as recordingpoints in real-time. Themeteorological data should beentered at distinct points, (not duringthe moving parts). This data will notbe used by SKI-Pro but may beexported in RINEX format from SKI-Pro and used in a scientificprocessing software that acceptsmeteorological data for troposphericmodelling.





Hidden PointsA hidden point is a point that cannotbe measured by GPS. This isnormally due to satellite shadingcaused by trees overhead, the closeproximity of buildings etc. This featureis used by Real-Time Rovers only.

There are two possibilities forinputting hidden point data. You mayattach a Hidden Point device such asLeica Disto memo, Disto pro, DistoTM

pro4 or DistoTM pro4 a. Or you maymeasure to the hidden point using atape.

When using a Hidden Point device,remember to set the correct Portparameters. For details refer toAppendix H.

Having selected Hidden Point fromthe ADD menu, you have 5 choices.


Bearing and Distance, heightexcluded

Point A - GPS point on whichbearing α is measured.Bearing - Bearing Angle to theHidden Point in units configured.Distance - Horizontal distance fromPoint A to the Hidden Point in unitsconfigured.

Use ABORT (F1) to abort theprocedure. When Point A ishighlighted, use NEWOC (F5) tooccupy that point before you startmeasuring the hidden point.

When Bearing is highlighted, theBRNG (F6) key is available. This

function may be used if you do notknow or have no device fordetermining the bearing. Select apoint that lies on the line AH (seediagram). Occupy the point and pressBRNG (F6).

Input a Point Id and the Direction(Toward or Away from the hiddenpoint). Then press OCUPY (F1) andSTOP (F1), STORE (F1) according tothe Occupation Settings. TheBearing towards point H will becalculated using the auxiliary pointand Point A.

A -GPS point on which bearing α is measuredB -Measured Distance from

A to HC -Auxiliary Point (optional)H -Hidden pointααααα - Measured Bearing from A to H


Bearing and Distance, heightincluded

If the height computation for ahidden point has been enabledwithin the configuration, the follow-ing options apply in addition tothose on the previous page.

When working with devices withoutinclinometer the height difference canbe estimated and typed in manuallly.

Use the I/T H (F4) key to check orenter the instrument height at thestandpoint and target height.

Delta Hgt - Height differencebetween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point. De-vices with inclinometer like theLaser Locator will transfer themeasured height difference auto-matically into this field as long asInclude Hgt in the panel CONFIG-URE\ Hidden Point is set to YES.

CONT (F1) to return to the previouspanel.

When Distance is highlighted, useSLOPE (F5) to enter a slope dis-tance and either an elevation angleor a grade in %. External deviceswork here as well.

The default values as defined in theconfiguration are displayed but canbe edited. Use the DEFLT (F5) key toreveal the default values again.

Trgt Height will only be available ifthe settings have been done accord-ingly in the configuration. Otherwise,only the instrument height will betaken into account.

CONT (F1) returns to the previouspanel and displays the calculatedhorizontal distance and heightdifference.

For further information on the HiddenPoint application and configurationrefer to Appendix H as well aschapter 5.4.1.


Double Bearing, height excluded

Point A - The point from whichBearing A is measured.Bearing A - Bearing Angle α toHidden Point in units configured.Point B - The point from whichBearing B is measuredBearing B - Bearing Angle β toHidden Point in units configured.

Use ABORT (F1) to abort theprocedure. When Pt from ishighlighted, use NEWOC (F5) tooccupy the point you are currentlyat before the hidden point is mea-sured.

When Bearing is highlighted, theBRNG (F6) key is available. Thisfunction may be used if you do notknow or have no means of calculatingthe bearing. Select a point that lies onthe line AH (see diagram). Occupythe point and press BRNG (F6).

Input a Point Id and the Direction(Toward or Away from the hiddenpoint). Then press OCUPY (F1) andSTOP (F1), STORE (F1) according tothe Occupation Settings. The Bear-ing will be calculated using this pointand the point you are measuringfrom.

A -Point from which Bearing A ismeasured

B -Point from which Bearing B ismeasured

C -Auxiliary Point (optional)D -Auxiliary Point (optional)H -Hidden Pointααααα - Measured Bearing from Aβββββ - Measured Bearing from B


Double Bearing, height included

If the height computation for ahidden point has been enabledwithin the configuration, thefollowing options apply in addition tothose on the previous page.

Delta Hgt - Height differencebetween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point.Devices with inclinometer like theLaser Locator will transfer themeasured height differenceautomatically into this field as longas Include Hgt in the panelCONFIGURE\ Hidden Point is setto YES. When working with devices

without inclinometer the heightdifference can be estimated andtyped in manuallly.

Use the I/T H (F4) key to check orenter the instrument height at thestandpoints A and B and targetheights.


Trgt Height will only be available ifthe settings have been doneaccordingly in the configuration.Otherwise, only the instrument heightwill be taken into account.

CONT (F1) to return to the previouspanel and continue with thecalculation of the hidden point.



Double Distance, heightexcluded

Point A - Point from which Dis-tance A is measured.Distance A - Horizontal distancefrom Point A to the hidden point inunits configured.Point B - Point from which Dis-tance B is measured.Distance B - Horizontal distancefrom Point B to the hidden point inunits configured.Location - Locates hidden point toleft or right of Line AB.

Use ABORT (F1) to abort theprocedure. Use NEWOC (F5) tooccupy the point you are currently atbefore the hidden point is measured.

A -Point from which Distance A ismeasured.

B -Point from which Distance B ismeasured.

C -Distance AD -Distance BAB - Line ABL - Left of Line ABR -Right of Line AB


Double Distance, height included

If the height computation for ahidden point has been enabledwithin the configuration, the followingoptions apply in addition to those onthe previous page.

Delta Hgt - Height differencebetween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point.Devices with inclinometer like theLaser Locator will transfer themeasured height differenceautomatically into this field as longas Include Hgt in the panelCONFIGURE\ Hidden Point is setto YES.

When working with devices withoutinclinometer the height differencecan be estimated and typed inmanuallly.





When Distance A or Distance B ishighlighted, use SLOPE (F5) toenter a slope distance and either anelevation angle or a grade in %.

External devices work here as well.CONT (F1) returns to the previouspanel and displays the calculatedhorizontal distances and heightdifferences.



Chainage and Offset, heightexcluded

Point A - Point A on line.Point B - Point B on line.Chnge from - Point from whichchainage starts.Chainage - Distance along lineOffset - Offset from line to hiddenpoint. Negative value = left of line,Positive value = right of line.

Use ABORT (F1) to abort theprocedure. Use NEWOC (F5) tooccupy the point you are currently atbefore the hidden point is mea-sured.

A - GPS Point AB - GPS Point BC - ChainageO - OffsetH - Hidden point


Chainage and Offset, heightexcluded

If the height computation for ahidden point has been enabledwithin the configuration, the follow-ing options apply in addition tothose on the previous page.

Delta Hgt - Height differencebetween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point. De-vices with inclinometer like theLaser Locator will transfer themeasured height difference auto-matically into this field as long asInclude Hgt in the panel CONFIG-URE\ Hidden Point is set to YES.




Trgt Height will only be available ifthe settings have been done accord-ingly in the configuration. Otherwise,only the instrument height will betaken into account.

CONT (F1) to return to the previouspanel and continue with the calcula-tion of the hidden point.

For further information on the HiddenPoint application and configurationrefer to Appendix H as well as chap-ter 5.4.1.


Backward Bearing & Distance,height excluded

Point A - GPS point towards whichbearing α is measured.Bearing - Bearing Angle to Point Ain units configured.Distance - Horizontal distance fromthe Hidden Point to Point A in unitsconfigured.

Use ABORT (F1) to abort theprocedure. When Point A is high-lighted, use NEWOC (F5) to occupythat point.

Go to the Hidden Point. When Bear-ing is highlighted, the BRNG (F6) keyis available. This function may beused if you do not know or have nodevice for determining the bearing.Select a point that lies on the line HA(see diagram). Occupy the point andpress BRNG (F6).

Input a Point Id and the Direction(Toward or Away from Point A).Then press OCUPY (F1) and STOP(F1), STORE (F1) according to theOccupation Settings. The Bearingtowards Point A will be calculatedusing the auxiliary point and Point A.

A -GPS point towards which bearing α is measuredB -Measured Distance from H to AC -Auxiliary Point (optional)H -Hidden pointααααα - Measured Bearing from H to A


Backward Bearing & Distance,height included

If the height computation for ahidden point has been enabledwithin the configuration, thefollowing options apply in addition tothose on the previous page.

Delta Hgt - Height differencebetween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point.Devices with inclinometer like theLaser Locator will transfer themeasured height differenceautomatically into this field as longas Include Hgt in the panelCONFIGURE\ Hidden Point is setto YES.


Use the I/T H (F4) key to check orenter the instrument height at thestandpoint and target height.




When Distance is highlighted, useSLOPE (F5) to enter a slope distanceand either an elevation angle or agrade in %. External devices workhere as well.

CONT (F1) returns to the previouspanel and displays the calculatedhorizontal distance and heightdifference.



7.4.10 Using the NEAR key

Search for the nearest point to thecurrent sensor position by pressingSHIFT and then NEAR (F2). Thecurrent sensor position is the positionat the time when the NEAR key ispressed.

Stop the search with ABORT (F1).

Once the nearest point has beenfound, its point ID is automaticallycopied into the Point ID field.This can be helpful when it isnecessary to make a secondmeasurement of a previouslymeasured point. It saves having toremember and then type in the pointID.

Survey the point as usual.

7.4.11 Radio Down Infill

Radio Down Infill is used whencontact between the Reference andRover is lost and a Real-Timeposition cannot be calculated. Thisoption is set in the Configuration Set.

When contact is lost, the ambiguitieswill also be lost after a few seconds.The Accuracy Status Icon will displaya navigated position (<100m).

The Quality will be low, (a largenumber).

Raw GPS data logging willautomatically commence at a rate of1 second after the length of timespecified in the Configuration Set.


Then one of three scenarios canensue:

1. Contact with the Reference isreestablished within theminimum logging time specifiedin the Configuration Set. Loggingwill carry on for this minimumtime and then stop.

2. Contact with the Reference isreestablished after the minimumlogging time specified in theConfiguration Set. Logging willstop.

3. Contact with the Reference isnot reestablished. Logging willcontinue until the survey isended or contact with theReference Station isreestablished.

When using Post-Processing Infill it isuseful to note the following points:

1. The Reference Station mustalso be logging data at the samerate or higher than the Rover.

2. The data is logged as akinematic chain. Distinct pointswithin the chain may be loggedas in a post-processedkinematic survey.

3. The data has to be downloadedand processed using SKI-Pro.All of the data (Real-Time pointsand raw data), will be importedinto the same SKI-Pro Project.


7.5 Real-Time Rover, Staking Out 7.5.1 Entering Stakeout

Stake-Out is the staking out ofpredetermined points. These pointsmay have been surveyed earlier anduploaded through SKI Pro, mayalready exist in a Job on the Receiveror may have been uploaded in anASCII file.

System 500 offers the possibility tostake out points, slopes and grids.

Stakeout must always be performedin Real-Time, normally using a SR530in order that centimeter levelaccuracies can be achieved.Therefore, a Real-Time Rover typeConfiguration Set should always beused.


Switch on. The Main Menu will bedisplayed. The system willautomatically start searching forsatellites. If the Receiver is alreadyconfigured as a Real-Time Rover anda signal is available from a referencestation, the Receiver will alsoautomatically start the ambiguityresolution process.

From the Main Menu, select Stake-Out.

The following screen will then appear:

Config Set - The Configuration Setused for the stakeout.Stake Pts - The Job or ASCII fileused as the source for the points tobe staked. The source type can beconfigured inCONFIG\Survey\Stakeout.


Store Pts - The Job where the stakedpoints are stored.Stake Type - The type of Stake-Outoperation to be performed.Antenna - The Antenna setup used,defined in the Configuration Set. Youmay select a different one if required.Ant Height - The default AntennaHeight defined in the ConfigurationSet. You may enter a different heightif required.

Use LOG (F3) if you want to generatea report file of the staked out points.Select between Short, Long orNone. A report log-file will be storedon the PC Card or Internal memory inthe ‘Log’ sub-directory.A Long log file will contain the designand “as staked” co-ordinates, thedifferences in easting, northing andheight between the design and stakedpoints and the antenna height.

7.5.2 Stake-Out Types

1. PointSimple point stakeout. Points aredefined as targets and staked from apredefined list. The distance in/outand left/right or distance and bearingare given to the target, together withthe cut/fill. Orientation can be made ina variety of ways including orientationparallel to a line.

2. SlopeStake points along a slope. Line isselected as orientation (no points areavailable as orientation). The cut andfill are relative to the slope of the line.

3. GridStake points in the form of a gridbased on lines. A reference line isdefined and the grid built up usingincrements along the line and offsets.

A Short log file will contain the designco-ordinates, the “as staked” heightcoordinate and the differences inheight between the design and stakedpoints.

Use ASCII (F4) - to select whetheryou want to stakeout from an ASCIIfile or from a Job.For more information on staking outfrom an ASCII file see section 5.4.


7.5.3 The Stake-Out Screen

When Stake-Out has been started, the following screen appears:

1

2

3

4

5

1. Orientation - Defines the directionon which the Range Information (3) isbased.

2. Target Point - The current point forwhich the Range Information (3) isshown.

3. Range Information - The range tothe currently selected point. May beone of two formats:

Orthogonal - Range In/Out andOffset Left/Right plus Cut/Fill.Polar - Range In/Out and Bearingplus Cut/Fill.

4. Quality - The quality of yourcurrent position.

5. Graphics panel - Shows yourcurrent position (a cross) relative tothe Target Point (central circle). Thescale changes depending on yourproximity to the target.


The Orientation defines a referencedirection from which allmeasurements to target points aremade.

The orientation is defined by a pointor a line.

To select a method of Orientation,highlight the Orient field and use theleft or right cursor keys to cyclethrough the options or press Enter toopen a window containing all theoptions.

North - The reference direction fromwhich all measurements aredisplayed to Target points is north inthe active coordinate system.

Sun - The reference direction fromwhich all measurements aredisplayed to Target points is the sun.The Receiver contains an almanacand can calculate the position of thesun irrespective of local time orposition.

7.5.4 Orientation

Last Pt - The reference directionfrom which all measurements aredisplayed to Target points is the LastPoint that was recorded.

Known Pt - The reference directionfrom which all measurements aredisplayed to Target points is a pointcontained within the current “Stakefrom” Job. Select the point from thelist that is presented when this optionis chosen.

Arrow - If Arrow has been selectedthe graphical display will show amoving arrow pointing in the directionof the point to be staked.

Line - The reference direction isparallel to the selected line. Linesmay be defined based on points inthe Job.

Defining a new Line for OrientationA new line for orientation may bedefined between any two points thatexist in the current Job used.

In the Orient field selected Line.

A new entry field will appear belowOrient. This field will be empty if nolines are defined. Move to this fieldand press ENTER to access the linelist box.


The list of lines is displayed. If the listis empty then there are no linesdefined! Use CONT (F1) to select thehighlighted line, New (F2) to define anew line, EDIT (F3) to edit an existingline and DEL-A (F4) to delete all thelines in the list.

Lines are always stored in an ASCIIfile, it is not possible to store lines in aJob.

Lines are stored in local grid format. Itis however still possible to define aline with WGS84 Geodetic orCartesian coordinates even whenonly the WGS84 coordinate system isbeing used. The sensor willautomatically use a standard UTMprojection to compute the necessarygrid coordinates.

The ASCII file is always defined asSTK_Line.txt and is stored on the PCCard or Internal memory in the Datasub-directory. You may write your ownline file on the PC and then transfer itto the PC Card or internal memory.The file format is given in Appendix D.

To define a new line, press NEW(F2).

Input a Name for the Line. Select themethod to use to define the Line inType. You may select from:

Start+EndpointStart+Dst+Bg+%Start+Dst+Bg+H/VStart+Dst+Bg+V/HStart+Dst+Bg+Hgt

S - Start - Start pointE - Endpoint - End pointD - Dst - Horizontal Distanceβ - Brg - BearingH - H - Horizontal componentV - V - Vertical componenth - Hgt - Height difference

% = V/H × 100


Start+EndpointThe Line is defined between twopoints.

Either:

1. Enter the coordinates and heightof each point.

or2. Use the IMPRT (F3) key to

import any point contained in theJob you are using. Make surethat one of the entry fields forthe point (start or end point) youwish to define is highlighted,press IMPRT (F3), select thepoint from the list and pressCONT (F1).

Start+Dst+Bg+%The line is defined by a start point, ahorizontal distance and bearing fromthe start point and a percentage slopevalue.

Enter/Select LocalE, Local N andOrtho Hgt for the start point asdescribed in Start+Endpoint.

Enter the horizontal Distance to theend point. This end point will be anartificial point. If no value other thanzero is given, a default of 100m willbe taken.

Enter the horizontal Bearing to theend point, through which the linepasses.

Enter the Slope percentage value.This is defined as described in thediagram.

Start+Dst+Bg+H/VThe line is defined by a start point, ahorizontal distance and bearing fromthe start point and the ratio ofhorizontal increment over verticalincrement.




Enter the Slope H/V values. Theseare defined as described in thediagram.


Start+Dst+Bg+V/HThe line is defined by a start point, ahorizontal distance and bearing fromthe start point and the ratio of verticalincrement over horizontal increment.




Enter the Slope V/H values. Theseare defined as described in thediagram.

Start+Dist+Bg+HgtThe line is defined by a start point, ahorizontal distance and bearing fromthe start point and the heightdifference between the start point andartificial end point.




Enter the Height Difference (Hgt Diff)between the start point and theartificial end point.

When you have entered the methodby which you wish to define the lineand the necessary parameters, pressCONT (F1) to continue.

The new line is displayed. PressCONT (F1) to select the line fororientation.


There are two methods which youcan use to find your way to a point.These are Polar and Orthogonal. Usethe F2 key to switch between the twomethods.

7.5.5 Polar and Orthogonal

OrthogonalThe Orthogonal method gives you a distance In/Out to the point, a distanceleft/right to the point and a cut/fill.

O - Orientation direction (Orient)P - Current PositionI/O - Horizontal Distance (In/Out)L/R - Horizontal Distance (Left/Right)C/F - Vertical Distance (Cut/Fill)T - Target Point

Note: In - from current position totarget along the orientation direction.Out - from current position to target180° from orientation directionLeft/right - looking along orientationdirection, distance left/right to targetpoint.


PolarThe Polar Method gives you a Bearing from the orientation reference, ahorizontal distance and a cut/fill to the point.

O - Orientation Direction (Orient)P - Current PositionD - Horizontal Distance (Dist) toTarget

β - Bearing (Direct) to TargetC/F - Vertical Distance (Cut/Fill)T - Target Point

7.5.6 Using the Reverse function

The reverse function is available inAdvanced mode and switches theorientation by 180°. It is used whenthe Target lies behind you and youwould effectively have to walkbackwards to reach it.

Press REVRS (F3). The orientation isturned through 180°. You can alsonow turn through 180° yourself sothat you are facing the direction inwhich you need to walk.


The redraw function is used whenShow Path has been chosen in theconfiguration and the path that youhave followed is shown on the graphi-cal area of the display.

When moving around in the samearea, this graphical area may notrefresh. The path may build upobscuring the display.

Press REDRW (F4) to refresh thedisplay and erase the displayed path.

7.5.7 Using the Redraw function 7.5.8 Picking up a new point

This function is available in Advancedmode. If you are staking out and needto measure new points, you may doso by pressing the PCKUP (F5) key.This brings you into survey mode.

Measure the points and/or hiddenpoints as described in sections 7.4.6and 7.4.9.

Press SHIFT and then STAKE (F2) toreturn to Stake-Out. Returning toStake-Out is possible before a pointoccupation or after storing the point.

7.5.9 Using the INIT key

The INIT (F6) key is available inAdvanced mode and is used to selectand force a new initialization.

In Stake-Out, the initialization willalways be on-the-fly. More detailsabout using the INIT key andinitialization on the fly can be found insection 7.4.8.


7.5.10 Using the NEAR key

The nearest point to the currentsensor position for staking out can befound by pressing SHIFT and thenNEAR (F2). The current sensorposition is the position at the timewhen the NEAR key is pressed.

It may also help when using this keyto set the stake out filter to Points toStake. See chapter 11.3 for moreinformation about the filter.

Stop the search with ABORT (F1).

Once the nearest point has beenfound, its point ID is automaticallycopied into the field of the TargetPoint.

Stake out the point as usual.

7.5.11 Graph

A map of the 30 last measured pointscan be displayed by pressing SHIFTand then GRAPH (F3). Each point isgiven a temporary ID between 1 and30.

SCALE (F2) displays a linear scaleconsistent with the current zoomlevel.

The map is displayed. Use ZOOM+(F3) and ZOOM- (F4) to zoom in andout.

ID (F5) reveals a list with the tempo-rary point IDs and the “real” point IDs.


FILT (F6) allows to change the filtersettings for the currently selected Job.More information about filter settingscan be found in section 11.3.

Press SHIFT to reveal REDRW (F4).This redraws the map to the originalscale.

You may also scroll the map left/right,up/down by using the cursor keys.

Auxiliary points are used as aidswhen trying to find a stake out point.Two auxiliary points are recorded toform start and end points of a line.The chainage and offset or distancefrom each auxiliary point to the targetpoint is then displayed together with asketch.

The auxiliary points can have codesassigned to them and can also bedownloaded into SKI Pro.

To start the auxiliary point routine,press SHIFT and then AUXPT (F5).

Enter a point Id for Point A and recordthe auxiliary point in exactly the sameway that you would record any otherpoint in real-time. Then carry out thesame operation for point B. Afterpressing STORE (F1) the followingscreen will appear.

7.5.12 Aux Pt

The line AB is displayed together withthe location of the target point.

Chg - The chainage along the line ABto the target point.Ofs - The Offset from line AB to thetarget point. Negative value = left,positive value = right.Hgt A/Hgt B - Height differencebetween auxiliary point A/B and thetarget point.

Press DIST (F3) to display thedistance from each auxiliary point tothe target point instead of thechainage and offset.

Press CONT (F1) to return to thestake out screen.


Point is selected as the Stake Typewhen entering Stake-Out.

The list of Target points are thosecontained in the Job or ASCII File.

The “as staked” points will always bestored in the Job. You may alsochoose to store the Target pointsdefined in the ASCII File in the Job. Inthis way you have the Target pointsand the “as staked” points in one Job.

To stake out a point, select it from theTarget Point List. Press Enter toexpose a list of all points in the Job.See section 11.3 for a description ofthe useful filters and sorting methodswhich may be helpful when staking alot of points. A particularly useful filtermaybe to filter by Points to Stake.

The measurement to the point will bedisplayed as Orthogonal or Polar. Usethe F2 key to switch between themethods.

If you are a 500 meter (or feet) awayfrom the target point, the graphicaldisplay will look as follows:

7.5.13 Point Stake-Out - Procedure

The cross and arrow indicate yourcurrent position and direction ofmoving. The rectangle points to thetarget point and the triangle to theorientation point. The display is onlyupdated if you are moving faster than50cm/sec. If the rectangle is in oneline with the arrow you are headingtowards the target point.

If you are closer than 500 m to thetarget point your position with respectto the Target point is shown in an-other graphical display. The scaleshown on the left side of the displaywill change as you get closer to thepoint. The stages are 500m, 100m,25m, 5m, 1m and 0.5m. Note that theorientation direction is denoted by thearrow at the top center. When theReverse function is activated, thisarrow will appear bottom center of thegraphical display.


The graphical display is a square untilthe 0.5m level is reached. At thisstage it will turn into a circle.

When you are at the point to bestaked, the measurements to thepoint must be at or nearly zero. Makesure that the pole is level and pressOCUPY (F1). If you had to level thepole, ensure that the measurementsto the point are still good beforepressing OCUPY.

Depending upon what has been set inthe configuration, the following screenmay appear.

The Point Id of the Target Point will betaken by default. If you wish to enter anew point Id you may, but rememberthat this will then be considered aseparate point. If you simply wish toadd aditional text to the suggestedpoint Id, press Enter. The point Id inthe display remains and the cursorwill be in the position defined in thecurrent Point Id template.

If required, you may also add a code(if a coding system has beenconfigured). Details on adding codesare given in section 7.4.4.

When you are satisfied with the input,press STOP (F1).

The DIFF (F2) key is available.

Pressing this key gives thedifferences between the designcoordinates and staked coordinatesof the point.


If Diff Check has been set to eitherPosition only, Height only or Pos +Hgt in the CONFIGURE\ Stake-Outscreen then the STAKE-OUT\ OccupyDifferences panel will be displayedautomatically if the differencesexceed the defined Limit.

Diff In/Out - Horizontal distance In/Out to the Target Point.Diff Left/Right - Horizontal distanceLeft/Right to the Target Point.Diff Cut/Fill - Vertical distance to theTarget Point.Total Diff - Length of vector fromTarget Point to measured point.

If you have chosen to record a LONGlog file these values will also bestored in the log file.

Press STORE (F1)

A check will be performed accordingto the Required Coordinate Qualityset in the Configuration. If the point iswithin the Required CQ, it will bestored and no special messages willappear.

If however the point is outside theRequired CQ, it may warrant furtherinvestigation.

7.5.14 Slope Stake-Out - Procedure

Slope Stake-Out has two mainapplications.


1. Measurement/Stakeout of transi-tion points of slopes for cross-sections.

S - Startpoint of slope - Transition point to be measured/

staked

The Line is defined as the sectionline through the terrain. You ensurethat you follow this line by observingthe Left/Right value and keeping it ator near zero. When you arrive at apoint where the level of the terrainbegins to change, record the point.You can also stake this point forfuture reference.

Plan

Section

2. Staking out of slope intercepts.(points where design slopes andterrain intersect).

S - Startpoint of Slope LineE - Endpoint of Slope LineP - Current PositionI/O - Horizontal Distance In/Out toStart PointC/F - Vertical Distance Cut/Fill toSlope Line

- Slope Intercept


The Slope Line is defined and se-lected. Proceed along the line. Youcan ensure that you keep on the lineby observing the Left/Right value andkeeping it at or near zero. Observethe Cut/Fill value. At the intercept(s) itwill be zero. When you arrive at sucha point, stake it and record it.

ProcedureSlope is selected as the Stake Typewhen entering Stake-Out.

The “as staked” points will always bestored in the Store Pts Job. If stakingfrom an ASCII file, you may alsochoose to store the Target pointsdefined there in the Job. In this wayyou have the Target points and the“as staked” points in one Job.

To start Slope Stake-Out, pressCONT (F1).

Stake-Out starts. Orient is along theSlope Line only . Details about usingLines as orientation are given insection 7.5.4.

The measurements In/Out, Right/Left and Cut/Fill are given withrespect to the start point of the line.

When you reach the required pointplace the stake.

To record the point, press OCUPY(F1).


A default Point Id is suggested. Thiscomprises of the Line Id followed byany incrementing numbers that youhave defined in the Occupy template.

Alternatively, you may press SHIFTand then PT ID (F3) to use the PointID currently defined in the Occupytemplate.

If you simply wish to add aditional textto the suggested point Id, pressEnter. The point Id in the displayremains and the cursor will be in theposition defined in the current Point Idtemplate.

You may also enter a completelydifferent Point Id if required.

Press STOP (F1).

If a codelist has been defined youmay select a code. Details on addingcodes are given in section 7.4.4.

The DIFF (F2) key is available.Pressing this key gives the differ-ences between the startpoint of theline and the staked point.

Diff In/Out - Horizontal distance In/Out to the startpointDiff Left/Right - Horizontal distanceLeft/Right to the startpoint.Diff Cut/Fill - Vertical distance to thestartpoint of line.Total Diff - Length of vector fromstartpoint to measured point.

If you have chosen to record a LONGlog file these values will also bestored in the log file.

Press STORE (F1) to store the point.


Grid Stake-Out can be used to stake out grids relative to adefined reference line.

SE - Defined Reference LineD - Distance to Station BeginH - Horizontal OffsetV - Vertical OffsetI - Increment

The Reference Line is selected or defined. Define thedistance to the first station along the Reference Line, theHorizontal and Vertical Offsets from the Reference Line.Define the amount by which the Receiver should incre-ment.

The first Target Point is the first point in the grid. Proceedto this point and record it. After this point is recorded, thenext Target point will be shown. Carry on in this fashionuntil you reach the end of the row.

You may then create a new row by redefining the Horizon-tal Offset and switching the Increment to the negativevalue. Follow this row back in the direction from which youcame, recording the grid points as you go. Alternatively,you can redefine the horizontal offset and start the nextrow in the same direction, next to the first grid point.

7.5.15 Grid Stake-Out - Procedure


ProcedureGrid is selected as the Stake Typewhen entering Stake-Out.

The “as staked” points will always bestored in the Job. If staking from anASCII file, you may also choose tostore the Target points defined therein the Job. In this way you have theTarget points and the “as staked”points in one Job.

To start Grid Stake-Out, press CONT(F1).

Stake-Out starts. Select theorientation.

Then move to the Target field (shownempty here). You must select a lineas the target. Press ENTER.

You may select the line from thispanel. If no lines are defined (ashere), press NEW (F2) to define one.

Descriptions of how to define linesare given in section 7.5.4 (Althoughthis section is concerned withorientation, the principles of defininglines are exactly the same).

When you have selected/defined aline, use the PARAM (F5) key todefine the grid parameters.

Station Beg - The distance along theReference Line to the first grid point.Horz Offset - The Horizontal Offsetfrom the Reference Line to the firstgrid point.Vert Offset - The Vertical Offset fromthe Reference Line to the first gridpoint.


Station Inc - The distance betweeneach grid point in the direction of theReference Line.Scale - Depending on thetransformation method used and thestake out design criteria, you mayspecify a scale factor to be applied tothe increment value within the mapprojection plane. This is only usedwhen staking out grids over largeareas (tens of kilometers) andotherwise should be left at the defaultvalue of 1.00.

Refer to the diagrams at the start ofthis section for more details of eachparameter.


The first point in the grid isautomatically selected as the targetpoint and measurements to that pointare given.

Information about the point you arelooking for is given in the DirectoryBar.

The point is given as:

+XXXX.XX+YYYY.YY

WhereX is the distance along the Refer-

ence Line.

Y is the Horizontal Offset from theReference Line.

Move to the point and record/stake it.Press OCUPY (F1).

The Point Id is automatically chosenaccording to the format explainedpreviously.

Alternatively, you may press SHIFTand then PT ID (F3) to toggle be-tween using the Point ID currentlydefined in the Occupy template andthe suggested Line Id as described insection 7.5.13.


If you simply wish to add aditional textto the suggested point Id, pressEnter. The point Id in the displayremains and the cursor will be in theposition defined in the current Point Idtemplate.

You may also enter a completelydifferent Point Id if required.

Add a code if required. Coding isexplained in Chapter 8.

Use the ADD (F5) key to add aHidden Point and/or PointAnnotations.

When you have the pole level, pressSTOP (F1).

The DIFF (F2) key is available.Pressing this key reveals thedifferences between the design gridpoint and the as staked grid point. Ifyou have chosen to record a LONGlog file these values will also bestored in the log file.

Press STORE (F1) to store the point.

The next target is automaticallyselected according to the incrementvalue. The value given in theDirectory Bar also shows this.

Carry on staking and recording pointsin this way until you reach the end ofthe row.

You can then choose the way in whichyou wish to proceed to the next row:

1. Increase the offset and start thenext row in either direction fromthe last recorded grid point.


2. Increase the offset and start thenext row in either directionadjacent to the first grid point.

To use option 1, highlight the Line andpress ENTER. Press PARAM (F5) toenter the Grid parameters.

Input the new Horizontal Offset (HorzOffset). Give the Increment (StationInc) a negative value. Press CURST(F4) (current station).

The next target point will bedisplayed.

To use option 2, highlight the Line andpress ENTER. Press PARAM (F5) toenter the Grid parameters.

Input the new Horizontal Offset (HorzOffset). Press CONT (F1).

The next target point will bedisplayed.

The REFLN (F3) key is used toautomatically set the start point of thereference line as the target. If this ispressed and the start point hasalready been recorded, the end pointwill be selected.


If a point within the grid is obstructed(E.g. a car is parked over it or it isheavily shaded by trees), there is afunction that allows you to skip thatpoint and carry on to the next one.

Enter the Line definition screen.

Press SHIFT to reveal STAT+ (F3)and STAT- (F4). STAT+ (F3) willincrement to the next point. STAT-(F4) returns to the previous point.

2328. Coding Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

8. CodingThere are two types of CodingSystem available on System 500 -Thematical Coding and Free Coding.

Thematical Codes are point-basedinformation recorded together with theother point information.

Free Codes are time-basedinformation, independent of thepoints. A time stamp is recorded witheach free code, allowing thesubsequent export of points andcodes in chronological order. Thisinformation can then be used in third-party mapping software.

8.1 Thematical Coding

Thematical Coding is point-basedinformation recorded at the point youare occupying. Thematical Codelistsconsist of Layers, Codes andAttributes.

The Layer is the primary block of thecodelist and describes a group ofrelated codes. For example, the LayerVegetation could describe the CodesTree, Grass, Shrub etc.

The Code is the secondary block andusually describes a single object.

A Code may have one or moreAttributes attached to it. Attributesdescribe properties of the Code. Forexample, the Code Tree could havethe Attributes Type, Height, Age,Girth, Spread etc.

Although it is possible to create anew, empty Codelist on the Receiverand then create new Layers, Codesand it is far more practical to createthe complete Codelist in SKI-ProCodelist Manager and upload it to theReceiver.

233 8. CodingTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Codelists can be transferred to thePC Card or Internal Memory using theTransfer function in SKI-Pro.Codelists on the PC Card or InternalMemory must then be transferred tothe Receiver using the Transferfunction.

The Codelist is then selected for usein Configuration.

Coding Type - Choose Thematical.Codelist - Select the codelist fromthe list or, to define a new codelist,press ENTER.

8.1.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining a Thematical Codelist

The Codelists on the Receiver aredisplayed. To create a new, emptyCodelist press NEW (F2).

Enter the Name of the new Codelistand if required the name of theCreator. Press CONT (F1).


8.1.2 Defining New Codes and Attributes

Layers, Codes and Attributes can beadded to a Codelist. When aThematical Codelist has been se-lected, the CODES (F3) and LAYER(F5) keys will be available.

To create new Codes and Attributespress CODES (F3).

The list of existing codes is given.Press NEW (F2) to create a newcode.

Select the Layer on which the codewill exist. To add a new Layer, pressENTER and NEW (F2). Refer to thenext section for details.

Enter the new Code and its CodeName.

To add or edit attributes, press ATRIB(F4).

Enter a meaningful name for theAttribute.

Move to the next field with the cursor.You may enter a default value for theAttribute.

Press NEW (F2) to add another newattribute. Press CONT (F1) to con-tinue.


Layers, Codes and Attributes can beadded to a Codelist. When aThematical Codelist has been se-lected, the CODES (F3) and LAYER(F5) keys will be available.

To create a new Layer or activate/deactivate an existing Layer pressLAYER (F5).

8.1.3 Defining and Activating/Deactivating Layers

Press NEW (F2) to create a newlayer. Input the Layer name and pressCONT (F1).

To activate/deactivate individualLayers, select the Layer and pressUSE (F4) to toggle the Layer on/off.

To deactivate all Layers, press NONE(F5). This key then changes to ALL(F5). Use this to activate all theLayers.


8.1.4 Adding a Thematical Code to a Point

When a Thematical Codelist hasbeen selected for use within a Con-figuration Set, it will be possible toadd a Thematical Code to a pointwhen measuring.


1. Use the left or right cursor keys tocycle through the code list.or2. Press ENTER and select the codefrom the list.or3. Type in the first few characters ofthe code until the desired code isdisplayed.

The Code Name will be displayed forthe Point Code that you have cho-sen. Enter any attributes for the codeusing the ATRIB (F4) key.


When the Point Code list box is openthere are several other operationsthat you may carry out.

CONT (F1) selects the code andreturns to the survey screen.NEW (F2) lets you define a new code.LAST (F3) jumps to the code log anddisplays the codes that were lastassigned in order.

ATRIB (F4) - lets you define attributesfor the selected code and add attributevalues to the choicelist of an attribute.

To add an attribute value to achoicelist, highlight the line of theaccording attribute and press ENTER.

Type in the new attribute value, thenpress ADD (F2).

STORE (F1) records the code andreturns to the Main Survey panel.


Free Coding is time-based information,independent of any recorded points.

Free Coding can be used to generatevirtually any type of code. Exporting ofthe codes through an Output Maskconverts them for use in any type ofthird party surveying software.

Output Masks are defined in SKI-Prousing Format Manager. Some standardOutput masks exist, (E.g. for exportingto GSI format), but you are also free todefine whichever output mask bestsuits the format that you usually workwith.

A Free Code consists of a CodeName, a Description and then up to 20Information Blocks which may containany data you wish to write in them.

The Output Mask defines how this datawill then be translated when it isdownloaded.

8.2 Free Coding

Although it is possible to create anew, empty Codelist on the Receiverand then create new Layers, Codesand Attributes, it is far more practicalto create the complete Codelist inSKI-Pro Codelist Manager and uploadit to the Receiver.

Codelists can be transferred to thePC Card or Internal Memory using theTransfer function in SKI-Pro.Codelists on the PC Card or InternalMemory must then be transferred tothe Receiver using the Transferfunction.

The Codelist is then selected for usein Configuration.

8.2.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining a Free Codelist

Coding Type - Choose Free Coding.

Codelist - Select the codelist fromthe list or, to define a new codelist,press ENTER.

The Codelists on the Receiver aredisplayed. To create a new, emptyCodelist press NEW (F2).

Enter the Name of the new Codelistand if required the name of theCreator. Press CONT (F1).


Codes can be added to a Codelist.When Free Coding has been se-lected, the CODES (F3) key will beavailable.

To create new Codes press CODES(F3).

Press NEW (F2).

Free Code - Input the identifierDescription - Input the description ofthe Indentifier.

Press C-INF (F4) to add informationblocks for the code.

Enter a meaningful name for the infoblock. Then move to the adjacentfield to enter a default value.

8.2.2 Defining New Codes

Use the NEW (F2) key to add moreinformation blocks.


The new code is displayed in the list.An asterisk at the end of the lineindicates that the codes hasinformation blocks defined. Press C-INF (F4) to view and if required addinformation blocks.



When a Free Codelist has beenselected for use within aConfiguration Set, it will be possible torecord a Free Code when measuring.




8.2.3 Adding a Free Code


NEW (F2) lets you add a new code.

LAST (F3) jumps to the code log anddisplays the codes that were lastassigned in order.

C-INF (F4) lets you assign newinformation blocks to the selectedcode.

Press CONT (F1) to select a codefrom the list.

Type in the attribute or add a newattribute with NEW-I (F4).

To add an attribute value to anexisting choicelist of an attribute,highlight the line of the accordingattribute and press ENTER.


Type in the new attribute value, thenpress ADD (F2).

STORE (F1) records the code andreturns to the Main Survey screen.

241 9. The CONFIG KeyTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

9. The CONFIG KeyThe CONFIG key can be used at anytime to make temporary alterations toany parameter in the ConfigurationSet.

There are some configurable para-meters that can only be accessedthrough the CONFIG key and are notcontained in the sequentialConfiguration. Nevertheless, they arepart of the Configuration Set.

The other parameters that areavailable through the SequentialConfiguration are described inChapter 5.

Press CONFIG.

You can configure any parameter forthe current Configuration Set. Youmay make changes to anyconfigurable option contained in items1-4. After making the change, you willpress CONT (F1). You will return towhichever screen you were inpreviously. The changes will betemporary unless, after making thechange, you press the CONFIG keyagain and press STORE (F3).

To choose a different ConfigurationSet, press CONFG (F5).

You may select any Configuration Setin the list and press CONT (F1) oradd a new one using the NEW (F2)key. Press ESC to return to theCONFIGURE screen.

2429. The CONFIG Key Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

9.1 Survey - Satellite

Enables you to define the SatelliteElevation Mask and also automatictracking of healthy satellites.

Elev Mask - The elevation mask orelevation below which satellite datawill not be recorded and below whichsatellites will not be shown to betracked. For RT applications the ElevMask should be set to 10°. For postprocessing only applications, the ElevMask should be set to 15°. These arethe default mask angles used in theSystem Default Configurations.

SV Health - Can be set to Automaticor User. When set to Automatic, thereceiver monitors the incomingsatellite signal and if the signal isflagged as unhealthy, will not recorddata from it or use data from it in areal-time computation.

When set to User, you may definewhich satellites are used and whichnot. The satellites are defined usingthe HELTH (F4) key.

For the vast majority of applicationsthere should be no reason to set SVHealth to User.

Track Mode - The sensor may alsobe configured to operate in one of twoTrack Modes.Max. Accuracy should be chosen fornormal survey applications.MaxTrak is suitable for GIS applica-tions where a lower accuracy may beacceptable but it is desirable to tracksatellites under noisier conditions(trees, built up areas).

Only a code solution is possible ifMaxTrak mode is selected. However,when the Track Mode is set back toMax Accuracy, RTK phase solutionswill again be computed.

Additionally, it is not possible to importphase data into SKI-Pro that hasbeen collected when the MaxTrakmode was selected. Only codesolutions can then be computed inSKI-Pro.

LossOf Lock - When losing allsatellite signals for example due tosatellite shading caused by tallbuildings, trees, etc. a message“Complete loss of lock” appears. Thesensor may be configured to beepwith this loss of lock message or not.


9.2 General - Units

Enables you to configure units for alltypes of measurement data displayedand recorded by the receiver.

Distance - Select from Meters, Int.Feet (International Feet), Int. Feet 1/8in (International Feet to 1/8 inch), USfeet, US feet 1/8 in (US feet to 1/8inch), Kilometres or Int. Miles(International Miles).

Angle - Select from 400gon, 360°decimal, 360° ‘ “, or 6400mil. UseANGLE (F6) to define further optionsfor this unit.

Velocity - Select from km/h (kilome-ters per hour), mph (miles per hour),or knots.

Date - Select the date format fromdd.mm.yy, mm/dd/yy or yy/mm/dd,where dd = day, mm = month and yy= year.

Time - Select the time format from 12hours or 24 hours.

Temp - Select the units used fortemperature from Celcius °C orFahrenheit °F.

Pressure - Select the units used foratmospheric pressure from millibar(mbar), mm merc (mm Hg), inchmerc (inch HG), hectopascal (hPa)or pounds / in² (psi).

Use the ANGLE (F6) key to configurethe direction reference and directionbase for angular measurements.

Dirctn Ref - Defines the directionreference or the direction from whichangles are measured.

Dirctn Base - Defines the DirectionBase as either True or Magnetic.When Magnetic is chosen, input thecurrent deviation of Magnetic Northfrom True North.


9.3 General - Language

Select the Language in which youwish the Terminal Interface to bedisplayed. The language isassociated with the Configuration Set.

The Receiver can hold up to twolanguages.Use the DEL (F4) key todelete any languages that are notrequired.

9.4 General - Hot Keys

You may assign a particular screen toeach of the keys F7 - F10 so thatwhen one of these keys is pressed,that screen is displayed.

Select the key you wish to configureand press ENTER. A list of allavailable screens is displayed. Selectthe screen and press ENTER.

Note that you can also configure thefunction keys F1 - F6 to the hot keysor select ‘NEXT Dialog Call’ to switchbetween all previously openedscreens.


It is important that the local time, dateand initial position are approximatelycorrect in order for the Receiver toquickly locate and track satellites.

Check that the Local Time is ap-proximately correct. This will beupdated every time GPS satellites aretracked. Check also the Time Zonefor your current location and LocalDate.

Then check your local position. If you

9.6 General - Start-Up

Defines the screen that will be dis-played when the Receiver is switchedon and the behaviour after powerfailure.

Panel - Select the screen you wish tobe displayed upon switching theReceiver on.

AutoOn - PowerFail should beselected for system restarts after anabrupt power failure like a short circuitor unplugging batteries by mistake.ExtPowerLow/PowerFail shouldonly be selected when the system ispowered by an external main AC/DCas is the case with reference stationspower supply but not by batteries.

have a local Coordinate Systemdefined, this will be available in gridcoordinates as well as WGS84Geodetic and WGS84 Cartesian. Usethe COORD (F2) key to switchbetween coordinate systems.

The NAV (F6) key enables you toactivate or deactivate the navigatedheight solution. For most applicationsthis will be deactivated as it enables anavigated position calculation withonly 3 satellites.

Certain aerial applications may needto switch this to NO, thereby activat-ing the navigated height solution.

9.5 General - Time and Initial Position


It is recommended for possible slowdrop in voltage or an abrupt powerfailure.

The option ExtPowerLow/PowerFail is not recommend

for systems running with batteries!This option could then effect a deepdischarge on the battery and coulddestroy the battery!

The ExtPowerLow/PowerFail option can only

be set temporary. After manual turnoff and on again, the option is alwaysreset to PowerFail to protect thebatteries from deep discharging.

Start-Up is particularly useful foroperations without the TR500Terminal. Ensure that you start up inSURVEY\ MAIN and not in SURVEY\Begin.For further details on how to configurethe Sensor to automatically start upand occupy a point, refer to Chapter5, Configuring the Receiver.

9.7 General - TR500

Enables you to configure some generalfeatures of the Terminal.

Illu/Contr - Switches the screenillumination on or off and sets thecontrast level. Alternatively, use the keycombination Alt + B for switching thescreen illumination on or off.

Alarm - Switches the alarm on or offand also controls the volume. Thealarm sounds when an important eventoccurs (such as an error messageappearing).

When Illu/Contr or Alarm are selected,you can adjust the Illumination Level orContrast and Sound Level by using the-10% (F4) and +10% (F5) keys.

Keyclick - Switches the Keyclick onor off.

Deflt αααααNUM - defines the set of extracharacters available through theαNUM key or on the F1-F6 functionkeys whenever you type in an entry.


9.8 General - Identification

The Sensor Identification can bedefined. By default the last fournumbers of the serial number areused. Type in any other four characterId if required. The Sensor Id isdisplayed in the automatic pointtemplate, log files etc. and defineswhich instrument was used for certainmeasurements.

Use the DEFLT (F5) key toautomatically redefine the SensorIdentification as the last four figuresof the serial number.

9.9 Interfaces

Gives an overview of all interfacesand the port and device currentlyassigned for that interface.

For example, a sensor is being usedas a real time rover with a Satellineradio attached to port 1 and hiddenpoints are being collected using aDISTO connected to port 2.

For this type of operation, theInterfaces panel would look as shownabove.

A more detailed description on theinterfaces is given in the followingsections.

For further details on the interfacesTilt and Meteo see App. J.

9.10 Interfaces - Real-Time

The Real-Time interface enables youto configure the Real-Timeparameters, the port and the deviceused for Real-Time datacommunication. The port (1,2 or 3)and the device are displayed. If bothreal-time interfaces are configured,both will be displayed in theCONFIGURE\ Interfaces panel asReal-Time 1 and Real-Time 2.

Set the focus on Real-Time and pressEDIT (F3) to modify the Real-Timedevice and parameters.

Certain devices allow you to setadditional parameters e.g. channelswitch. This parameters can beaccessed by pressing CTRL (F5). Forinformation about all supported Real-Time devices refer to Appendix H.

For information about Real-TimeReference parameters refer tosection5.3 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Reference Operations.


For information about Real-TimeRover parameters refer to section 5.4Con-figuring the Receiver for Real-Time Rover Operations.

9.11 Interfaces - NMEA Output

The NMEA Output interface enablesyou to configure which NMEAmessages to output through which portusing which device.

Set the focus on NMEA Output andpress EDIT (F3) to select the NMEAmessages to be output.

Select the port to which the NMEAmessages should be sent. Use theDEVCE (F5) key to configure thedevice itself. Refer to Appendix H for acomplete list of all supported devices.

Use the ID (F4) key to define the talkerID that appears at the beginning ofeach message. This will normallyremain at the default GP for GPS.

Use the MESGS (F3) key to displaythe messages that can be output, therates and the output timing method.

Highlight the message that is to beoutput and press F3 (EDIT) toconfigure how a particular message issent.

Rate - Choose a rate between 0.1and 3600s at which the messageshould be sent.


Use - Choose Yes to output themessage.

Output Time - A message may besent either at an exact epoch orimmediately.At Epoch means that the messagewill be sent at the exact epoch asdefined by the Rate.Immediately means that themessage is sent as soon as it isavailable

Output Delay - If the message is sentAt Epoch, then additionaly themessage may be delayed before it isoutput through the chosen port. Thetime of delay can be a value up to therate at which the message is output.This may be useful if 2 or moresensors are being used to monitor theposition of an object. The position ofeach sensor is being output as aNMEA message back to a mastercontrol station. The control stationmay not be able to cope with all thepositional data messages if all

sensors were sending their positionmessage back at exactly the sametime (as would be the case withImmediately). In this case thesecond and third sensor could delaytheir output so the control stationreceives the message from eachsensor at a slightly different time.

A full description of each NMEAmessage is given in Appendix E.

9.12 Interfaces - ASCII Input

The ASCII Input interface enablesyou to configure port and device, fromwhich you want to receive and storeASCII strings from external devicessuch as depth sounders, barometers,digital cameras, pipe detectors,Geiger counters etc.

The ASCII strings are stored as pointannotations together with the nextpoint measured. Point annotations forauto logged points are only storedwhen Store Pt DB and Use Annot inpanel CONFIGURE\ Position Loggingare set to YES. For detailedinformation see section 5.4.

The port (1, 2 or 3) and the device aredisplayed. Set the focus on ASCIIInput and press EDIT (F3) to modifythe ASCII Input device.


If you want to use an external devicefor ASCII input set Use Device toYES. Select the Port to which thedevice is connected. Use the DEVCE(F5) key to configure the device itself.

End of Msg - Select the delimiter tobe used to identify the end of theincoming ASCII string. This may beeither CR, LF or CR + LF.

Press the ANNOT (F3) key to definewhich of the incoming ASCII stringsshould be stored as a pointannotation and how. You may identifyup to four different message types(Annotation #1 to #4).

Set User defined to YES. Enter adescription to identify the annotation(e.g. depth sounder).

Message Id - This can be used toidentify particular data within theincoming ASCII string. See WorkingExample 2 for an example.

Data prefix - To more easily identifythe annotations registered with a pointit is possible to couple them with theabove given description. Thedescription will then be storedtogether with the ASCII string.

Reply - As a reaction of the sensor toan incoming ASCII string an NMEAmessage may be sent back to theexternal device. In case of a camera,for example, this may allow you tohave the position being integrated intothe photograph afterwards.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\ ASCII Input panel.


Working Example 1

You need to complete a survey on asmall lake and wish to record thedepth of the lake that is measured bya 3rd party depth sounder at certainlocations. This depth sounderconstantly streams data at a rate of1Hz and sends the depth it hasmeasured in the following format:

27.234<CR>27.345<CR>27.232<CR>

…..

The ASCII Input interface needs tobe configured such that when aposition is measured, the depthmeasurement will be stored asannotation 1 with that point. To dothis, in the CONFIGURE\ ASCIIInput panel, press ANNOT (F3) andconfigure Annotation #1 to acceptthe incoming ASCII data as shownbelow.

Note that because the depthsounder is streaming data, the depthmeasurement that is stored with thepoint will be the last measurementreceived by the sensor before thepoint is stored (the point can bestored either by pressing STORE(F1) or using Auto Storefunctionality).

The co-ordinates of points can nowbe measured over the lake andadditionally, the depth of the lake atthat point is also recorded as anannotation.


Working Example 2

You need to complete a survey oncontaminated waste land and using agas analyser, you wish to measurethe level of different gasses atvarious locations. When a button ispressed on the gas analyser, it willmeasure the level of 4 differentgasses and outputs the results as anASCII string. This ASCII string hasthe following format:

$GS1 2.786<CR/LF>$GS2 0.034<CR/LF>$GS3 1.395<CR/LF>$GS4 0.025<CR/LF>

where $GS1 to $GS4 is the MessageID for the 4 different gasses followedby the gas reading itself in ppm.

You wish that when a point is sur-veyed, this ASCII string is split andthat each individual gas reading isrecorded as a separate annotationsuch that annotation 1 would containthe value 2.786, annotation 2 wouldcontain the value 0.034 etc.To achieve this, each annotationshould be configured to accept onlyone particular gas reading. TheMessage ID line is used to “search”the input for that particular gasreading.

When each annotation is configuredfor each particular gas reading theCONFIGURE\ ASCII Input panelshould look as follows.

The waste land site can now besurveyed. The co-ordinates of anypoints can be measured and beforestoring this point, the gas analyser isactivated to take a gas reading atthis point. The point can then bestored and the 4 gas readings arestored as individual annotationsalong with this point.


The Hidden Point interface enablesyou to configure the port and deviceused for Hidden Point measurements.The port (1,2 or 3) and the device aredisplayed. Set the focus on HiddenPoint and press EDIT (F3) to modifythe Hidden Point device.

If you want to use an external deviceset Use Device to YES.

Select the port to which the device isconnected. Use the DEVCE (F5) keyto configure the device itself. Forinformation about all supportedHidden Point devices refer toAppendix H.

If no device is connected the HiddenPoint measurement may also beentered manually. The parameters forHidden Point measurements can beconfigured in CONFIGURE\ Survey,Point..., Hidden Point. Refer toChapter 5 for further details.

9.13 Interfaces - Hidden Point

The GSI/User Out interface enablesyou to export a job with a format filethrough a port on the sensor to a totalstation or any other device.The port (1, 2 or 3) and the device aredisplayed. Set the focus on GSI/ UserOut and press EDIT (F3) to modify theGSI/ User Out port and device.

If you want to use a GSI/User Outdevice set Use Device to YES.Select the port to which the device isconnected. Use the DEVCE (F5) key toconfigure the device itself.

Leica TPS300/700, Geodimeter andZeiss REC500 total stations as well asthe SOKKIA SDR33 datalogger arecurrently supported.

When Leica TPS300/700 is selectedand connected to the GPS receiver,select the Job Number to which jobthe data should be sent. The JobName of existing jobs in the TPSinstrument is displayed. For a new job,type in a name.

9.14 Interfaces - GSI/User Out

If data is being transferred to aGeodimeter total station, then thetotal station must be in a mode readyto receive data.

SOKKIA devices can only handlenumeric point IDs. If Renumber is setto YES, all points are transfered butrenumbered starting from 1. If NO isselected, only points with numericpoint IDs are transfered and point IDsare shortened to 4 digits, truncatingfrom the right.


The Remote interface enables you toconfigure the Remote control modeand the device connected to thesensor. In most of the cases thesensor will be controlled via theTR500 connected to the Terminalport. Alternatively a remote computercan be used to steer the sensor.

If the Remote mode is set to Terminaland a command is sent to the sensorvia any serial port the sensor auto-matically turns on and switches toremote mode.

If the sensor is to be remotely con-trolled, highlight the Remote interfaceand select the Port. Press DEVCE(F5) to select the appropraite devicefrom the list. Normally this will beRS232.

For more information about devicesrefer to Appendix H.

9.15 Interfaces - Remote

For more information on exportingASCII files using a Format filetemplate refer to chapter 13.7Transfer GSI/ User.

Sensor Transfer with SKI-Pro

Using the Remote interface it ispossible to download data directlyfrom the memory device of the sensorinto SKI-Pro through the serial port ofthe PC without having to remove theTR500 from the Terminal port.

Configure the Remote interface to theappropriate port and device asdescribed above. This would nor-mally be Port 2 and RS232 deviceusing the standard System 500download cable.

Connect the sensor to the PC. Datacan now be downloaded to the PCusing the Sensor Transfer componentin SKI-Pro in the normal manner.


The PPS Out interface enables youto configure the PPS (Pulse PerSecond) output port and parameters.This function is available only if thenecessary hardware exists.

Select PPS Out and press EDIT (F3).

Set PPS Out to Yes.

Set the PPS Rate at which the pulseshall be output. Select between 0.1 -20 seconds.

If an external device is connected tothe sensor an OWI or LB2 messagecan be transmitted at the time thePPS is output. Change Notify msg toASCII (OWI) or Binary (LB2) andpress NPORT (F5) to select the portand device through which the mes-sage shall be transmitted.

9.16 Interfaces - PPS Out

The ASCII message takes the following format:

$PLEIR,HPT,sssssssss,nnnn*hh<CR><LF>

Format Content$PLEIR, HeaderHPT, Message identifier (High Precision Time)sssssssss, GPS time of week of next PPS pulse (in msec)nnnn GPS week number*hh Check sum<CR> Carriage return<LF> Line feed

The message will be sent at least 0.5 seconds prior to the next pulse. Forthis reason messages are only sent when the PPS rate is greater than 1sec.


9.17 Interfaces - Event Input

The Event Input interface enablesyou to configure the Event Input portsand parameters. This function isavailable only if the necessaryhardware exists.

The Event Input port allows directconnection to an external device (e.g.aerial camera). When this deviceoperates (e.g. the shutter opens), thetime that the event occurred will berecorded in the GPSmeasurements. These records canlater be superimposed on the pro-cessed kinematic data and thepositions where the events took placecan be interpolated in SKI-Pro.

In adition to the time stamps, the usercan also log positions, velocity andquality. Events logged during real timeoperations can also be exported to anASCII file using an appropriateFormat File and the Sensor Transferfunctionality. Refer to Chapter 13 forfurther details.

The Limit Error is the time limitwithin which PPS shall be generated.If the time accuracy exceed this valueno PPS output is generated. ChangeLimit Error to YES and enter a valuein nanoseconds.

The following technical details providepulse characteristics and cableconnectivity.

The time pulse has a 3.3V peak(= High) on a 50 ohm resistance. Thepulse length is 25 usec with theleading edge coinciding with thebeginning of each epoch.

The cable should be matched with anappropriate resistance of 50 ohm.The connector Type is: Huber &Suhner FFA.0S.CTAC32Z.

Select Event Input and press EDIT(F3).

Select Port 1 or 2 or if you want touse both at the same time 1 & 2.

Select the Polarity according to theexternal device you are using. Thepolarity selected effects both ports inthe same way.


Extern Bias - Enables you to define acalibration value according to theexternal event device and cable used.

Time Guard - If two or more eventstake place during the time (inseconds) defined, only the first eventwill be recorded. Enter 0 to accept allevents. The shortest recording time is1 second, however all events will becounted.

If an external device is connected tothe sensor an OWI or LB2 messagecan be transmitted at the time theevent takes place.

To enable messages, change NotifyMsg to ASCII (OWI) or Binary (LB2)and press NPORT (F5) to select theport and device through which themessage shall be transmitted.

If both event input ports are usedselect the Event Port number and setthe parameters for each.

Info to Log - Select the informationthat shall be logged with the Eventrecord.

Bias Intern - Set to User, for settingyour own calibaration value for aparticular sensor. Factory usesdefault settings.Intern Bias - When Bias Intern is setto User, set a calibration value herefor a particular sensor.

Press PARAM (F5) to modifyadditional parameters.

Scroll down and enter a Description.This description will be recorded withthe event record. This is particularlyuseful if two event input ports areused at the same time in order todifferentiate between the two eventrecords.

The technical specification for theEvent Input port are as follows:

Pulse type: TTL, positive or negativegoing pulsePulse Length: Minimum 125 nsecsVoltage: TTL level (~5V, min. 3.3V)Pin definition: Center = signal,case = groundSR530 Connector type:Huber & Suhner Lemo Typ llFFA.00.250.CTAC327


The ASCII message takes the following format:

$PLEIR,EIX,ssssssss,tttttttt,nnnn,cccc,dddd*hh<CR><LF>

Format Content$PLEIR, HeaderEIX, Message identifier = event input “1” or “2”sssssssss, GPS time of week of event (in msec)tttttttt, GPS time of week of event (sub msec in nsec)nnnn GPS week numbercccc Event countdddd Event pulse count1

*hh Check sum<CR> Carriage return<LF> Line feed

1This is the count of all pulses including those violating the specified timeguard boundary conditions. This allows determination of missed events.

259 10. StatusTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

10. StatusThe Status of all Receiver functionscan be accessed through theSTATUS key at any time.

Status is divided into 4 main submenus.

1 Survey - Status of survey relatedfunctions.2 Logs - Logfiles of what has beenrecorded.3 General - Status of hardware andfirmware.4 Interfaces - Status of theinterfaces, ports and externaldevices.

10.1 Real-Time Input Status

Real-Time Status is available when aReal-Time reference or Real-Timerover is being used. The informationavailable differs with the operationmode.

The panels below describe whatwould be seen when an RTKreference or rover is being used withLeica data format. Different datawould be seen if RTCM correctionswere being used or code only datawas being transmitted and received.

1. Real-Time Rover

Data Format - The data format beingreceived.Sats L1/L2 - The number of satelliteson L1/L2 being used in thecomputation.Last recvd - The amount of timesince the last message was receivedfrom the reference station.% recvd - The Receiver comparesthe amount of data received throughthe GPS Antenna with the amountreceived from the reference stationand displays this as a percentage.

26010. Status Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Press DATA (F3) for informationabout the data being received fromthe satellites.

Sat - The number of the chosensatellitePhase L1 - The number of phasecycles from the Antenna to thesatellite on L1.Phase L2 - The number of phasecycles from the Antenna to thesatellite on L2.Code L1 - The pseudorange to thesatellite from L1 data.Code L2 - The pseudorange to thesatellite from L2 data.

Press AMBIG (F4) for informationabout the ambiguity resolution pro-cess.

Each Satellite used in the real-timecomputation is displayed with theambiguity status on each frequency.YES indicates a fixed ambiguity, NOthat the ambiguity is not yet fixed.

Press REF (F6) for information aboutthe Reference Station.

The Point Id and Antenna Height(Ant Height) of the reference pointare displayed.

Then either Marker or Antenna isdisplayed, indicating from where thecoordinate is given.

Press COORD (F2) to view thecoordinates in WGS84 Geodetic andCartesian formats and local gridcoordinates if a Coordinate System isbeing used.


2. Real-Time Reference

Data Format - The data format beingsent.Sats L1/L2 - The number of satelliteson L1/L2 being used in thecomputation.Last sent - The amount of time sincethe last message was sent.

The DATA (F3) and REF (F6) keysare available. The informationdisplayed there is exactly the sameas with a Real-Time Rover.

The Stop & Go Indicator gives infor-mation regarding the amount of timespent on a point and the amount oftime required at a point.

The information displayed differs,depending on whether you are instatic or moving mode.

10.2 Stop and Go Indicator

Static Mode

Completed - A percentage valueindicating how much data is requiredfor successful processing (100%) andhow much has been collected. Thecriteria used to display this valuedepend on what has been set in theConfiguration Set. See explanationbelow.

Time to Go - If set, a timer showinghow much time is left before you cancease observations for this point.

Time at Pt - The amount of timespent recording at the point.


Cycle Slips - The number of cycleslips that have occurred on L1/L2since recording commenced on thecurrent point.

GDOP - The current calculated valuefor PDOP or GDOP.

Obs Rec Rate - The ObservationRecording Rate currently set.

Static Obs - The number of StaticObservations (epochs) recorded atthis point.

Completed Criteria - If no specialsettings have been made in theConfiguration Set, the percentage is aconservative estimate based on a 10-15km baseline. This is also thedefault setting for Real-TimeReference Stations.

In a Post-Processed Survey, whereAuto Stop and/or STOP P-PRC havebeen set, the value may be displayedaccording to:Time - A minimum time is specified.Observations - A certain number ofobservations have been specified.Stop and Go Indicator - A baselinelength is selected and a percentagecalculated using the baseline length,number of satellites and GDOP.No. Sats - A length of time isspecified that varies with the numberof satellites available.

In a Real-Time Rover Survey, whereAuto Stop and/or STOP R-TME havebeen set, the value may be displayedaccording to:Accuracy - when the specifiedaccuracy is reached, measurementwill stop. This is impossible to predictin percentage terms and so thedefault Stop and Go indicator (10-15km) is displayed.

Positions - The number of real timepositions required on each point arespecified.

Stop and Go Indicator - A baselinelength is selected and a percentagecalculated using the baseline length,number of satellites and GDOP.No. Sats - A length of time isspecified that varies with the numberof satellites available.


Moving Mode

5 Sats since - The length of time that5 satellites have been observed for. InKinematic on the Fly operations, it isimportant to observe 5 satellites forabout three minutes or so withoutinterruption at the beginning of thechain.

GDOP - The current calculated valuefor PDOP or GDOP.

Obs Rec Rate - The ObservationRecording Rate currently set.

Moving Obs - The number of MovingObservations (epochs) recorded inthis interval.

Local Time - The local time isdisplayed followed by the time latencyto UTC in brackets.

The position is then given. Use theCOORD (F2) key to switch betweenWGS84 geodetic/Cartesian and localcoordinates. Note that localcoordinates are only available if alocal coordinate set has been defined.

Accuracy indicators for the currentposition in horizontal and verticalcomponents are given.

Press VELCY (F4) to view velocityinformation. Your velocity in thehorizontal and vertical directions isgiven together with the bearing for thehorizontal direction.

Press TARGT (F6) to define andnavigate to a target. All functions areavailable as in Real Time PointStakeout except for the fact thatpositions cannot be recorded.

When working in advanced rovermode, you may use the BLINE (F3)key to see information about thebaseline. Baseline information,however, can only be displayed if thereference coordinate is sent as part ofthe data format used for broad-casting.

10.3 Position


According to the update rate, theindividual values are updatedautomatically. Note that the highestupdate rate in this panel is 1 secondeven though the general update ratemight be set to a value < 1 second.

To define the method, highlight theMethod field and press ENTER.

Known Point - The origin point of thegrade is a selected known point.Last Point - The origin point of thegrade is the last measured point.Distance - The origin point of thegrade is not a fixed point as it is thecase with the Known Point or LastPoint method. It is updated with thecurrent rover position after the roverhas been moved over a certaindistance. The application starts whena distance has been entered. Therover position at that time is taken asthe first origin from where the grade iscalculated.Time - The origin point of the grade isnot a fixed point as it is the case withthe Known Point or Last Pointmethod. It is updated with the currentrover position after a certain timeinterval. The application starts when atime has been entered. The roverposition at that time is taken as thefirst origin from where the grade iscalculated.

Origin Id - Available for the methodsKnown Point and Last Point. This isfrom where the grade is calculated.With Known Point, select from the listof known points in the current job.With Last Point, the point ID of thelast measured point is automaticallydisplayed.

Distance - Available for the methodDistance. Set a distance in metersafter which the position of origin isupdated.

Time - Available for the method Time.Set a time intervall in seconds afterwhich the position of origin isupdated.

In the rover advanced mode, you mayalso use the GRADE (F5) key. In thesubsequent panel STATUS\ Grade,information about the grade betweenan origin point and the current roverposition is displayed based on fourdifferent methods.


Grade <1:> - Grade between the firstpoint and the current rover position.

grade = 1 : slope = ∆V : ∆H

positive for cut slopesnegative for fill slopes

Hgt Diff - Orthometric height differ-ence between the origin point and thecurrent rover position. If theorthometric heights are unavailabel,the height difference refers to thelocal ellipsoid. Should this not beavailable either, the WGS84 ellipsoi-dal is used instead.

Horz Dist - Horizontal grid distancebetween the origin point and thecurrent rover position. If local gridcoordinates are unavailable,thehorizontal distance refers to thelocal ellipsoid. Should this not beavailable wither, the WGS84 ellipsoidis used instead.

Slope Dist - Slope distance betweenthe origin point and the current roverposition in local grid. If local grid isunavailable, local ellipsoidal coordi-nates are used instead. Should thosenot be available either, the WGS84ellipsoidal coordinates are used.

∆Hfill slope

∆V −−−−− ∆V : ∆H+++++ ∆V : ∆H

∆Hcut slope

∆V

Grade <%> - Grade between the firstpoint and the current rover position inpercent.

Bearing - Bearing between the originpoint and the current rover position.Displayed if the method is KnownPoint or Last Point.


Information about the raw GPS datalogging is given.

Logging - Indicates whether rawGPS data logging is active or not.

StaticObs/Moving Obs - The num-ber of Static or Moving observations(epochs) recorded in this interval.Static or Moving Obs are displayeddepending on the current measuringmode.

All Static Obs - The total number ofstatic observations (epochs) recordedin the current Job.

All Moving Obs - The total numberof moving observations (epochs)recorded in the current Job.

# DB Pts - Total number of pointscontained in the Job’s database, i.e.manually recorded points as well asAuto-Points.

# AUTO Pts - The number of pointsthat have been recorded automati-cally in the current track, i.e. thecurrent START-STOP sequence.

Use the FILES (F4) key to viewinformation about the logged datafiles.

Current Job - The name of thecurrently selected Job.

# / Size Pts - The number of andmemory occupied by the points in thecurrent Job.

Size Obs - The memory occupied bythe raw GPS data in the current Job.

Total Size - The memory occupied bythe current Job.

Other Jobs - The memory occupiedby all other jobs on the currentmemory device.

Memory Free - The amount of freememory on the current memorydevice.

The REF (F6) key is available whenthe Receiver is configured as a real-time rover.

Pressing this key gives informationabout the logging status on theReference station.

10.4 Logging Status


Information about the satellites isgiven.

Sat - The PRN number of eachobserved satellite is given.

Elev - The elevation of the satelliteabove the horizon is given togetherwith the direction in which it is moving(rising or setting).

Azi - The azimuth of the satellite isgiven.

SN1 & SN2 - The signal to noise ratioon L1 (SN1) and L2 (SN2) is given.

QI1 & QI2 - The quality indicator ofthe phase measurement reconstruc-tion is given for L1 (QI1) and L2 (QI2).

TRACK (F2)

Allows toggling between elevation/azimuth and tracking/searchinginformation.

Sat - The PRN number of eachobserved satellite is given.

L1 & L2 - The tracking status of eachsatellite. TR = Tracking, SH = search-ing.

SN1 & SN2 - The signal to noise ratioon L1 (SN1) and L2 (SN2) is given.

QI1 & QI2 - The quality indicator ofthe phase measurement reconstruc-tion is given for L1 (QI1) and L2 (QI2).

10.5 Satellite Status


HELTH (F4)

Press cursor down key.

The PRN numbers of Bad (unhealthy)satellites, OK (healthy) satellites andsatellites for which no data is avail-able are listed.

SKY (F5)

Displays a sky plot showing positionsof the satellites and related informa-tion of the highest 6 satellites.

On the graphic, north/south corre-sponds the central vertical line. Therings show the elevations of 15, 30and 60° from the outside to theinside. The satellites are shown intheir relative positions.

ELE00 (F2) - Sets the elevation maskto 0 for this panel only in order thatyou may view the satellites below thecutoff mask. This key then changesto ELExx which enables you to set

the elevation mask back to its originalvalue.

SYMB (F3) - Toggles the display ofthe satellites in the graphic to satellitesymbols.

INFO (F5) - Toggles the displayedsatellite information between trackinginformation, Signal to Noise Ratio andQuality Indicator Information.


A log of all points in the currentlyselected job is displayed in order oftime.

Further information is available bypressing the INFO (F5) key.

The column Crd Source appears anddisplays the source of the coordinatesfor each point.

Calculated - calculated from othersets of coordinates. E.g. via COGOroutines or averaged.GPS Navigtd - GPS navigatedposition.PPRC Code - Post processed GPScode only.

10.6 Point Log Status

PPRC flt ph - Post processed GPSphase float position (ambiguities notresolved).PPRC fix ph - Post processed GPSphase. Ambiguities fixed.RTME Code - Real Time GPSposition code only.RTME fix ph - Real-Time GPS phaseposition. Ambiguities fixed.GPS RTCM - Real Time GPSposition from RTCM code corrections.Unknown - Unknown source.User enterd - coordinate entered byuser.

Pressing INFO (F5) again reveals theCQ (coordinate quality) in and thecoordinate class. The coordinateclass may be either:

MEAS - Point measured onceAVRG - Point measured more thanonce and coordinates averaged.CTRL - Point user entered or heldfixed with no accuracy matrix.

REF (F6)

This key is available when the Re-ceiver is configured as a real-timerover.

Pressing this key gives informationabout the satellites being tracked atthe Reference station.


The last 5 codes that have been usedfrom the current codelist aredisplayed. Should you select adifferent codelist for use, this log willbe cleared.

Pressing INFO (F5) reveals the timeat which the code was recorded.

The last 100 messages displayed onthe terminal are listed in order of time(most recent first). This log can onlybe deleted by pressing DEL-A (F4).

Pressing INFO (F5) reveals the timeand date that the message appeared.

10.9 Memory/Battery Status

Press cursor down.

PC-Card - Amount of memoryremaining on the PC-card.Memory Int - Amount of memoryremaining on the internal memory.

Battery A - amount of charge remain-ing in internal battery A.

Battery B - Amount of charge re-maining in internal battery B.

10.8 Message Log Status10.7 Code Log Status


Battery Ext - Amount of chargeremaining in the external battery.

Bat PC-Card - Battery status of theSRAM PC Card battery. The threestatus levels are OK, Low and Error.Note that you should change the PC-Card Battery when it becomes Low.Failure to do so may result in loss ofdata. Ensure that any data on thecard is backed up before changingthe battery. PC Flash Cards do notuse a battery.

Bat Backup - Receiver systembackup battery. When this batterybecomes low, contact your Leicarepresentative to arrangereplacement.

In case of a Real-Time Rover youmay press REF (F6) to display theMemory and Battery Status of theReference Station.

10.10 Sensor Status 10.11 Software Version Status

serial number are displayed.

Control Mode- Displays the devicethat is used to control the sensor.Normally this the TR500.

Additionally it indicates whether thePPS output and the Event Inputports are available.

The Receiver model used and its

Displays the Firmware version, theBoot software of the sensor,Measurment Engine software,Measurement Engine Boot softwareand the Firmware for the Keyboard /Display (TR500) currently installed.

MORE (F6) provides information onspecial software settings.


10.12 Interfaces Status

Gives an overview of all interfacesand the port and device currentlyassigned for that interface.

For example, a sensor is being usedas a real time rover with a Satellineradio attached to port 1 and hiddenpoints are being collected using aDISTO connected to port 2.

The NMEA output and the ASCIIInput are not currently configured.

For this type of operation, theInterfaces panel would look as shownabove.

To get detailed information on thestatus of single interfaces press theIFACE (F3) button. Specific statusinformation is available for thefollowing interfaces.

Real-Time - Pressing IFACE (F3)allows you to view the Real-TimeInput status. For details see chapter10.1.

ASCII Input - Pressing IFACE (F3)allows you to view the ASCII Inputstatus.

For each annotation you may eitherview the given description or the lastreceived ASCII string specified by theMessage Id. Toggle between bothviews by pressing DATA/DESCR (F3).

Event Input - Pressing IFACE (F3)allows you to view the Time, EventCount and Event Pulse Count for theselected port(s).

For further details about Statusinformation for the different devicesplease refer to Appendix H.

273 11. ApplicationsTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

11. ApplicationsApplications contains a number ofmiscellaneous functions that are notnecessarily related.

From within this menu item you maydetermine coordinate systems, carryout point management functions,access an on-board calculator, definewake-up sessions and access any ofthe standard and/or optionalapplication programs (assuming thesecurity code has been entered).

For further description of the optionalApplication programs please refer tothe appropriate manuals.

11.1 Determining a Coordinate System

GPS gives coordinates relative to aglobal datum known as WGS84. Thiscoordinate datum is howeverrelatively new in terms of the length oftime that people have been givingspecific points coordinates. TheWGS84 datum is therefore not usedas the datum for coordinates in thevast majority of countries around theworld.

As surveying developed through thecenturies, individual countriesadopted datums that best suited theirindividual requirements.

Therefore when surveying with GPS,coordinates are first obtained relativeto the WGS84 datum. Thesecoordinates then have to betransformed into the local coordinatesystem.

There are several methods by whichthis can be done. One is the Helmert

approach where the coordinates aretransformed from the WGS84 Datumto the local ellipsoidal datum and thena map projection is applied to obtaingrid coordinates. Other methodsinvolve transforming the coordinatesdirectly from WGS84 into a local grid.

System 500 receivers contain threedifferent methods: the Helmertmethod, the 1-Step method and the2-Step method. The method useddepends on the results required andthe quality and extent of knownpoints.

Which method to use?This question largely depends onlocal conditions and information.If you wish to keep the GPSmeasurements totally homogenousand the information about the localmap projection is available, theClassical 3D approach would be themost suitable.

27411. Applications Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

For cases where there is noinformation regarding the ellipsoidand/or map projection and/or you wishto force the GPS measurements to tiein with local existing control then theOne Step approach may be the mostsuitable.

The 2-Step approach takes the localellipsoid and map projection intoaccount and can therefore be used forlarger areas than 1-Step trans-formations. Compared to theClassical 3D approach it treatsposition and height informationseparately, which allows for positiononly control points to be used as well.

In order to determine a CoordinateSystem, you will require thecoordinates of points in both theWGS84 and local coordinate system.Depending on the type oftransformation you wish to use, youmay also need details of the mapprojection, local ellipsoid and a localgeoidal model program.

1. 3D Helmert Transformation:Ellipsoid and Projection must beknown, Geoid information is optional.

2. 1-Step Transformation: Geoidinformation is optional, no otherinformation is required.

3. 2-Step Transformation: Ellipsoid,Projection and a Pre-transformationmust be known, Geoid information isoptional.

From the Application Menu, selectDetermine Coord System and pressCONT (F1).

Coord Sys - Type in a new name forthe new coordinate system.

WGS84 Pts - Select the Job fromwhich the points with WGS84coordinates will be taken.

Local Pts - Select the Job or ASCIIfile from which the points with localcoordinates will be taken.

Use LOCAL (F4) to define the sourceof the local coordinates (from Job orASCII).


When ASCII is selected, the ASCII(F4) key is available. Use this key todefine the format of the ASCII file.

When you have selected the sourcefor the local points Press CONT (F1)until you return to the COORDSYS\Determination Begin screen.

Use the CSYS (F6) key to view thelist of current Coordinate Systems.

Use NEW (F2) to define a newcoordinate system. Note thedifference between define anddetermine. Here you can define aCoordinate System using an existingtransformation. When you determinea Coordinate System you alsodetermine a new transformation usingpoint data.

If you have known parameters for theCoordinate System, you may enterthem directly inCONFIG\Survey\Position.

Use EDIT (F3) to edit the selectedCoordinate System.

Use DEL (F4) to delete the selectedCoordinate System.

Use INFO (F5) to display the datewhen each coordinate system wascreated.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCOORDSYS\ Determination Beginscreen.

Press CONT (F1) to proceed with theCoordinate System Determination.

Coord Sys - The name of theCoordinate System is displayed.

Transform - Define the name of theTransformation. By default the samename as the Coordinate System willbe suggested. Type in a new one ifrequired.

Trans Type - Select the type oftransformation to be determined.Classical is the 3D Helmert typetransformation, One Step is atransformation type where noinformation about local ellipsoid ormap projection is required.


2-Step is a transformation type whereinformation about the local ellipsoid,map projection and a pre-trans-formation is required.

Pre-Transf - Available only if a 2-Steptransformation type is selected. It is apreliminary 3D transformation whichis used together with the selectedprojection to obtain preliminary gridcoordinates to be used for a final 2Dtransformation. Select a pre-trans-formation from the list or open the listand enter a new transformation bypressing NEW (F2).

Ellipsoid - Available if a classical or a2-Step transformation and a standardprojection type is defined. Select theellipsoid on which your local coordi-nates are based. Open the list andpress DEFLT (F5) to reveal all of theavailable ellipsoids. If your ellipsoid isnot listed, you may add it to the list bypressing NEW (F2) and entering theparameters.

Press CONT (F1) to return toCOORDSYS\Type Selection.

Projection - Available if a Classicalor a 2-Step Transformation Type isselected. Select the Map Projectionfrom the list or open the list and inputthe parameters for your local mapprojection, (see box over). Whenused for the first time, this list willcontain only non-standard mapprojections.

Non - standard map projectionsavailable include:Czech and SlovakDanish BornholmDanish JyllandDanish SjellandDutch RD StereographicFinnish KKJHungarianMalaysianNew ZealandRomania Stereo 70SwissSwiss 95

Geoid Model - If a Geoid Model is tobe applied, press ENTER and selectit from this list.

Geoid Model Field Files can beexported from SKI-Pro onto the PC-card or internal memory in theData\GPS\Geoid sub-directory. Theycan either be transfered to the Sys-tem RAM or be read directly from thePC- card.

Use PCARD (F2) to update the listwith Geoid Model Field Files existingon the PC-card.

To edit the name of the Geoid Modelpress EDIT (F3).


Use INFO (F5) to see where thegeoid model is stored, which ellipsoidthe model is based on and the dateand time of creation.

Use SHIFT + PARAM (F5) to view theparameters defining the Geoid ModelField File.


For detailed information on GeoidModels, please refer to the SKI-ProOnline Help.

Use INFO (F5) to see where theCSCS model is stored and the dateand time of creation.

Use SHIFT + PARAM (F5) to view theparameters defining the CSCS ModelField File.


For detailed information on CSCSModels, please refer to the SKI-ProOnline Help.

Press CONT (F1) to proceed.

CSCS Model Field Files can beexported from SKI-Pro onto the PC-card or internal memory in theData\GPS\CSCS sub-directory.Theycan either be transfered to theSystem RAM or be read directly fromthe PC- card.

Use PCARD (F2) to update the listwith CSCS Model Field Files existingon the PC-card.

CSCS Model - If a CSCS Model is tobe applied, press ENTER and selectit from this list.


Defining a map projection

Most map projections conform to astandard type and will need to bedefined before being used for thefirst time.

From the COORDSYS\ TypeSelection screen, open theProjection list.

Press DEFLT (F5) to reveal all of theavailable default projections and USState Plane Zones.

Select NEW (F2) to enter a newprojection set.

Enter the name of your projectionand select the type of projection.Although the majority of projectionsare Transverse Mercator, UTM orLambert, a variety are available.

Input the parameters of yourprojection, not forgetting to scrolldown the complete list and enter allparameters.

Press CONT (F1) to continue.The next step in the process is tomatch the common points.

Points from the two systems with thesame point Id will be suggested formatching by default.

If you do not wish to match twopoints, highlight the point pairconcerned and press MATCH (F5).This key is also used whendetermining a 1-Step or a 2-Steptransformation and you wish to matchthe points in height or position only.

To match a new coordinate pair,press NEW (F2) and select theWGS84 and local point to bematched.


New WGS84 points may be mea-sured from here using NEWOC (F5).Press CONT (F1) to return to thispanel.

To edit an existing coordinate pair,select the pair and press EDIT (F3).Make any necessary adjustments andpress CONT (F1) to return to thispanel.

Use DEL (F4) to unmatch the se-lected coordinate pair.

When a Classical type transformationis being selected, the PARAM (F5)key is available after pressing SHIFT.

This enables you to define the type oftransformation model and theparameters for the transformation.

Trans-model - Select the type oftransformation model you wish touse. In practice, you will only seeminimal differences in thetransformed coordinates betweeneach model. In principle Molodensky- Badekas is more numerically stabledue to the fact that it takes its rotationorigin from the center of gravity of theWGS84 coordinates. Bursa - Wolftakes its centre of gravity from theorigin of the WGS84 datum.

You may then (if required) either enterknown values for certain parametersand hold them fixed at those valuesor set the values to 0. Parametersthat have the ----- displayed will becalculated.

To hold a parameter fixed, highlight it.The FIX (F4) key will becomeavailable. Type in the fixed value. Inorder that the parameter is simply notcalculated, enter 0.

To reset a fixed parameter, in orderthat it will be calculated, select theparameter and press ADJST (F4).

Press CONT (F1) to return to theprevious screen.

Press CONT (F1) to execute thetransformation calculation.


The residuals of the transformationare displayed. This is the differencebetween the transformed WGS84coordinates and the originalcoordinates in the local system.

Values that are marked with a starindicate where the highest residualslie.

Use INFO (F5) to view the heightresiduals.

Use RESLT (F3) to view thetransformation calculation result (thecalculated transformationparameters). The information givenwill differ with the type oftransformation performed.

Classical Transformation Results

The Name and Trans formationModel (Trans model) used aredisplayed.

Then the calculated translationparameters are displayed.

Shift dX, dY, dZ - Shift along X, Yand Z axes.

Rotation X, Y, Z - Rotations aboutX, Y and Z axes.Scale - Scale factor between thetwo datums.

1-STEP/ 2-STEP TransformationResults

The transformation is split into a 2DHelmert transformation for positionand a Height Interpolation.

For a 1-Step transformation thecenter of gravity of the points on theWGS84 Datum is calculated. Atemporary central meridian is thenconstructed through this center ofgravity and a Transverse Mercatorprojection applied.

continued...


For a 2-Step transformation first thepre-transformation is applied toobtain auxiliary cartesian coordi-nates. Then the specified mapprojection is applied on the givenellipsoid.For both methods this results in atemporary auxiliary grid. A 2DHelmert transformation is thenperformed between the auxiliary gridand the given local system.

The position transformation resultsare given first.

Shift dX, dY - Shift along the X andY axes.Rotation - Rotation about the Z axis.Scale - Scale factor between the twodatums.

Then the Height transformationinformation is given.

Slope dH/dX / dH/dY - Slope of theheight interpolation plane whenlooking along the X or Y axis.

Shift H0 - Height of the interpolationplane at the point it intersects the Zaxis.Origin X0, Y0 - Coordinates of thecenter of gravity of points in theauxiliary local grid.

Use the RMS (F5) key to displaycalculated accuracies for each of thetransformation parameters.

Use the SCALE/ ppm (F4) key toswitch between ppm and scale factorvalues.

Use the EDIT (F3) key if you wish toedit the previously calculated 1-Stepor 2-Step parameters.

Shift dX, dY, Rotation, Scale Factr -The position transformation resultscan be edited if required. This may benecessary in some circumstanceswhere you have computed a OneStep transformation, but still wish touse a specific scale or rotation forexample.

Elev Factor - Displays the elevationfactor calculated from the ellipsoidalheight(s) of the common point(s).

Apply Elev - If set to YES the CombFactor will be calculated as ScaleFactor x Elev Factor. If set to NO theComb Factor will be equal to theScale Factor of the original calcula-tion.

In COORDSYS\ Edit Parameterspress ABORT (F5) to go back withoutany changes or press CONT (F1) toaccept the Comb Factor and theother 1-Step/ 2-Step parameters youhave changed.


In COORDSYS\ Parameters pressCONT (F1) to proceed.

An overview of the CoordinateSystem is given.

Coord Sys - The Coordinate Systemname.

Trans Type - The type oftransformation used.

Residuals - The method by whichresiduals will be distributedthroughout the transformation area isdisplayed.This may help the transformationresult be more realistic and helpdisperse any strains in the

transformation. 1/Dist, 1/Dist2 and 1/Dist3/2 distributes the residuals of thecontrol points according to thedistance between each control pointand the newly transformed point.Multiquadratic distributes theresiduals using a multiquadraticinterpolation approach.The method of distribution is storedwith the new coordinate system.

#Match Pts - The number ofmatched points used in thetransformation calculation.

Max Res E, N, H - The largestresidual in East, North and Height.

Press CONT (F1) to save theCoordinate System and return to theApplication menu.


Select the Coordinate System thatyou wish to include new points in.Press CONT (F1).

Now you have two choices. You mayeither automatically match the newpoints and calculate the newparameters by pressing AUTO (F5).Alternatively, you may proceedmanually through the CoordinateDetermination as described in the lastsection.

Points may be added to existingCoordinate Systems. This is useful ifyou have to measure outside of anexisting transformation area andtherefore need to extend the area bymeasuring the WGS84 coordinatesof a point known in the local systemthat lies outside of the existingtransformation area.

Measure the new point(s) in the samejob as the other existing points usedto determine the Coordinate System.

From Applications select DetermineCoordinate System.

Press CSYS (F6) to list theCoordinate Systems available.

11.2 Adding Points to Existing Coordinate Systems

When adding new points manually,the points matched in the previousparameter calculation are recalledand used again, even if they did nothave matching point Ids. The newpoint(s) have to be selected by youusing the NEW (F2) key.

When AUTO (F5) is pressed, thecoordinates that were matched in theprevious parameter calculation arerecalled and used again, even if theydid not have matching point Ids. Thenew point(s) that have identical pointIds will be matched and included inthe computation. You are thenpresented with the results. PressCONT (F1) to accept them or, if thereis a problem, press ESC to return tothe Determination Begin screen andrecompute manually.


Enables you to manage the pointscontained in the currently selectedJob. You may also set a point filteraccording to varying criteria.

Select Point Management and pressCONT (F1).

11.3 Point Management

Each point is displayed with the timeand date on which it was recorded.Note that automatically recordedpoints will only be displayed if StorePt Db is set to YES in theCONFIGURE\ Position Logging panel(see chapter 5.4 for details).Coordinates for the same pointrecorded on different datums aredisplayed separately. Each point isdisplayed with its highest Point Classonly.

Press INFO (F5) to reveal the CrdSource - the source from which thecoordinates were generated.

Calculated - calculated (WGS84)from other sets of coordinates.

Calc (Grid) - calculated (Grid) fromother sets of Coordinates. E.g. viaCOGO routines.GPS Navigtd - GPS navigatedposition.PPRC Code - Post processed GPScode only.PPRC flt ph - Post processed GPSphase float position (ambiguities notresolved).PPRC fix ph - Post processed GPSphase. Ambiguities fixed.RTME Code - Real Time GPSposition code only.RTME fix ph - Real-Time GPS phaseposition. Ambiguities fixed.GPS RTCM - Real Time GPS posi-tion from RTCM code corrections.Unknown - Unknown source.User enterd - WGS84-coordinateentered by user.User (Grid) - Grid coordinatesentered by user.


Pressing INFO (F5) again reveals theCQ (coordinate quality) and thecoordinate class. The coordinateclass in ascending order may be:

MEAS - Point measured onceAVRG - Point measured more thanonce and coordinates averaged.Regardless of whether Avg or Abs isselected in the Threshold settings,points with more than one associatedmeasured point will still be shown asaverage here.CTRL - Point user entered or heldfixed with no accuracy matrix.

Use NEW (F2) to enter a new point.Enter the new point Id and thecoordinates. Use the COORD (F2)key to switch between CoordinateSystems.

If the panel shows local gridcoordinates you may use the ELL H/ORTHO (F5) key to switch betweenentering orthometric or localellipsoidal heights.When you have entered the pointdetails press STORE (F1) to store thepoint and return to the previousscreen.

Use EDIT (F3) to view thecoordinates and point annotations ofa selected point or to edit the point ID.Unless set otherwise, the coordinatedisplayed is that which correspondsto the highest coordinate classavailable.

Use the COORD (F2) key to switchbetween Coordinate Systems.

Use the INFO (F5) key in the sameway as in the MANAGE screen toswitch the information displayedabout the point.

Additionally, when a Configuration Setis being used where Advanced modeis set, the averaging functionality inThreshold Settings is set to Avg andthe point contains more than onemeasurement, the AVRG (F6) key isavailable.

Press USE (F2) to either select ordeselect measurements from theaveraged coordinate.

Press DEL (F4) to delete singlemeasurements.

When you have finished editing thecoordinates, press STORE (F1) tostore the point and return to the list ofpoints of the current job.


When a Configuration Set is beingused where Advanced mode is set,the averaging functionality inThreshold Settings is set to Abs andthe point contains more than onemeasurement, then the ABS (F6) keyis available.

Press USE (F2) to include or excludea measurement from calculating theabsolute coordinate difference. Anabsolute coordinate difference canonly be calculated between twomeasurements.

Press DIFF (F3) after having set theuse flag for two measurements, todisplay the absolute coordinatedifferences.

The absolute differences for Easting,Northing and Height can only bedisplayed if the survey is carried outin a local coordinate system.

An asterisk identifies those whichexceed the threshold settings.

CONT (F1) returns you to the previ-ous screen.

Press DEL (F4) to delete singlemeasurements.

CONT (F1) to return to Edit Pointscreen.

CONT (F1) returns to the listing ofpoints of the current job.

When SHIFT is pressed the JOB (F3)key enables you to change thecurrent job. Note - this function is notavailable if you access PointManagement with a Hot-Key.

When SHIFT is pressed the FILT (F6)key is available along with the stan-dard HOME, END, PG UP and PGDN keys.

Use FILT (F6) to order the points andto apply a filter to the points.

Sort By - Sets the method by whichthe points are ordered. Point Id sortsalphabetically, Time by the time thepoint was calculated and InternalIndex by the order in which they arestored on the memory device.


Filter By - Sets a filter on the pointscontained in the Job. Used if you onlywant to display points belonging to aspecific subset. Note that when set,the filter also applies to every screenon the list where you can access thepoint list.

No Filter - No filter set. The occupa-tion with the highest class that existsfor each point is displayed. (Class isin following descending order: CTRL,AVRG, MEAS).

Radius from Pt - Enables you to filterby selecting a point and all pointswithin a defined radius from it.

Closest Pt - Used in Stakeout. Whenselected, finds the closest point toyour current position, then finds theclosest point to that and so on. Thepoints are then ordered thus so that inStakeout you are always sure thatyou are taking the most efficientroute.

Range of Pt Id’s - Define a start andend Point Id. Only points that falleither alphabetically or numericallywithin this range will be available.

Pt Id Wildcard - Specify a wildcardthat you wish the point Id to contain.E.g. ***NT will look for all points with5 characters ending in NT.

Only points that contain this wildcardwill then be available.

Time - Specify a start and end dateand a start and end time. Points thatwere recorded outside of this timewindow will not be available.

Class - Select a point class. All pointsthat are not in this class will not beavailable. Note that when classMEAS is selected, points with classAVRG will be split into their MEAScomponents and be displayed sepa-rately.

Coordinate Type - Select the type ofcoordinates you wish to makeavailable - WGS84 only, Local only orWGS84 and Local.

Code - Select the Code(s) for thepoints that you wish to make avail-able. All points that do not have thosecodes attached will not be available.Press CODES (F3) to toggle the usestatus of individual Codes to YES orNO.

Layer - Select the Layer(s) for thepoints that you wish to make avail-able. All points that do not have thoseLayers attached will not be available.Press LAYERS (F5) to toggle the usestatus of individual Layers to YES orNO.


By pressing STAKE (F6) you mayselect an additonal stake out filter.The options No Filter, Points to Stakeand Staked Points are available.

When you have set the required Filterpress CONT (F1) to continue.

11.4 Calculator

The Calculator functions according tothe RPN principle. This has theadvantage that complicatedcalculations require less keystrokes.It is available for any calculation youwish to make.

11.5 Wake-up Sessions

You may program the Receiver toautomatically start, measure and thenshut down again without anyinteraction from an operator. You maydefine several Wake-Up Sessions inorder that the Receiver will makeseveral measurements automaticallyone after the other.

Select Wake-up Sessions from theAPPLICATION menu.


Any existing Wake-up Sessions aredisplayed.

Use NEW (F2) to enter a new Wake-up Session.

Use EDIT (F3) to edit an existingWake-up Session.

Use DEL (F4) to delete an existingWake-up session.

When NEW (F2) is pressed thefollowing screen appears.

Job - Select the job which should beused to record the point(s)/data.

Config Set - Select the ConfigurationSet which should be used.

Start Date - Enter the date when theSession should start.

Start Time - Enter the Start Timewhen the Session should start.

Duration - Enter the duration of theSession.

Point Id - If the wake-up session willbe carried out on a known point,select it from the listbox.

If it will be carried out on an unknownpoint, leave it set at ---. Define a PointId template in the Configuration Set.Define a name alone, without anyautomatic increment if you alwayswish the point to have the same pointID. Define a name with an automaticincrement if you wish the point tohave a different Point ID for eachwake-up session.

Ant Height - Enter the height of theAntenna above the point.

# Execute - The number of times thatyou wish to repeat this Wake-Upsession.

Interval - Appears when # Execute isset to a value greater than 1. Definesthe time interval that must elapsebetween start times of the differentexecutions of the Session.


11.6 COGO

The COGO functions enable you tocalculate new points using existingdata. This existing data may beexisting coordinates of points, existingknown distances or existing knownangles. Instead of using existingpoints from the Job database, pointscan be measured on the spot andused for computation.In order to use the COGO functionslocal grid coordinates must beavailable i.e. a local coordinatesystem must be defined. Only theCOGO function ‘Inverse’ can alsohandle coordinate systems that wouldnot allow the computation of gridcoordinates.

Select COGO from the APPLICA-TION menu.

Job - Change the current Job ifnecessary.

Change Log File to YES and enter aFile Name if you want to generate alog file of all the calculations. The filewill be written in the \LOGsubdirectory of the PC card or internalmemory.

Use Offset - Enables you to activatean additional entry field for a paralleloffset whenever a line is to be de-fined.

Use Brg. - Enables you to enter anddisplay bearings in the four quadrantsNorthEast, SouthEast, SouthWestand NorthWest. If this option is set toYES and a bearing needs to beentered the function key QUAD (F6)enables you to switch between thequadrants.

Press CONT (F1) will bring you to theCOGO menu.


Inverse

This function enables you to calculatethe inverse between two grid or twogeodetic points. All coordinates usedin the program can be enteredmanually, selected from the databaseor measured.

Enter the start point and the endpoint of the line or press NEWOC(F5) to measure new points.

Press COMP (F1) to start thecomputation.

Local coordinate system attached:

The Grid Bearing (Azimuth), GridDistance and the Height Difference aredisplayed.

To display Geodetic Azimuth andEllipsoidal Distance press GEOD (F2).

To get back to Grid Bearing and GridDistance then press GRID (F2).

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCOGO\ Menu.

No local coordinate system attached:

The Geodetic Azimuth, EllipsoidalDistance and the Height Differenceare displayed.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCOGO\ Menu.


Input:P1 - Start point of line

(E, N, h / Lat, Long, h)P2 - End point of line

(E, N, h / Lat, Long, h)

Output:ααααα - Grid Bearing / Geodetic Azimuthd - Grid Distance / Ellipsoidal

Distance- Height Difference


Traverse

This function enables you to calculateone or more new points by defining astart point and entering its distanceand azimuth from the start point.

Enter the start point of the line orpress NEWOC (F5) to measure anew point. Enter the Bearing(Azimuth), the optional Parallel Offsetand the Horizontal Distance. Insteadof entering these values manually youmay calculate them from two existingpoints by pressing INV (F2).

Single point computation:

Press COMP (F1) to start the compu-tation.

Easting, Northing and Height of thenew point are displayed.

Enter a Point Id, change the Height ifneccessary. Press STORE (F1) willbring you back to the COGO\ Menu.

Alternatively press STAKE (F5) toswitch to the stakeout screen and usethe coordinates directly for stakeout.

Input:P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)ααααα - Bearing (Azimuth)d - Horizontal Distance

Output:P2 - End point of line (E, N, h)


Multiple point computation:

Press TRAV (F3) to start a sequentialtraverse.

Easting, Northing and Height of thefirst new point are displayed.

Press COORD (F2) to togglebetween coordinate types.

Press STAKE (F5) to switch to thestakeout screen and use thecoordinates directly for stakeout.

Alternatively, enter a Point Id andchange the Height if neccessary.Press STORE (F1) to store the pointand continue with the traverse.

The point stored is associated with atraverse execution. Therefore, it issuggested as next start point.

Enter the Bearing (Azimuth), theoptional Parallel Offset and theHorizontal Distance. Instead ofentering these values manually youmay calculate them from two existingpoints by pressing INV (F2).

Pressing TRAV (F3) displays theresults in the COGO\ TraverseResults panel. There, press STORE(F1).

This leads again to the COGO\Traverse panel. Enter anotherBearing (Azimuth), the optionalParallel Offset and the Horizontal

Distance. Press TRAV (F3) to con-tinue the traverse or SIDE (F4) for asingle side shot.

In the COGO\ Traverse Resultspanel, Easting, Northing and Heightof the side shot are displayed. Enter ameaningful point ID and pressSTORE (F1). Again, this leads to theCOGO\ Traverse panel.

To add another traverse point or sideshot follow the instructions above.

To finish the traverse enter theBearing (Azimuth), the optionalParallel Offset and the HorizontalDistance for the end point. PressCOMP (F1) followed by STORE (F1)to return to the COGO\ Menu.


Input:P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)ααααα - Bearings (Azimuths)d - Horizontal Distances

Output:P2 - First traverse point (E, N, h)P3 - Second traverse point (E, N, h)P4 - Third traverse point (E, N, h)...Side1 - Side point (E, N, h)


Intersection: Bearing - Bearing

This function enables you to calculatethe intersection point of two lines. Thelines may be defined by a point and abearing (azimuth).

Enter the start point of the first line orpress NEWOC (F5) to measure anew point. Enter the Bearing(Azimuth) and the optional ParallelOffset. Enter the start point of thesecond line together with the Bearingand Parallel Offset.Instead of entering these valuesmanually you may calculate themfrom two existing points by pressingINV (F2).


Easting, Northing and Height of theintersection point are displayed.

Enter a Point Id, change the Height ifneccessary and press STORE (F1)will bring you back to COGO\ Inter-section.


Input:P1 - Start point of first line (E, N, h)ααααα - Bearing (Azimuth)P2 - Start point of second line (E,N,h)βββββ - Bearing (Azimuth)

Output:P - Intersection point (E, N, h)


Intersection: Bearing - Distance

This function enables you to calculatethe intersection point(s) of a line anda circle. The line is defined by a pointand a bearing (azimuth) and the circleby the centre point and the radius.

Enter the start point 1 of the line orpress NEWOC (F5) to measure anew point. Enter the Bearing(Azimuth) and the optional ParallelOffset. Enter the centre point 2 andthe radius (Distance) of the circle.Instead of entering the valuesmanually you may calculate themfrom two existing points by pressingINV (F2).


Easting, Northing and Height of thefirst intersection point are displayed.To display the second intersectionpoint press OTHER (F3).

Enter a Point Id, change the Height ifneccessary and press STORE (F1)will bring you back to COGO\ Inter-section.


Input:P1 - Start point of first line (E, N, h)ααααα - Bearing (Azimuth)P2 - Centre point of circle (E, N, h)r2 - Radius

Output:P3 - 1. Intersection point (E, N, h)P4 - 2. Intersection point (E, N, h)


Intersection: Distance - Distance

This function enables you to calculatethe intersection point(s) of two circles.The circles are defined by a thecentre point and the radius.

Enter the point 1 of the first circle orpress NEWOC (F5) to measure anew point. Enter the optional ParallelOffset and the radius (Distance).Enter the values for the second circle.Instead of entering the values manu-ally you may calculate them from twoexisting points by pressing INV (F2).


Easting, Northing and Height of thefirst intersection point are displayed.The first intersection point is the pointleft of the line P1-P2. To display thesecond intersection point pressOTHER (F3).

Enter a Point Id, change the Height ifneccessary and press STORE (F1)will bring you back to the COGO\Intersection menu.


Input:P1 - Centre point of 1. circle (E, N, h)r1 - RadiusP2 - Centre point of 2. circle (E, N, h)r2 - Radius

Output:P3 - 1. Intersection point (E, N, h)P4 - 2. Intersection point (E, N, h)


Distance -- Offset

This function enables you to calculatethe distance and offset values of anoffset point from a line defined by twopoints, the bearing and distance ofthe baseline, the location of the offsetpoint in relation to the baseline andthe bearing from the offset point tothe baseline.

Enter the start and end point of theline or press NEWOC (F5) tomeasure new points. Enter the offsetpoint.


The Distance along the line and thePerpendicular Distance (Offset) aredisplayed.A negative Perp. Dist (Offset)indicates that the point lies on the lefthand side of the line P1-P2.A negative Distance indicates that thepoint lies behind the start point of theline P1-P2.

Press MORE (F5) to display thebearing and the distance from thestart point to the end point of thebaseline, the location of the offsetpoint in relation to the baseline andthe bearing from the offset point tothe baseline.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCOGO\ Offsets menu.

Input:P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)P2 - End point of line (E, N, h)P3 - Offset point (E, N, h)

Output:d - Distanceo - Offset (Perpendicular Distance)


Set Point by Distance -- Offset

This function enables you to calculatea point by using the distance(chainage) and offset values from aline. The line is defined by two points.

Enter the first and the second pointof the line or press NEWOC (F5) tomeasure new points. Enter theDistance along the line and thePerpendicular Distance (Offset).Enter a negative Distance if the pointlies behind the start point of the lineP1-P2.Enter a negative Perp. Dist (Offset) ifthe point lies on the left hand side ofthe line P1-P2.

Instead of entering the valuesmanually you may calculate themfrom two existing points by pressingINV (F2).


Easting, Northing and Height of theoffset point are displayed.

Enter a Point Id, change the Height ifneccessary and press STORE (F1)will bring you back to the COGO\Offset menu.


Input:P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)P2 - End point of line (E, N, h)d - Distance (Chainage)o - Offset (Perpendicular Distance)

Output:P3 - Offset point (E, N, h)


3 Point Arc

This function enables you to calculatethe centre point and the radius of anarc defined by three points

Enter the three points on the arc orpress NEWOC (F5) to measure newpoints.


Easting, Northing and Height of thecentre point are displayed. To displaythe Radius press MORE (F6).

Enter a Point Id, change the Height ifneccessary and press STORE (F1)will bring you back to the COGO\Arcs menu.


Input:P1 - First point on arc (E, N, h)P2 - Second point on arc (E, N, h)P3 - Third point on arc (E, N, h)

Output:C1 - Centre point of arc (E, N, h)r - Radius


Distance on Arc

This function enables you to calculatea point on an arc defined by threepoints and based on the arc distance.

Enter the three points on the arc orpress NEWOC (F5) to measure newpoints. Enter the Arc Distance startingfrom the first point.


Easting, Northing and Height of thenew point on the arc are displayed.

Enter a Point Id, change the Height ifneccessary and press STORE (F1)will bring you back to the COGO\Arcs menu.


Input:P1 - First point on arc (E, N, h)P2 - Second point on arc (E, N, h)P3 - Third point on arc (E, N, h)b - Distance on Arc

Output:P - New point on arc (E, N, h)


11.7 Area

The Area function enables you tocalculate an area based upon pointsin the database. The area segmentsmay be defined as lines or arcs. Thenodes along the perimeter of the areamust be defined clockwise.In order to use the area function, localgrid coordinates must be available i.e.a local coordinate system must bedefined.

Select Area from the APPLICATIONmenu.

Job - Change the current Job ifnecessary.

Area - Select between defining a NewArea or modify the Last Area. Bydefault the last area definition willalways be retained allowing you tomodify it.

Change Log File to YES and enter aFile Name if you want to generate alog file of the area calculation. The filewill be written in the \LOGsubdirectory of the PC card orinternal memory.

Press CONT (F1) will bring you to theCreate Area screen.

To define the segments of a new areaor to add additional segments to analready existing area press NEW(F2). Select the points from the listand press ADD (F2) after each Node(point) or click ARC (F3) to define anarc. Arcs can be defined by twopoints and a radius or by three points.Alter-natively you may press NEWOC(F5) to measure new points. When allsegments of the area are definedpress CONT (F3).

To modify the Id of a Node (point) orto change the arc definitions set thefocus on that segment and pressEDIT (F3).


Press DEL (F4) to delete an seg-ment.

To finish the area definition and startthe calculation press CALC (F1). Thelast point is automatically joined withthe first point of the definition and theresult is displayed.

The units as set in CONFIGURE\General\Units are used to display theresults.

Press LIST (F3) or ESC to return tothe Create Area screen and modifythe area definition.

PLOT (F5) displays a praphicalscreen showing the outline of thedefined area.

Press CONT (F1) to return to theAPPLICATION\ Menu.

This application allows a line to becreated and then this line can besegmented creating any number ofpoints along this line. These pointscan then be staked out if required.

Access the Line Division applicationfrom the Application menu.

Choosing this application leads to theLINE DIV\ Begin panel.

11.8 Line Division


Job – Allows access to the standardJOB\ panel with full functionality.Thejob that is shown on entering thispanel is the currently active job.Select the job containing the pointsfrom which the line will be created.

Type - Allows the selection betweenthe two ways in which a line may bedefined. The two choices are Start +Endpoint and Start + Dst + Bg(Startpoint + Distance + Bearing).Depending on your selection differentmenu items become available.

Start + Endpoint means that a StartPoint and an End Point have to begiven to define the line. Select twopoints from the list or enter NEWpoints.

Start + Dst + Bg means that a StartPoint as well as an Azimuth and aLength have to be given to define theline. Select a start point from the listor enter a NEW point.

Height Def - Allows the definition ofhow the heights of the points that willbe created are computed. The twochoices are Slope and Use Start PntHt.

Use Start Pnt Ht means all createdpoints are given the same height asthe start point in the chosen line.

If Type Start + Endpoint has beenselected, Slope means that allcreated points are given a height thatis interpolated between the heights ofthe start and the end point for thechosen line.

If Type Start + Dst + Bg has beenselected, Slope means that theheight of the interpolated points isdetermined by the entered Zenithangle of the line.

Method - Allows a choice betweenBy Segments and By Interval anddefines how the chosen line issegmented.

By Segments means that thenumber of segments by which the linewill be divided can be entered.

If By Segments is chosen, the nextline in the panel reads Num of Segsand a positive integer value may beentered.

By Interval means that the interval atwhich the new points are createdalong the line can be entered.

If By Interval is chosen, the next linein the panel reads Interval and apositive integer value may be entered.


Strt Pnt Id - Allows a point ID to beentered from which all subsequentlycreated points from this line divisionwill be assigned.

PtIDInc/Dec - Allows to enter apositive or negative integer valuewhich will be used to create the pointIds that the newly created points willbe assigned.

The new points will be stored in thechosen job as user entered gridpoints and can then be staked outusing the usual stake-out routines.

307 12. UtilitiesTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

12. UtilitiesThe Utilities menu item is revealed bypressing SHOW (F4) from the MainMenu.

Utilities contains file, memory andsecurity utilities.

The directory of the currently se-lected memory device is displayed.

If an internal memory is fitted,DEVCE (F5) will be available. Usethis to access the directory of theinternal memory.

To enter a directory, highlight it andpress ENTER. To move up a levelout of a sub-directory, highlight thedouble points and press ENTER.

CODE - Contains all codelist files.

CONVERT - Contains all format filesdefined in Format Manager.

DTM - Contains any DTM stakeoutfile to be used with this application.

12.1 Directory of Memory Device

DATA - Contains user defined ASCIIfiles including the line definition fileSTK_Line.txt as well as the sub-directory GPS. GPS contains anyalmanac files that have been trans-ferred from the Receiver as well asthe GEOID, the CSCS and theRINGBUF sub-directory. GEOIDcontains any Geoidal Model files,CSCS contains any CSCS Field Filesand RINGBUF contains any RingBuffer Data files.

GEODB - Contains all Job filesincluding GPS raw data and pointinformation.

GPS - Contains any coordinatesystem files transferred from theReceiver as well as the sub-directo-ries CONF and PROG. CONFcontains any configuration set filestransferred from the Receiver. PROGcontains Receiver firmware and textfiles.

30812. Utilities Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

GSI - Contains any GSI files createdthrough the Transfer command on theReceiver.

IDEX - Contains any IDEX filescreated through the Transfercommand on the Receiver.

LOG - Contains any log filesgenerated from the optionalapplication programs.

See Appendix G for further details onthe directory structure of the memorydevice.

12.2 Format Memory Module

Enables you to reformat a memorydevice. All data will be erased and afresh directory structure created.

Device - Select the memory deviceyou wish to format. Internal isavailable when an internal memorymodule is fitted.

Quick format - Selects the way inwhich the formatting is carried out.When set to YES the data will not bevisible any more but in reality stillexists on the memory device. It will beoverwritten as and when required.When set to NO all data is reallydeleted.

If you want to format the SensorSystem RAM press SYSTM (F5) andconfirm twice by pressing (F5).

If you format the SystemRAM all system data such asAlmanac, User defined

Configuraton Sets, User definedAntennas, Codelists, Geoid ModelField Files and CSCS Model FieldFiles will be lost.

309 12. UtilitiesTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

12.3 Enter Security Code

The security code is required toactivate optional applicationprograms.

Select the application program youwish to activate and then enter thesecurity code supplied by LeicaGeosystems when you purchasedthe option.

Instructions on how to use eachoptional application program arecontained in a separate manualaccompanying the security code.

12.4 Self Test

A memory self test can be performedon both the PC card and the internalmemory device (if fitted).

The self test will test the chosenmemory device for bad sectors orcorrupted data and report on theresult.

31013. Transfer Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

13. TransferTransfer enables you to transfer alltypes of data between different datadevices on the Receiver. Transfer ofdata to SKI-Pro is carried out fromwithin SKI-Pro.

Select Transfer from the Main Menu.

The following screen appears.

13.1 Job

Enables you to Transfer a Job be-tween PC Card and Internal Memory.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Job. The device To whichthe Job will be transferred will auto-matically selected.

Job - Select the Job to be trans-ferred. Press ALL (F3) to select allthe Jobs.

MORE (F6) enables you to definewhich data to transfer. Select fromPoints and Obs, Points only or Obsonly.

13.2 Config Set

Enables you to transfer ConfigurationSets between Sensors and PC Cards.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Configuration Set. Thedevice To which the Configuration Setwill be transferred will be automati-cally selected.

Config Set - Select the ConfigurationSet to be transferred. Press ALL (F3)to select all the Configuration Sets.

311 13. TransferTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Enables you to transfer CoordinateSystems between Sensors and PCCards.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Coordinate System. Thedevice To which the CoordinateSystem will be transferred will beautomatically selected.

Coord Sys - Select the CoordinateSystem to be transferred. Press ALL(F3) to select all the CoordinateSystems.

13.3 Coordinate System 13.4 Antenna Info

Enables you to transfer Antenna InfoRecords between Sensors and PCCards.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Antenna Info Record. Thedevice To which the Antenna InfoRecord will be transferred will beautomatically selected.

Antenna - Select the Antenna InfoRecord. Press ALL (F3) to select allthe Antenna Info Records.

13.5 Codelist

Enables you to transfer Codelistsbetween Sensors and PC Cards.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Codelist. The device Towhich the Codelist will be transferredwill be automatically selected.

Codelist - Select the Codelist. PressALL (F3) to select all the Codelists.


Enables you to convert an ASCII fileinto a Job.

The reason to convert an ASCII file toa job is mainly for Stake Out. Whenstaking points there are many advan-tages to stake out points stored in ajob rather than staking from an ASCIIfile. For example, points stored in ajob can be filtered and sorted, indi-vidual points can be found morequickly and so on.

The ASCII file may be in a simpleFormat (e.g. Pt Id, East, North,Height) or in GSI8 or GSI16 format(e.g. Pt Id, East, North, Height, Code,Attributes). In all cases, the importedheight can be selected to beorthometric or ellipsoidal. Codes andattributes can be imported with GSI8and GSI 16. This is restricted tothematical coding, which uses WI71for code IDs and WI72 to 79 forattribute values.

13.6 ASCII/GSI to Job

Example for an ASCII file in GSI8 format:

110001+00000015 81..00+64340360 82..00+52962354 83..00+00000689 71....+000sheep72....+000black 73....+0000DEAD 74....+23102001 75....+0011h02m

The converted points will be addedto the Job database. Points arealways imported with the point classcontroll. If a point already exists inthe database with the point classcontroll, the program will prompt youto overwrite it or not. If a pointalready exists in the database withthe point class measured, theprogram will prompt you to add thepoint that is to be imported ascontroll point. If this is answered withyes and codes and possibly

attributes are attached to the point inthe GSI file, the program thenperforms a subsequent check. Itprompts when a code or attributevalue is different.


Height Pos - Sets the position of theheight.

Use the DEFLT (F5) key to reset theformat to its original values.Define the delimiter used to separatethe information for each point andthen define the position of eachcomponent of each point. An exampleof what you have defined is given atthe bottom of the screen.


When GSI File is selected, a GSIcoordinate switch may be defined.This is necessary in case of “lefthanded” coordinate systems. TheWI81 value (normally the eastingvalue) is then imported as thenorthing and the WI82 value(normally the northing value) as theeasting.

Delimiter - Sets the character usedto separate the various point compo-nents. Choose from Comma (,), LineFeed (new line), Semicolon (;), andSpace (blank).

ID Pos - Sets the position of the PointId.

East Pos - Sets the position of theeasting.

North Pos - Sets the position of thenorthing.

When ASCII File is selected, theASCII (F4) key becomes available.Use this to define the format of theASCII file.

Select the file Type of the source file.GSI File or ASCII File. The file mustbe located in the \GSI directory forGSI files and in the \DATA directoryfor ASCII files.

Select the file From which you wantto convert and the Job To which thepoints shall be added.

Hgt Type - Visible in Advanced modeonly. Allows the point to be importedas either height type Ortho orEllipsoidal. Ortho is the defaultoption. If Ellipsoidal has beenselected then this setting isremembered until the sensor isturned off.


Enables you to convert a Job into anASCII file using a Format file. Formatfiles define the format of the finalASCII file and are created using LeicaFormat Manager software.

13.7 GSI / User

Select From which device you wish toselect a Job and To which device youwish to store the ASCII file.

The ASCII file can either be written tothe PC-card/ Internal Memory or,alternatively, to another device via aserial port.

Job - Select the Job from which youwish to write the data.

Format - Select the Format File thatyou wish to use.

Use SHIFT - LHS (F3) to define theGSI coordinate switch.Switch 81/82 - YES activates thecoordinate switch.


Format Files need to be stored in theSystem RAM of the sensor. PressFORMT (F3) to transfer them fromthe directory \CONVERT of the PCCard or internal memory to theSystem RAM or vice versa.

If PC-card or Internal has beenselected as the desired device youhave to specify the Destination andthe File name:

Destinatn - Select the type of file thatwill be written. This specifies wherethe file will be written.

File - Specify the file name andextension.

If To Instrument has been chosen youhave to specify the Port and theDevice.


Press IFACE (F5) and set UseDevice to YES.

Select the port to which the device isconnected. Use the DEVCE (F5) keyin the CONFIGURE\ GSI/User Outpanel to configure the device itself.

Leica TPS300/700, Geodimeter andZeiss REC500 total stations as wellas the SOKKIA SDR33 dataloggerare currently supported.

When Leica TPS300/700 is selectedand connected to the GPS receiver,select the Job Number to which jobthe data should be sent. The JobName of existing jobs in the TPSinstrument is displayed. For a newjob, type in a name. When transferinginto an existing TPS job, all fixpointsin that job are deleted during transfer.

If data is being transferred to aGeodimeter total station, then thetotal station must be in a mode readyto receive data.

SOKKIA devices can only handle 4digit numeric point IDs. If Renumberis set to YES, all points are transferedbut renumbered starting from 1. If NOis selected, only points with numericpoint IDs are transfered and point IDsare shortened to 4 digits, truncatingfrom the right.

The SDR33 must be ready to receivedata before starting the transfer onSystem500. Jobs are transfered withthe same name as on System500.

It is necessary to use the correctformat file when transferring data to atotal station.

Press FILT (F6) if you wish to transfera selection of points only. For moreinformation about the filter settingsplease refer to 11.3 PointManagement.

Press CONT (F1) to transfer the file.The number of exported points willthen be displayed.


Enables you to transfer Geoid FieldFiles between Sensors and PCCards.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Geoid Field File. Thedevice To which the Geoid Field Filewill be transferred will beautomatically selected.

If you transfer a Geoid Field FileFrom the PC-Card To the Sensorthen a Geoid model will beautomatically created.

Geoid File - Select the Geoid FieldFile. Press ALL (F3) to select all theGeoid Field Files.

13.8 Geoid Field File

Enables you to transfer CSCS FieldFiles between Sensors and PCCards.

Select From where you wish totransfer the CSCS Field File. Thedevice To which the CSCS Field Filewill be transferred will beautomatically selected.

If you transfer a CSCS Field FileFrom the PC-Card To the Sensorthen a CSCS model will beautomatically created.

CSCS File - Select the CSCS FieldFile. Press ALL (F3) to select all theCSCS Field Files.

13.9 CSCS Field File

Enables you to transfer Receiverfirmware from the PC Card to theSensor.

Version - Select the firmware versionthat you wish to transfer.

Note that for PC Card capacityreasons, the firmware is available inseparate sections as well as one file.

This enables different sections to beuploaded via the PC Card if thecomplete file will not fit on the PCCard.

13.10 Firmware


Enables you to transfer Terminalfirmware from the PC Card throughthe Sensor to the Terminal.

Version - Select the firmware versionthat you wish to transfer.

13.11 Firmware TR500 13.12 Language Version

Enables you to transfer LocalLanguage files of the system softwareto the Sensor from a PC Card.

Version - Select the language versionthat you wish to transfer.

Enables you to transfer a languagefile for the optional Applicationprograms from the PC Card to theSensor.

Version - Select the Language Filefor the optional Application program.

13.13 Application Text


Enables you to transfer GPS SatelliteAlmanac Files to the Sensor from aPC Card.

Almanac - Select the Almanac thatyou wish to transfer.

13.14 Almanac 13.15 Account File

Enables you to transfer a TelemaxAccount File between PC Card andSensor.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Account file. The deviceTo which the Account file will betransferred will automatically beselected.

File – Select the Account file to betransferred. Up to two files may beselected on each sensor. SinceAccount files are sensor specific onlythe appropriate files will be indicatedto you for selection. Press ALL (F3)to select both files at once.

Enables you to transfer a CultivatedField Control Log Mask File betweenPC Card and Sensor.

Select From where you wish totransfer the CFC Log Mask File. Thedevice To which the CFC Log MaskFile will be transferred will be auto-matically selected.

Log Mask - Select the Log Mask.Press ALL (F3) to select all the LogMask Files available.

13.16 CFC Log Mask File


Enables you to transfer a BeaconStation List between PC Card andSensor.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Beacon Station List. Thedevice To which the Beacon StationList will be transferred will beautomatically selected.

File - Select the beacon.txt file.

13.17 Beacon Station List 13.19 System

Enables you to transfer the completeSystem RAM between PC Card andSensor in a file called Sysram.sys.This includes:

– All information from the Config Sets– Coordinate Systems– Format Files– Codelists– Language Files– Application Text Files– Almanac– Telemax Account Files– CFC Log Mask Files– Beacon Station List

When uploading a Sysram.sys file toa receiver, all existing settings on thereceiver will be overwritten.

13.18 Modem/GSM Station List

Enables you to transfer Modem/GSMStation details between PC Card andSensor.

Select From where you wish totransfer the Modem/GSM Station List.The device To which the Modem/GSM Station List will be transferredwill be automatically selected.

File - Select the Stations.bin file.


Enables you to transfer any filebetween the DATA directories on thememory devices.

13.20 Any File Type

Select From where you wish totransfer the File. The device To whichthe File will be transferred will beautomatically selected.

File - Select the File. Press ALL (F3)to select all the Files.

Select From where you wish totransfer the file. The device To whichthe file will be transferred will beselected automatically.

File - Other namings thanSysram.sys are not allowed.

321 Appendix ATechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix A - Operating and Storage TemperaturesComponentReceiverTerminalAntennaPC Flash CardsInternal Memory

Operation-20°C to +55°C-20°C to +55°C-40°C to +75°C-20°C to +75°C-20°C to +55°C

Storage-40°C to +70°C-40°C to +70°C-40°C to +75°C-40°C to +75°C-40°C to +70°C

322Appendix B Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix B - Observation TimesObs. Method No. sats. GDOP< 8 Baseline Length Approximate observation time

By day By night

Rapid Static 4 or more Up to 5 km 5 to 10 mins 5 mins4 or more 5 to 10 km 10 to 20 mins 5 to 10 mins5 or more 10 to 15 km Over 20 mins 5 to 20 mins

Static 4 or more 15 to 30 km 1 to 2 hours 1 hour4 or more Over 30 km 2 to 3 hours 2 hours

323 Appendix CTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix C - Seismic Record FormatSeismic records may be generated and saved along withthe point information. They take the following format:

@,GSE,V,M,gg.g,pp.p,hh.h,vv.v,aaa.aaa,ss,eee,ii,REC,RSN

Example

@GSE12 4.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.220 5 1 2SR530 001899

Record Content@

GSEVersionM

gg.g

pp.p

hh.h

vv.v

aaa.aaa

ss

eee

ii

REC

RSN

DescriptionRecord Flag. @ = Automatically stored (not userentered).Record Type. GSE = GPS SEismic.Version number of this record.Position type. Range 0,1,2,3,4. Default if noneavailable - 00 - position not available1 - navigated position2 - differential code position3 - differential phase, float solution4 - differential phase, fixed solutionGDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if notavailable - 0.0.PDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if notavailable - 0.0.HDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if notavailable - 0.0.VDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if notavailable - 0.0.Antenna Height - sum of instrument height andantenna offset. Range -99.9 to 999.99. Default if notavailable - 0.0.Number of satellites used for solution. Range 0 to 12.Default if not available - 0.Number of epochs spent on point. Range 0 to 999.Default if not available - 0. Default if not available-0.Length of interval between epochs (seconds). Range0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 30, 60. Default if notavailable - 0.Receiver type. Range SR299, SR399, SR299E,SR399E, SR9400, SR9500, SR510, SR520, SR530,GS50Receiver serial number. Range 0 - 999999. Value ifunavailable - 0.

324Appendix D Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix D - Defined Line File FormatLines that have been defined in Stakeout are stored in thefile STK_Line.txt in the data directory of the memorydevice. Up to 100 lines may be stored in this file.

Line records take the following format, separator is aspace, but no space after @< and @>. The linear unit isMeter and the angular unit is Gon.

@<ID xxxxx.xxx yyyyy.yyy hhh.hhh@>LD LDD

Record Format@<

ID

xxxxx.xxx

yyyyy.yyy

hhh.hhh

@>

LD

LDD

DescriptionStart of first line of record

Line ID, 16 characters

Start Point Easting

Start Point Northing

Start Point Orthometric Height

Start of second line of record

Line definition type:1 - Endpoint Easting, Northing, Height2 - Distance, Bearing, %V3 - Distance, Bearing, H/V4 - Distance, Bearing, V/H5 - Distance, Bearing, Hgt Diff

Line definition values. Depend on LD, asshown above.

} }

{ { {876

54321

LDD LD @

hhh.hhh yyyyy.yyy xxxxx.xxx ID @

><

4847644844764484476

325 Appendix ETechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix E - NMEA Message FormatsThe Receiver can output a variety of NMEA messages.These can be set using the CONFIG key or may besteered from a connected device using a query message.

Note that a Talker ID appears at the beginning of theheader. This is normally GP for GPS but may be set bythe user in CONFIG\NMEA.

The query message format is the same for every NMEAmessage apart from the message identifier.

Format$PLEIQ,

XXX,x,x*hh<CR><LF>

GLL - Geodetic Position - Latitude/LongitudeGNS - GNSS Fix DataGSA - GPS DOP and Active SatellitesGSV - GPS Satellites in ViewLLK - Leica Local Position and GDOPLLQ - Leica Local Position and QualityVTG - Course Over Ground and Ground SpeedZDA - Time and Date

2 Port from which NMEA message is requested:1 - Port 12 - Port 23 - Port 3

3 Output rate of NMEA Message

ContentHeader, message sent from OutsideWorld.Message Identifier1

Port2

Output Rate3

ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

0 - Output off1 - 0.1 s (10Hz)2 - 0.2 s (5Hz)3 - 0.5 s (2Hz)4 - 1 s5 - 2 s6 - 3 s7 - 4 s8 - 5 s9 - 6 s10 - 10 s

11 - 12 s12 - 15 s13 - 20 s14 - 30 s15 - 1 min16 - 2 min17 - 3 min18 - 4 min19 - 5 min20 - 6 min

21 - 10 min22 - 12 min23 - 15 min24 - 20 min25 - 30 min26 - 1 h200 - Outputimmediately

1 Message Identifiers are:GGA - Global Positioning System Fix DataGGK - Real-Time Position with DOPGGK (PT) - Real-Time Position with DOPGGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ

326Appendix E Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

In the listing of NMEA messages, certain symbols areused as identifier for the field types. They are:

Special Format Fields

A Status Single character field:A = Yes, Data Valid, Warning Flag ClearV = No, Data Invalid, Warning Flag Set

llll.ll Latitude Fixed / Variable length field:degreesminutes.decimal - 2 fixed digitsof degrees, 2 fixed digits of minutesand a variable number of digits fordecimal-fraction of minutes. Leadingzeros are always included for degreesand minutes to maintain fixed length.

yyyyy.yy Longitude Fixed / Variable length field:degeesminutes.decimal - 3 fixed digitsof degrees, 2 fixed digits of minutesand a variable number of digits fordecimal-fraction of minutes. Leadingzeros are always included for degreesand minutes to maintain fixed length.

eeeeee.eee Grid Easting Fixed length field:At the most 6 fixed digits for metersand 3 fixed digits for decimal fractionsof meters.

nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing Fixed length field:At the most 6 fixed digits for metersand 3 fixed digits for decimal fractionsof meters.

hhmmss.ss Time Fixed / Variable length field:hoursminutesseconds.decimal - 2 fixeddigits of hours, 2 fixed digits ofminutes, 2 fixed digits of seconds anda variable number of digits for decimal-fraction of seconds. Leading zeros arealways included for hours, minutesand seconds to maintain fixed length.

mmddyy Date Fixed length field:monthdayyear - 2 fixed digits formonth, 2 fixed digits of day, 2 fixeddigits of year. Leading zeros alwaysincluded for month, day and year tomaintain fixed length.

Defined Field Some fields are specified to containpre-defined constants, most oftenalpha characters. Such a field isindicated by the presence of one ormore valid characters. Excluded fromthe list of allowable characters are thefollowing that are used to indicateother field types: A, a, c, x, hh,hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, yyyyy.yy.


Numeric Value Fields

x.x Variable numbers Varaible length integer or floatingnumeric field. Optional leading andtrailing zeros.(example: 73.10 = 73.1 = 073.1 = 73)

hh_ Fixed HEX field Fixed length HEX numbers only

Information Fields

c--cVariable text Variable length valid character fieldaa_ Fixed alpha field Fixed length field of upper-case or

lower-case alpha characters

xx_ Fixed number field Fixed length field of valid characters

GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data

Format$GPGGA,

hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,

xx,x.x,x.x,

M,x.x,M,

x.x,

xxxx*hh<CR><LF>

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID, message sent fromReceiverUTC time of PositionLatitudeHemisphere “N”/“S”Longitude“E”/“W”GPS Quality Indicator0 = fix not available or invalid1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed3 not existing4 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixedNumber of satellites in use, 00-12HDOPAntenna altitude above/below mean sea level.Note, if no orthometric height is available thelocal ell. height will be exported. If the local ell.height is not available either, the WGS84 ell.height will be exported.Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)Geoidal separationUnits of geoidal separation meters (fixed text“M”).Age of differential GPS data, null when DGPSnot usedDifferential Reference Station ID, 0000-1023ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed


Format$GPGGK,

hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,

xx,

x.x,EHTx.x,

M*hh<CR><LF>

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverGGK Sentence FormatterUTC of Position FixUTC dateLatitudeHemisphere “N”/“S”Longitude“E”/“W”GPS Quality Indicator0 = fix not available or invalid1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixedNumber of Satellites in Use(Common satellites between ref and rover,Values between 00 to 12, may be differentfrom the number in view)GDOPEllipsoidal heightAntenna altitude above/below mean sea level.Note, if no orthometric height is available thelocal ell. height will be exported. If the local ell.height is not available either, the WGS84 ell.height will be exported.Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP

Format$PTNL,GGK,


xx,

x.x,EHTx.x,

M*hh<CR>

<LF>

Content$ Start of sentence delimiter— TALKER ID, fixed with PTNLGGK Sentence FormatterUTC of Position FixUTC dateLatitudeHemisphere “N”/“S”Longitude“E”/“W”GPS Quality Indicator0 = fix not available or invalid1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixedNumber of Satellites in Use(Common satellites between ref and rover,Values between 00 to 12, may be differentfrom the number in view)PDOPEllipsoidal heightAltitude above/below mean sea level forposition of marker. Note, if no orthometricheight is available the local ell. height will beexported.Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP

This message type is Trimble proprietary.


GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ

Format$GPGGQ,


xx,

x.x,EHTx.x,

M*hh<CR><LF>

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverGGQ Sentence FormatterUTC of Position FixUTC dateLatitudeHemisphere “N”/“S”Longitude“E”/“W”GPS Quality Indicator0 = fix not available or invalid1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixedNumber of Satellites in Use(Common satellites between ref and rover,Values between 00 to 12, may be differentfrom the number in view)Coordinate QualityEllipsoidal heightAntenna altitude above/below mean sea level.Note, if no orthometric height is available thelocal ell. height will be exported. If the local ell.height is not available either, the WGS84 ell.height will be exported.Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

GLL - Geodetic Position - Latitude, Longitude

Format$GPGLL,

llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,

a

*hh<CR><LF>

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverLatitudeHemisphere “N”/“S”Longitude“E”/“W”UTC time of positionStatus1

A = Data validV = Data not validMode Indicator1

A = Autonomous modeD = Differential modeN = Data not validChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

1The Mode Indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status fieldis set to A for the Mode Indicators A and D. The Status field is set to Vfor the Mode Indicator N.


Format$XXGNS,

hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,

xx,x.x,x.x,

x.x,x.x,

xxxx*hh<CR><LF>

GNS - GNSS Fix Data

ContentHeader, message sent from Receiver. XX=GP- GPS only, XX=GL - GLONASS only, XX=GN-Combined GPS/GLONASSUTC time of positionLatitudeHemisphere “N”/“S”Longitude“E”/“W”Mode IndicatorN = No FixA = Autonomous. GPS Nav FixD = Differential. DGPS FixP = Precise Nav (no deliberate degradationsuch as SA)R = Real Time Kinematic. RTK FixF = Float RTK.Number of satellites in use, 00-99HDOP of all satellites used in computationAntenna altitude above/below mean sea level,meters. Note, if no orthometric height isavailable the local ell. height will be exported.If the local ell. height is not available either, theWGS84 ell. height will be exported.Geoidal separation, metersAge of Differential GPS Data, null when GPSnot used.Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

Format1

$GPGSA,

a,

x,

xx,

x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverModeM = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3DmodeA = Automatic, allowed to automatically switch2D/ 3DMode1 = Fix not available2 = 2D3 = 3DPRN numbers of satellites used in solution(this format is repeated 12 times and null forunused fields)PDOPHDOPVDOPChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

GSA - GPS DOP and Active Satellites

1 Example:$--GSA,a,x,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>


Format$GPGSV,

x,x,xx,xx,xx,xxx,xx.....,xx,xx,xxx,xx*hh<CR><LF>

GSV - GPS Satellites in View

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID, message sent fromReceiverTotal number of messages, 1 to 3Message number, 1 to 3Total number of satellites in viewSatellite PRN numberElevation, degrees, 90° maximumAzimuth, degrees True, 000 to 359SNR (C/No) 00-99 dB, null when not tracking2nd-3rd SV

4th SV

ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

Note- Satellite information may require the transmission ofmultiple messages. The first field specifies the totalnumber of messages, minimum value 1. The second fieldidentifies the order of this message (message number),minimum value 1.- A variable number of “PRN-Elevation-Azimuth-SNR” setsare allowed up to a maximum of four sets per message.Null fields are not required for unused sets when less thanfour sets are transmitted.

Format$GPLLK,

hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,

xx,x.x,x.x,

M*hh<CR><LF>

LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverUTC time of positionUTC dateGrid Easting, metersMeter (fixed text “M”)Grid Northing, metersMeter (fixed text “M”)GPS Quality0 = fix not available or invalid1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixedNumber of satellites used in computationGDOPAltitude above/below mean sea level forposition of marker. Note, if no orthometricheight is available the local ell. height will beexported.Meter (fixed text “M”)ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed


Format$GPLLQ,

hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,

xx,x.x,x.x,

M*hh<CR><LF>

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverUTC time of positionUTC dateGrid Easting, metersMeter (fixed text “M”)Grid Northing, metersMeter (fixed text “M”)GPS Quality0 = fix not available or invalid1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixedNumber of satellites used in computationCoordinate QualityAltitude above/below mean sea level forposition of marker. Note, if no orthometricheight is available the local ell. height will beexported.Meter (fixed text “M”)ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed

Format$GPVTG

x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.xK,a

*hh<CR><LF>

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverCourse over ground, degrees (0.0° to 359.9°)True (fixed text “T”)Course over ground, degrees (0.0° to 359.9°)Magnetic (fixed text “M”)Speed over groundKnots (fixed text “N”)Speed over groundKm/h (fixed text “K”)Mode IndicatorA = Autonomous modeD = Differential modeN = Data not validChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

Note - The Magnetic declination is set in the Receiverusing the CONFIG key.


Format$GPZDA,

hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>

ZDA - Time and Date

ContentHeader, incl. Talker ID,message sent fromReceiverUTC timeUTC Day, 01 to 31UTC Month, 01 to 12UTC Year, 1997 to ...Local zone description, hours (-13 to 13) (±)Local zone description, minutes (00 to 59)ChecksumCarriage ReturnLine Feed

Note - This message is given high priority and is output assoon as it is created. Latency is therefore reduced to aminimum.

334Appendix F Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Port 1Pin Function1 RTS2 CTS3 GND4 Rx5 Tx6 Vmod7 Bat1)

8 +12V2)

Port2/PWRPin Function1 Bat1)

2 +12V2)

3 GND4 Rx5 Tx

Port 3Pin Function1 RTS2 CTS3 GND4 Rx5 Tx6 Vmod7 Bat1)

8 +12V2)

TerminalPin Function1 KDU_ON2 KDU_PWR3 GND4 Rx5 Tx

PWRPin Function1 Bat1)

2 +12V2)

3 GND4 ---5 ---

Appendix F - Pin Assignments and Sockets

335 Appendix FTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

1) Input into sensor2) Output out from sensor

Sockets

Port 1 and 3:Lemo FGA.1B.308.CLCD.x2Z

Port 2, PWR:Lemo FGG.1B.305.CLCx.xxZ

Event:Lemo ERN.0S.250.CTL

PPS:Lemo HGP.00.250.CTL

336Appendix G Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

CODE

CONVERT

DATA

DTM

GEODB

Alamanac files

GEOID

CSCS

RINGBUF

Appendix G - Data Device Directory Structure

The following structure refers to PC Cards and Internal Memory. It shows where files are stored for transfer to and fromthe System RAM and where data is stored.

All Codelists

All Format files from Format ManagerCultivated Field Control Log Mask File

User-defined ASCII filesSTK_Line.txt (Line Definition File)Point Files

DTM Stakeout file

All JobsCoordinate System Files

GPS

Geoid Model Field files

CSCS Field Files

Ring Buffer Files(RS500)

337 Appendix GTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Antenna Info Record Filesbeacon.txt (Beacon Station List)Stations.bin (Modem / GSM Station List)

CONF

PROG

SERVICES

GSI Files

IDEX Files

Log Files from Application Programs

GPS

GSI

IDEX

LOG

Configuration Sets

Firmware FilesLanguage FilesSysram.sys (System RAM file)

Telemax Accountfiles

338Appendix H Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix H - External DevicesInterfacesAn interface should be considered asa function of the sensor. For example,Real-Time is one function that can beactivated on the sensor, Hidden Pointis another function and so on.

System 500 supports the followinginterfaces:

Real - Time Input/OutputNMEA OutputASCII InputHidden Point InputMeteoTiltGSI/ User OutRemote ControlPPS OutputEvent Input

Each interface may be controlled byone or more Devices.

For further details on the interfacesTilt and Meteo see App. J.

DevicesA device should be considered asboth the hardware which is used inconnection with an interface and theparameters that allow the hardware tocommunicate with the sensor.

The devices that are supported by thesensor can be divided into the follow-ing groups:

RS232Radio modem devicesGSMModem devicesRTB Module (CSI)RTS Module (Racal)SAPOSHidden Point devices

Certain devices may be used withone or more interfaces. For example,a radio modem can be used toreceive Real-Time Reference databut a second radio modem could alsobe used to simultaneously outputNMEA messages.

Note:The PPS Output and the Event Inputare optional interfaces that requirespecial hardware (ports) and deviceswhich are not described here. Pleaserefer to the respective chapters insection 9 of this manual.

339 Appendix HTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

RS232

Port 1, 2 and 3 of the Sensor arestandard RS232 interfaces. If you areusing an external device that is notdirectly supported you may use thedefault RS232 configuration.

By default a standard RS232 deviceis available in the list.

RS232 - Standard parameters with9600 baud rate.

To create a new standard RS232device highlight RS232 and selectNEW (F2).

Enter a name and change the para-meters according to the specificationof your external device.

Press CONT (F1) to store the device.


Radio and Repeaters

Radio devices are normally used totransmit or receive Real-Time data.Additionally a Radio device may alsobe used to steer and communicatewith the Sensor e.g. to download rawdata from a remote location etc.

The following radio devices aresupported with System 500:

Satelline 1AS/2ASSatelline 2ASxSatelline 2ASxESatelline 3AS/3ASdPacific Crest RFM96WPacific Crest PDLAT-RXM500 (Akasaka Tech)Dataradio T-96S (Australia only)Teledesign TS4000 (USA only)

The Teledesign TS4000 requires aspecific housing to be purchasedfrom Leica USA.

Configuring the Radio

From CONFIGURE\ Interfaceshighlight the interface (e.g. Real-Time) you want to use with the Radioand press EDIT (F3).

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list.

Certain localised versions of theabove radios may require extraconfiguration before use with System500. In this case, highlight the radiomodel used and press NEW (F2).Enter a name (e.g. Satelline Italy) andenter the applicable device param-eters.

To configure a third party radiohighlight Unknown Radio and pressNEW (F2). Enter a name (e.g. Radio-XY) and enter the applicable deviceparameters.

The port settings are the parametersused for the communication betweenthe Sensor and the radio. If required,edit them to suit the radio settings orchange the radio settings.


Radio Modems and ChannelSwitchingChannel switching is supported withSatelline 2ASx, 2ASxE, 3AS/3ASdand Pacific Crest RFM96 modems. Itoffers you the ability to set the chan-nel on the radio modem.

This changes the frequency at whichthe radio operates by a small amount.This can be used in the followingsituations:

Case 1Two Real-Time Reference stationsare set up at two locations, eachbroadcasting on two different chan-nels. This gives the Rover two advan-tages:

1. If the signal from one referencestation is blocked, you can switchchannels and try the other one.

2. You can obtain two separatefixes for each point, providing redun-dancy for future least squares adjust-ment operations.

Case 2One Real-Time Reference and oneReal-Time Rover are being used. Ifthe signal is blocked due to radiointerference, you can switch thechannel at the Reference and Roverto try a slightly different frequency.

Note that when using channel switch-ing, the Ref Stn Id at the Referenceshould be set to a different Id for eachreference site.

The number of channels availableand the frequency spacing betweenchannels will depend on the radiomodem used.

Channel switching on Pacific CrestRadio Modems must be activated bya Pacific Crest dealer and mayrequire a special license.

Satelline Radio Modems must be inProgramming mode. This can be setby a Satelline dealer. Channel switch-ing may contravene radio broadcast-ing regulations in certain countries.

Make yourself aware of the regula-tions in force in the area in which youare operating.


Channel switching is available viaCONFIGURE\ Interfaces.

Highlight the device to switch chan-nels and press CTRL (F5).

For the radio modems Satelline 3AS,Pacific Crest RFM96W and PacificCrest PDL, the channel to which theradio is set is checked and displayed.For other radios than those, a similarcheck is technically impossible.Therefore, the channel displayeddoes not necessarily coincide with theactual radio channel.

Enter a Channel number and confirmwith CONT (F1).

Additionally if you are using thedevice for a Real-Time Rover sensoryou may set the following parameter:

Accept Ref - Defines which referencestation to accept real-time data from.Choose from the following:Any Received means that the sensorwill accept data from any referencestation from which it receives data.1st Received means that data will bereceived and used from the firstreference station that is recognisedby the rover. If you wish to force thesystem to try to establish a newconnection with a different referencestation press 1st (F6).User defined enables you to definewhich reference station data will bereceived from according to its RefStn Id. This is necessary whenseveral reference stations send RTKmessages delayed on the samefrequency (Time Slicing) and youwish to switch from one referencestation to another.


Highlight the reference station youwish to use. CONT (F1) returns to theprevious panel. The number of theselected reference station is takenover into the Ref Stn Id line.

Note that setting Ref Stn Ids is onlypossible without a survey or stakeoutoperation running.

Repeaters and Repeater BoxFirmware 3.00 and higher supportsthe use of repeaters.

A repeater is a radio, which is set upfor repeater mode. A repeaterreceives data from the reference andbroadcasts the data further to therover. Consequently, the rangeincreases. The total range dependson the set up of reference, repeaterand rover.

With User defined you may pressSCAN (F5) to access a list of refer-ence stations transmitting on theparticular channel. The list shows thereference station IDs, the RTK formatused for transmitting and the latency(time delay) with which the messagesare sent. This SCAN functionality isindependant from time slicing andcan therefore always be used tocheck the RTK format of the refer-ence.

Since not all radio modems aresuitable as repeaters, we recommendthe Satelline 3AS(d) and all PacificCrest RFM96 and PDL Models.

A radio, which is programmed as arepeater, can still be used for refer-ence and rover applications. How-ever, this is not recommended forpower consumption reasons.

It is important that all radio modemsat reference, repeater and roveroperate on the same frequency. For achannel switch, the repeater requiresconnection to the sensor.

The GHT38 is a repeater box for theLeica housings for radio modems. Byusing this box, the housings can befixed to a tripod. The power supply forthe modem is enabled with an exter-nal battery and a power cable.

For more information on how to setup a repeater with a repeater box seesection 2.13.


Configuring the GSM Phone

From CONFIGURE\ Interfaceshighlight the interface (e.g. Real-Time) you want to use with a GSMphone and press EDIT (F3).


GSM devices are normally used totransmit or receive Real-Time data.Additionally a GSM device may alsobe used to steer and communicatewith the Sensor e.g. to download rawdata from a remote location etc.The following standard GSM modelsare directly supported with System500 and fit into a Radio Housing:

Siemens M1Siemens M20Siemens TC35Wavecom WMOD2Wavecom M1200 Series

The following GSM models are alsosupported but do not fit into a hous-ing:

Bosch 908/909Sagem MC850Siemens S25/S35i

Before using GSM phonesfor data transmission makesure your network operatorsupports data transmission.

GSM

If you are using a third partyGSM phone make sure itsupports AT commandlanguage.

Select a standard GSM phone fromthe list.

To select the Bosch 908/909, theSagem MC850 or the Siemens S25/S35i, highlight GSM and press EDIT(F3). Press OPT (F4). Under Typeselect the equivalent GSM.

To define any other GSM device,highlight GSM and press NEW (F2).Enter a name (e.g. GSM-XY) andenter the applicable device param-eters.

The port settings are the parametersused for the communication betweenthe Sensor and the GSM phone. Ifrequired, edit them to suit the GSMphone.


Press the OPT (F4) key to access theGSM options. The GSM optionsenable you to define the AT com-mands used for communictionbetween the sensor and the GSMphone.

Under Type select User and modifythe remaining parameters. Alterna-tively select a standard GSM phonetype from the list and press SET-U(F5) to turn these parameters intouser parameters and then modifythem.

Init 1 and Init 2 - This is the initialisa-tion sequence to initialise the phone.Between Init1 and Init 2, a check forthe PIN is inbuilt.

Dial - This is the dialing string used todial the phone number. A placeholdershall be used to insert the phonenumber as defined in GSM Connec-tion.

Hangup - This is the hangup se-quence used to end the networkconnection.

Escape - This is the escape se-quence used to switch to the com-mand mode before using the hangupsequence.

The characters below may be used todefine the AT commands:

^M Inserts a carriage return andsend command

^# Inserts the phone number asdefined in GSM Connection

^S Bearer Service: Speed (Proto-col and NetDataRate)

^C Bearer Service: ConnectionElement

~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second

^^ Insert character ^

Please refer to the instruction manualof your GSM phone for informationabout which AT commands to use.

Using the GSM PhoneThe way in which GSM phones areused for Real-Time GPS differs fromradios. The Rover contacts theReference. The Reference phone justhas to be switched on. One Rovercan then dial in to the ReferenceStation phone. As soon as the Refer-ence is contacted, it sends the data tothe Rover that has called it.

Therefore you can pre-define severalGSM Connections and use them toswitch between different ReferenceStations.

In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces highlightthe device to switch stations andpress CTRL (F5).


Select the Station to contact. Thephone Number of the Station (Refe-rence) and the type of Protocol to beused are displayed.

Accept Ref - Defines which referencestation to accept real-time data from.Choose from the following:Any Received means that the sensorwill accept data from any referencestation from which it receives data.1st Received means that data will bereceived and used from the firstreference station that is recognisedby the rover. If you wish to force thesystem to try to establish a newconnection with a different referencestation press 1st (F6).

User defined enables you to definewhich reference station data will bereceived from according to its RefStn Id.

Ref Stn Id - The Id of the ReferenceStation to be used. Note that settingRef Stn Ids is only possible without asurvey or stakeout operation running.

NetDataRate - Some GSMs arecapable of automatic searching forthe network baud rate. In this caseAutobauding can be set. Otherwise,one of the predefined network baudrates must be selected.

ConnElement - Choose Non-Trans-parent for a GSM working with RLP(Radio Link Protocol) and Transpar-ent for a GSM working without RLP.Please refer to the GSM manual tosee if the GSM uses RLP. BeforeRLP can be used with a GSM, it mustbe support by the network. Checkwith the network provider.

Search for the nearest GSM Refer-ence Station to the current sensorposition by pressing NEAR (F2). Thecurrent sensor position is the positionat the time when the NEAR key ispressed. A GSM station is onlyincluded in the search when UseCoord in panel CONFIGURE\ GSMStation is set to YES.

Once the nearest GSM ReferenceStation has been found, the Stationfield is updated accordingly.


To enter a new GSM station, highlightStation in panel CONFIGURE\ GSMStation and press ENTER.

All existing stations are listed. To edita station, highlight it and press EDIT(F3). To delete a station, highlight itand press DEL (F4). To enter a newstation, press NEW (F2).

The SCAN functionality can be usedto check the data format of a GSMreference. Pressing SCAN (F5)establishes a connection to the GSMreference. The reference station id,the data format used for transmittingand the latency (time delay) of theGSM reference station is displayed.

CONT (F1) cuts the GSM connectionand returns to the previous panel.The station id of the highlightedreference station is taken over intothe Ref Stn Id line, if Accept Ref isset to User defined.

Enter the Station name, telephoneNumber and the type of GSM Proto-col (Analog, ISDN V.110 or ISDNV.120). ISDN V.110 is equivalent tothe UDI (Unrestricted Digital Informa-tion) mode found in firmware versionsearlier than V4.0.

Use COORD - Set to YES to includea GSM station in the search for thenearest GSM reference station. IfYES is set, coordinates can beentered and COORD (F2) can beused to switch between coordinatesystems.

Press CONT (F1) to accept thesettings and return to the station listand CONT (F1) a second time toreturn to panel CONFIGURE\ GSMStation.

Change the NetDataRate (Networkbaud rate) if necessary.


Press the CODES (F3) key to inputyour PIN code.

If for some reason the PIN code isblocked (E.g. the wrong PIN wasentered) input the PUK Code to beable to access the PIN.

DEL (F4) will delete both the existingPIN and PUK code.

Press CONT (F1) to return to previ-ous screen.

Press Shift and then CMD (F4) toSEND (F3) an AT command to theGSM.

Note that this functionality can only beemployed in Advanced Mode.

Press CONT (F1) in the CONFIG-URE\ GSM Connection panel toreturn to CONFIGURE\ Interfaces.

When a GSM Phone is configured asoftkey CONEC (F4) or DISCO (F4)becomes available upon pressingSHIFT in the MAIN, SURVEY andSTAKEOUT screen.

This enables you to quickly connectto the selected Station or disconnectimmediately after the survey iscompleted in order to save air time.


Status of the GSM phoneTo access the GSM status pressSTATUS /Interfaces, highlight theGSM device and press VIEW (F3).

Information about the connectedGSM phone is displayed.

Firmware - Current firmware release.

Operator - GSM network operator.

Status - Registration status.

Signal Level - Indication of receivedsignal strength on the GSM network.


Modem

A Modem device is normally used tocommunicate with the Sensor e.g. todownload data or to transmit NMEAmessages etc.The following modem communicationsettings are as standard included withSystem 500:

U.S. Robotics 56KSprint PCS Motorola Timeport P8167

If you are using a third partymodem make sure it sup-ports AT command lan-guage.

Configuring the Modem

From CONFIGURE\ Interfaceshighlight the interface (e.g. Prim.Remote) you want to use with amodem and press EDIT (F3).


Highlight Modem from the list andpress NEW (F2). Enter a name (E.g.ModemXY) and enter the applicabledevice parameters.

The port settings are the parametersused for the communication betweenthe Sensor and the modem. If re-quired edit them to suit the modem.


Press the OPT (F4) key to access themodem options. The modem optionsenable you to define the AT com-mands used for communictionbetween the sensor and the modem.

Under Type select User and modifythe remaining parameters. Alterna-tively select a standard modem typefrom the list and press SET-U (F5) toturn this parameters into user param-eters and then modify them.

Init 1 and Init 2 - This is the initialisa-tion sequenze to initialise the modem.

Dial - This is the dialing string used todial the phone number. A placeholdershall be used to insert the phonenumber as defined in Modem Con-nection.

Hangup - This is the hangup se-quence used to end the networkconnection.

Escape - This is the escape se-quence used to switch to the com-mand mode before using the hangupsequence.

The characters below may be used todefine the AT commands:

^M Inserts a carriage return andsend command

^# Inserts the phone number asdefined in GSM Connection

^S Bearer Service: Speed (Proto-col and NetDataRate)

^C Bearer Service: ConnectionElement

~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second

^^ Insert character ^

Please refer to the instruction manualof your modem for information aboutwhich AT commands to use.

Using the ModemThe way a modem is used is verysimilar to a GSM phone. Pleaserefere to the section GSM on how touse a modem.


RTB Module (CSI)

The RTB (Real Time Beacon) Modulereceives DGPS corrections from U.S.Coast Guard or other differentialcorrection beacons.

It is used for Real-Time applicationsin the meter or submeter accuracyrange. The module consists of acombined GPS/Beacon antenna anda radio module that is available in adetachable housing.

Configuration

From CONFIGURE\ Interfaceshighlight Real-Time press EDIT (F3).

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list. Select RTB Module (CSI)and press CONT (F1) to confirm.

Ensure that the Data Format is set toRTCM 9,2.

Press RTCM (F6) to set the RTCMversion and the number of bits/byte.


In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces pressCTRL (F5).

At certain locations it is possible thatseveral beacon signals can bereceived at the same time. If Fre-quency is set to Automatic thestrongest signal available will beused.

This is not necessarily the closest. Ifyou know the frequency of the closestbeacon select User defined andenter the frequency.


Use the RSTN (F4) key to display theBeacon Stations available on theSensor.Note that the Beacon Station list hasto be transferred to the Sensorbefore.

Depending on the beacon station theBit Rate may vary. Select Auto willdetect the bitrate automatically. SelectUser defined and enter a valueaccording to the Beacon station.

Press CONT (F1) to close the controlpanel.

Status of the RTB Module (CSI)To access the RTB Module statuspress STATUS /Interfaces, highlightthe RTB device and press VIEW (F3).

Information about the connected RTBModule is displayed

Signal - Strength of the incomingsignal in µV/m.

SN Ratio - Signal to noise ratio in dB.

Frequency - The frequency on whichthe RTB module is currently operat-ing.

Bit Rate - The bit rate on which theTB module is currently operating.


Press RTCM (F6) to set the RTCMversion and the number of bits/byte.


In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces highlightReal-Time and press CTRL (F5).

DGPS corrections can be receivedfrom different RACAL ground stationsvia different satellites. Each satellitesends this corrections by differentbeams (Channels).

RTS Module (Racal)

The RTS Module (Racal) receivesDGPS corrections from RACALLandStar satellites. It is used forReal-Time applications in the meteror submeter accuracy range.

The module consists of a combinedGPS/LandStar antenna and a DGPSradio receiver that is available in adetachable housing.

To receive DGPS corrections fromthe LandStar satellites a correspond-ing license must be available.

Configuration

From CONFIGURE\ Interfaceshighlight Real-Time and press EDIT(F3).

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list. Select RTS Module(Racal) and press CONT (F1) toconfirm.

Ensure that the Data Format is set toRTCM 1, 2.


If Channel is set to Auto it will selectan appropriate spot beam from thenearest satellite. If it is set to Userdefined you may enter a Channelnumber manually.


Status of the RTS Module (Racal)To access the RTS Module statuspress STATUS /Interfaces, highlightthe RTB device and press VIEW (F3).

Information about the connectedRacal module is displayed.

Ref Stn ID - 3 digit Racal referencestation ID. If -1 is displayed thenecessary license is not available.

Channel - Demodulator channelnumber.

Signal - Strength of signal. For goodreception a signal of 1.5V or higher isrecommended.

AGC - Automatic Gain Controlindicating the voltage being fed to thevariable gain amplifier on the de-modulator.

Freq. Offset - The difference be-tween the occupied carrier frequencyand the entered frequency.

Bit Error Rate - The bit error ratebetween 0 and 7.

If Ref Stn ID is set to Automatic itwill search the closest ground stationaccording to your current position. If itis set to User defined you may enteran Id manually or press RSTN (F4) torequest a list of all ground stationsavailable.


Two different services are available.RTCM corrections from the closestreference can be received or yourown position can be sent to thedevice which then receives correc-tions based on a virtual referencestation.

In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces highlightthe Real-Time and press CTRL (F5).

Change Ref Net to Yes if correctionsfor a virtual reference shall be used.


SAPOS is a reference station serviceavailable for Germany.

To make use of this service there arethree different options:

1. SAPOS reference decoder box.

2. SMARTgate box.

3. Telemax Service.

Configuration

From CONFIGURE\ Interfaceshighlight Real-Time and press EDIT(F3).

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list. Select SAPOS-Box andpress CONT (F1) to confirm.

Select one of the following DataFormats : RTCM 1,2, RTCM 18,19 orRTCM 20,21.

SAPOS Using a SAPOS decoder box


SMARTgate is a device which hasGSM and Radio as well as thefunctionality of the SAPOS-Boxintegrated (see www.navsys.de). Thedevice is connected to the sensor inthe Leica radio housing.

To operate this device special user-profiles have to be transferred to theSMARTgate box. Such a user-profilecontains information on the kind ofcommunication, the service em-ployed, the account used, a list ofreference stations, an acceptableminimum distance etc.

The parameters of the user-profilesare neither deletable or editable normay they be copied to the sensor.You may select from differentlyconfigured profiles on the sensor,though.

Configuration

In the CONFIGURE\ Interfaces panelhighlight Real-Time and press EDIT(F3).

Set R-Time Data to Rover and setthe Data Format to either RTCM 1,2or RTCM 20,21.

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list. Select SMARTgate andpress CONT (F1).

Press CONT (F1) to return to theCONFIGURE\ Interfaces panel.

Press CTRL (F5) to access theCONFIGURE\ SMARTgate panel.

Profile - Select one of the UserProfiles stored in the SMARTgatebox.

Profile No - Displays the number ofthe selected profile.

Using a SMARTgate box


Ref Select - Choose the criterion bywhich the Reference Station shall beselected.Choose Profile to select the refer-ence station according to the givenprofile.

Choose Frequency to select thereference station according to afrequency different to the givenprofile. The Frequency has to bemanually specified.

Choose Phone No to select thereference station according to aphone number different to the givenprofile. The Phone No has to bemanually specified.

Choose Station No to select thereference station according to astation number different to the givenprofile. The Station No has to bemanually specified.

Viewing the Status of SMARTgate

To access the SMARTgate statuspress STATUS /Interfaces, highlightthe SMARTgate device and pressDEVCE (F5).

Profile - Displays the selected UserProfiles.

Profile No - Displays the number ofthe selected profile.

Medium - Displays the currently usedmedium. This may be either GSM,2m Radio or None.

Error Rate - Displays the error rate ofthe currently active medium (0...99%).

Press ACCNT (F3) to display thecurrently used Account, its Provider,the currently used Service (e.g. EPSor HEPS) and the Credit Unit andCredit Time.

CreditUnit - Displays the remainingcredit units.CreditTime - Displays the timeremaining according to the creditunits.

Press VERS (F4) to display the Typeand the Serial No. of the SMARTgatebox, the Software Version and itsSoftware Date.

Using the SMARTgate box

Once you have set the configurationfor the SMARTgate box the connec-tion to the SAPOS station can beestablished by pressing SHIFT-CONEC (F4) in the MAIN, SURVEYor STAKE-OUT panel. To disconnectagain press SHIFT-DISCO (F4).


To make use of the Telemax serviceyou first have to transfer the sensorspecific Account file to your sensor. Amaximum of two Account files maybe transferred to each sensor, e.g.one for private and one for non-private use.For details on how to transfer suchAccount Files refer to chapter 13.15Transfer Telemax Account File.

Configuration

In the CONFIGURE\ Interfaces panelhighlight Real-Time and press EDIT(F3).

Set a R-Time Data to Rover and setthe Data Format to either RTCM 1,2or RTCM 20,21.

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list. Select the GSM or Modemattached to your sensor from the listor define a NEW (F2) one. For detailson how to configure and use a GSMphone or Modem refer to the sub-chapters GSM and Modem in theAppendix H.

Press CONT (F1) to confirm yourselection and return to the CONFIG-URE\ Real-Time panel.

Press the RTCM (F6) key to selectthe Telemax service in settingTelemax to YES. Select the appro-priate Accountfile, which you havetransferred to the sensor before.

With the Data Format being set toRTCM two different services areavailable. Either RTCM correctionsfrom the closest reference can bereceived or your own position can besent via the selected device whichthen receives corrections based upona virtual reference station.

Change Ref Net to YES if correctionsfor a virtual reference shall be used.

Press CONT (F1) to confirm.

Using the Telemax Service


Using Telemax

Once you have set the configurationfor your GSM phone or the Modemand selected the Telemax service youcan establish the connection to theSAPOS station by pressing SHIFT-CONEC (F4) in the MAIN, SURVEYor STAKE-OUT panel.

Based upon the Account file theTelemax software checks if you havethe right to receive uncoded RTCMcorrections from the SAPOS station.To disconnect again press SHIFT-DISCO (F4) in the MAIN, SURVEY orSTAKE-OUT panel.


Hidden Point

Hidden Point devices are specialdevices to measure distances, anglesand azimuths to points which are notaccessible by means of GPS e.g.house corners or trees. These mea-surements can be used to feed theHidden Point application which isaccessible in the Survey and Stake-out screen when the operation modeis set to Advanced. The followingdevices are supported:

Leica Disto memo (distance only)Leica Disto pro (distance only)Leica DistoTM pro4 (distance only)Leica DistoTM pro4 a (distance only)Laser Ace 300Criterion 400Criterion CompatibleLeica VectorLeica Laser LocatorLeica Laser Locator Plus

All devices support reflectorlessdistance measurements using lasertechnology.

Configuration

From CONFIGURE\ Interfaceshighlight Hidden Point and pressEDIT (F3).

Set Use Device to YES. If NO is setthe Hidden Point measurements needto be entered manually. PressDEVCE (F5) to access the device list.Select a Hidden Point device form thelist. For the Disto memo or Disto pro,select Disto. When using a DistoTM

pro4 or DistoTM pro4 a select Disto 4.Press CONT (F1) to confirm.

Enter a distance Dist Offset if neces-sary. A negative offset means thedistance measured will be reduced bythe offset.

To Hidden Point

DistoPole

PositiveDist Offset

NegativeDist Offset

Measuring Offsets when using the Disto


Hgt Offset - Available if Use Devicein the current panel and Include Hgtin the panel CONFIGURE\ HiddenPoint in the current configuration set(see chapter 5.4.1.) are set to YES.The options are:

None - Neither instrument nor targetheight is considered. The result is thedelta height between the center of theexternal device and the aimed point.This delta height can be measured,estimated or left as zero.Inst Height - The instrument height isconsidered. If the delta height be-tween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point is mea-sured or estimated, the result is theheight difference between the roverpoint on the ground and the aimedpoint. Enter the instrument height intothe corresponding new line.Inst Height & Trgt Height - Instru-ment as well as target height to beconsidered. If the delta height be-tween the center of the externaldevice and the aimed point is mea-

sured or estimated, the result is theground height difference betweenrover and aimed point. Enter thevalues in the corresponding two newlines.

The instrument height is the distancefrom the ground to the center of theexternal device.

The target height is the distance fromthe ground to the aimed point.

HgtTrgt

= HgtInst

+ Inst Height + Delta Hgt - Trgt Height


If you are using a device that mea-sures azimuths press EAO (F3) toenter an external angle offset. Selectthe Method Permanent and enter avalue or select New for each Pointand the program will prompt for avalue during each Hidden Pointmeasurement.

Press CONT (F1) to confirm.

In order to connect a deviceto the receiver use only thecable delivered with thedevice.

364Appendix I Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix I - MC500IntroductionThe MC500 is an OEM GPS receiver,that can be integrated into completepositioning systems.

The MC500 receiver has a ruggedhousing that meets high shock andvibration environmental specifica-tions. This makes the receiver idealfor use in high vibration and otherdifficult environments - such asMachine Control. Details of thesespecifications can be found in theMC500 User Manual.

The receiver and measurementperformance of the MC500 are thesame as the SR530. The MC500tracks the L1 C/A code and L2 P-code to reconstruct the carrier phase.When Anti-Spoofing (A-S) is acti-vated, the receiver switches to apatented P-code aided trackingtechnique that provides full L2 carriermeasurements and L2pseudoranges.

MC500 GPS receiver

The MC500 also includes the datalogging features of the RS500 (seeAppendix J) and is suitable for refer-ence station applications in severeenvironments

With a radio modem attached thereceiver can be used for RTK opera-tions. Coordinates can be calculatedwith a precision of up to about 1cm.

365 Appendix ITechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Standard Features

The MC500 includes as standard thefollowing features:

PPS Output functionality installed.Event Input functionality installed.Met / Tilt Interface.Ring Buffer Functionality.Ground Stud.Environmental shock absorbers.Dust caps for external ports.

Data StorageThe MC500 also comes as standardwith a PCMCIA card. This cardenables data to be stored for post-processing. This card is installedbehind the protective cover. Thiscover should only be removed by anapproved Leica technician.

Outside World Interface (OWI)External control of the MC500 isachieved through use of the OutsideWorld Interface (OWI) messageformat from Leica.

Integration assistance and OWIdocumentation is available on requestfrom Leica.

Powering the MC500The MC500 requires 12VDC power tobe supplied externally, as there is nooption to connect standardCamcorder batteries.

Turning the MC500 On/OffDue to the ruggedised housing of theMC500, there is no on/off switch onthe front of the sensor.

The MC500 can be powered on or offby the TR500 Terminal or by a remotecontrol command (OWI).

Like the Sr5xx sensors, the MC500will automatically power itself up andreturn to the previous operating modeafter any temporary power failure.

Cabling Connections / OptionsCable connections are identical toother System 500 receivers.

Refer to MC500 Equipment list, Dozer2000 Installation and MaintenanceGuide for cabling options.

Please see Front Panel Diagram forcable connection information.


Port 1Pin Function1 RTS2 CTS3 GND4 Rx5 Tx6 Vmod7 Bat8 +12V

Port2/PWRPin Function1 Bat2 +12V3 GND4 Rx5 Tx

Port 3Pin Function1 RTS2 CTS3 GND4 Rx5 Tx6 Vmod7 Bat8 +12V

TerminalPin Function1 KDU_ON2 KDU_PWR3 GND4 Rx5 Tx

PWRPin Function1 Bat2 +12V3 GND4 ---5 ---

367 Appendix ITechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Operating and Storage Tempera-turesThe range of the operating andstorage temperatures of the MC500is greater than that of the SR5xxsensors:

Operating temp: -20°C to +60°CStorage temp: -40°C to +70°C

The operating and storage tempera-tures of all other MC500 componentsare the same as detailed in AppendixA.

Shock and Vibration SpecificationsExceeds MIL-STD-810C, Proc VIII.Equip Cat F for Tracked Vehicles

Mounting DiagramThe attached diagram shows thedimensions for mounting the MC500.

MC500 GPS receiver - Mounting Dimensions


Documentation PackagesPlease see the following documenta-tion to learn more about the MC500

MC500 User manual

OWI Manual

Dozer 2000 Installation and Mainte-nance Manual

Dozer 2000 User Manual

Dozer 2000 Equipment List

369 Appendix JTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix J - RS500IntroductionThe RS500 receiver has been de-signed specifically for use as areference station.

The RS500 uses the same housingand meets the same environmentalspecifications as the SR5xx sensors,which are detailed in Appendix A.Generally, the RS500 operates in thesame manner as the SR530, but isdesigned to operate for specificreference station applications usingremote control software, i.e. LeicaGeosystems ControlStation™ soft-ware.

It supports internal logging of GPSraw data, but can also log data fromspecific external devices approved byLeica Geosystems. Both GPS rawdata and external sensor data can bedirectly output to an external remotecontrol software package.

With a radio modem attached, thereceiver can be used to transmit datafor RTK operations using proprietaryas well as standard RTCM, CMR andCMR+ formats. The RS500 cannotreceive Reference Station broadcastsand therefore cannot be used as aReal-Time rover receiver.

The receiver and measurementperformance is the same as with theSR530. The RS500 tracks the L1 C/Acode and L2 P-code to reconstructthe carrier phase. When Anti-Spoof-ing (A-S) is activated, the receiverswitches to a patented P-code aidedtracking technique that provides fullL2 carrier measurements and L2pseudoranges.

Standard Features

The RS500 includes the followingstandard features, which are notavailable in the SR5xx sensor types:

One PPS Output port.Two Event Input ports.Ring Buffer logging.Support for external sensors (Meteo/Tilt).

Data StorageThe RS500 supports all standardLeica Geosystems PCMCIA cardtypes. The internal memory optionmay be installed as well. This enablesdata to be stored internally for post-processing.

370Appendix J Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Outside World Interface (OWI)External control of the RS500 viaremote interface is achieved throughuse of the Outside World Interface(OWI) command language. TheASCII/NMEA-type message formatfrom Leica as well as the compactLeica Binary 2 format can be used.Integration assistance and OWIdocumentation is available on requestfrom Leica Geosystems.

Powering the RS500The RS500 can be powered using theLeica standard internal Camcorderbatteries or Leica standard externalbatteries for temporary use. For amore permanent setup, a universal100V-240VAC 50-60Hz to 12VDCpower converter is available. Alterna-tively, 12VDC power sources may beutilised by means of a userconfigurable 12VDC power cable within-line fuse.

Turning the RS500 On/OffThe RS500 can be powered on or offby the TR500 Terminal, the sensorintegrated ON/OFF button or by aremote control command (OWI).

Using the ON/OFF buttonwill reset the receiver. Allprogrammed outputs, datalogging parameters andinterface configurationoptions that have been setby OWI commands will belost.

Like the Sr5xx sensors, the RS500will automatically power itself up andreturn to the previous operating modeafter any temporary power failure.

Cabling Connections / OptionsCable connections are identical toother System 500 receivers.

Operation of the RS500Like the SR5xx sensors, the RS500can be operated either with theTR500 Terminal or by remote control.However, the TR500 cannot be usedfor running a survey, stakeout or anyof the other applications available forSystem 500. Used with an RS500,the Terminal provides the basicfunctionality to set certain operationparameters, port configurations andall transfer capabilities, including theupload of new firmware. Via theSTATUS hard key all status informa-tion is available.

For the majority of applications, theRS500 has to be operated usingLeica Geosystems ControlStation™or other appropriate reference systemcontrol software.


Using the TR500 with the RS500

When the RS500 is turned on usingthe TR500, the following screen willappear.

The RS500 has the same main menupanel as the SR5xx sensors exceptthat the first three menu options areremoved. It is also not possible toperform the real-time configuration forthe RS500. This needs to be doneusing remote control software. Alldata management, job control andsensor status operations required byan RS500 user are possible using themenu options shown above.

The RS500 also has reducedCONFIG and STATUS options. Onlythe options that are relevant tooperating an RS500 are available.Full details on the CONFIG andSTATUS menu options available aredescribed in the main body of thismanual. TR500 configuration optionsunique to the RS500 sensor aredescribed in the following sections.

Ring Buffer Functionality

The RS500 is supplied as standardwith ring buffer functionality. The ringbuffer allows a second set of GPSraw data to be recorded at a differentobservation rate as is defined withinthe standard/primary logging configu-ration.

The user can define the time periodfor storing data into the ring buffer.For example, if the user chooses tostore 1 hour of data into a ring bufferthen the last one hour of stored datawill always be available. Data that isolder than 1 hour is automaticallyover-written by the data currentlybeing logged. When the logging intoa ring buffer is activated a check willbe made that there is enough freespace on the PC Card or internalmemory to log the data with thedesired logging rate and duration.


This required space will be reserved,so that it cannot be used by otherapplications e.g. standard / primarylogging.

Ring buffer functionality is primarilydesigned to be configured usingremote control commands fromexternal software and this is howmost users will control the ringbuffers. However, it is also possibleto configure ring buffers by using theTR500 terminal.

Configuring the Ring Buffer

Press the CONFIG button and thenchoose 2 Operation and then 6 RingBuffer.

Ring Buffer No - Select a ring bufferto configure. It is possible to config-ure up to 10 ring buffers. Only onebuffer can be running at one time.

Status - Indicates if the currentlychosen ring buffer is ACTIVE (log-ging) or INACTIVE (not logging).

Obs Rate - The rate at which obser-vations will be logged to the chosenring buffer. Choose between 0.1s to60s.

Data Interval - The size of the ringbuffer. This sets the duration for howlong data should be recorded to thering buffer before newly observeddata is recorded over the oldest data.

Flag Obs – Defines the dynamicmode for the selected Ring Buffer.Choose between Static and Moving.

Device - If the sensor has internalmemory installed then the datarecorded to the ring buffer can bestored on the sensor internal memoryor the PC-Card.


Starting the Ring BufferOnce the chosen ring buffer has beenconfigured, pressing START (F3)activates logging to the ring buffer.

Note that if there is insufficientmemory available on the chosendevice for the ring buffer, then it willnot become active. Either the ringbuffer configuration is reduced in sizeby choosing a different interval orshorter period or the memoryavailable on the chosen device isincreased by erasing data from thecard.

Once the chosen ring buffer is active,the STOP (F3) button then becomesavailable to stop logging to the ringbuffer.

Note, that it is not possible to activatemore than one Ring Buffer at a time.To log data to another ring buffer witha different configuration requires thecurrently active ring buffer to bestopped before starting the new one.

Once data has been logged to a ringbuffer and logging has been stoppedthen the data in this ring buffer can bedeleted by pressing DEL (F4).

Pressing START (F3) restartslogging.

It is not possible to change theconfiguration parameters of a ringbuffer once data has been recordedto the buffer. Only after deleting therecorded data stored in that buffer,can the configuration parameters beedited.

A ring buffer does consist of severalfiles sharing the same file name withincrementing file extension. Thenumber of files a ring buffer consistsof depends on the data intervalspecified and is automaticallydetermined. For example, a one hourinterval will consist of 6 files each of10 minutes length and a seventh filewhich is currently logged data towhen the ring buffer is active. Thering buffer consists only of MDB(Measurement DataBase) files. Noadditional job (GeoDB) files will becreated.


The ring buffer data will be stored onthe chosen memory device in thefollowing directory:

\DATA\GPS\RINGBUF

The static point which is stored intothe ring buffer has the following pointId automatically assigned:

RBxxxxff

where:xxxx - 4 character sensor ID (bydefault serial number of the sensor,last 4 digits)ff - 2 character ring buffer number(00, 01 , … 09)

Additional External Devices

The RS500 supports additionalexternal devices, which may berequired for GPS reference stationsserving special applications. Currentlysupported devices are:

• Meteorological Data Sensors• Paroscientific, Inc.: Met3A

Fan-Aspirated Pressure,Temperature and HumiditySensing System

• Paroscientific, Inc.: Met3Pressure, Temperature andHumidity Sensing System

• Vaisala : PTU200GPS (mustbe programmed to mimicMET3 data string)

• Tilt Data Sensors• Applied Geomechanics, Inc.:

MD900-T Digital/AnalogClinometer

Data received from all of thesesensor types can be logged alongwith the GPS raw data onto thesensor PC card or internal memory ifinstalled. The data will be loggedinto the same raw measurement filesas the GPS raw data. Externalapplication software such asControlStation™ is required toconvert this data to ASCII readableformats, e.g. RINEX.It is further possible to directly passthis data through the sensor andoutput it directly via the remotecommunication port to the controllingapplication software. This is possiblein addition or instead of direct loggingthis data internally.

The above external devices can beconnected to Ports 1, 2 or 3 of theRS500. Specific interface cables areavailable from your LeicaGeosystems representative, whichprovide power to the external sensorsfrom the RS500 thus creating a muchneater Reference System installation.


Configuring Meteo Devices

Press the CONFIG button and thenchoose 4 Interfaces and then 6Meteo.

Use Device – Set to YES, to activateusing a Meteo device and access theconfiguration options.

Port - defines the port to where theMeteo device will be connected.

Data Rate – Defines the rate at whichdata will be requested from the Meteodevice. Select between 0.1 to 3600seconds. Note, the maximum ratepossible also depends on the type ofMeteo device attached.

If the rate is set higher than thedevice is able to deliver data, it mayhappen that no complete data setscan be received at all or the data willnot have changed from the previousmeasurement. Please refer to thedocumentation related to the attacheddevice.

Log to File – Select YES to activatedirect logging of the Meteo data to afile. Data will be logged always intothe same file/job where the GPS rawdata is being logged to. No data willbe logged, unless raw data logging isactive. Data will also be logged toring buffer raw data files if ring bufferlogging is active.

Notify Msg – Select BINARY, todirectly output the Meteo data toexternal application software via aselected communication port. PressNPORT (F4) to select the remote portand configure the device throughwhich the message shall be transmit-ted.

The output message format is LeicaBinary V2 (LB2) message type“Meteorological and Inclination Data(ID 1016)”. Documentation for the LB2Interface Control is available onrequest from your Leica Geosystemsrepresentative.

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list. Select a Meteo devicefrom the list and press CONT (F1) toconfirm. To interface to the VaisalaPTU200GPS, choose the MET3interface but make sure the Vaisalasystem has been programmed tomimic the MET3 data string (detailswill be supplied with VaisalaPTU200GPS when purchased viaLeica Geosystems).


Configuring Tilt Devices

Press the CONFIG button and thenchoose 4 Interfaces and then 7 Tilt.

Use Device – Set to YES, to activateusing a Tilt device and access theconfiguration options.

Port - defines the port to where theTilt device will be connected.

Data Rate – Defines the rate at whichdata will be requested from the Tiltdevice. Select between 0.1 to 3600seconds. Note, the maximum ratepossible also depends on the type ofTilt device attached.

If the rate is set higher than thedevice is able to deliver data, if mayhappen that no complete data setscan be received at all or the data willnot have changed from the previousmeasurement. Please refer to thedocumentation related to the attacheddevice.

Log to File – Select YES to activatedirect logging of the Tilt data to a file.Data will be logged always into thesame file/job where the GPS raw datais being logged to. No data will belogged, unless raw data logging isactive. Data will also be logged to ringbuffer raw data files if ring bufferlogging is active.

Notify Msg – Select BINARY, todirectly output the Tilt data to externalapplication software via a selectedcommunication port. Press NPORT(F4) to select the remote port andconfigure the device through whichthe message shall be transmitted.

The output message format is LeicaBinary V2 (LB2) message type“Meteorological and Inclination Data(ID 1016)”. Documentation for the LB2Interface Control is available onrequest from your Leica Geosystemsrepresentative.

Press DEVCE (F5) to access thedevice list. Select a Tilt device fromthe list and press CONT (F1) toconfirm.

Power FailuresLike the SR5xx sensors, the RS500will automatically power itself up andreturn to the previous operating modeafter any temporary power failure.After a power failure the ring bufferconfiguration will be restored. A ringbuffer, which was running at the timeof the power failure, will be restartedautomatically without user (or remotecontrol) interaction.

377 Appendix KTechnical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix K- GS50 / GS50+ and GIS DataCollection

Leica GISDataPRO

HardwareGS50 / GS50+

TR500Antenna

SoftwareGIS DataPRO

After the data is collected in the field, the GIS DataPROoffice software allows you to import, edit and export thedata to your GIS. The software can also be used to designcodelists which allow you to customize the field datacollection process to suit your needs. To learn more aboutthe GIS DataPRO office software, please consult the“Getting Started with the GIS DataPRO Office SoftwareUser Manual”.

GIS DataPRO Post-processing software

GIS DataPRO is used for data collection preparation anddata post processing. Please refer to the “Getting Startedwith the GIS DataPRO Office Software User Manual” formore details.To install the GIS DataPRO software:1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive of your PC.2. Execute the “Setup” command.3. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.Both a hardware and software user manual can be foundon the CD in PDF format. The software itself contains acomprehensive online Help System.

Introduction

This appendix describes the operation and data collectiontechniques specific to the GS50 / GS50+ and GIS datacollection methods.

This Appendix should be read in parallel with the mainbody of this Technical Reference Manual to which thechapters described below refer.

The Leica GIS DataPRO system is composed of bothhardware and software components.The hardware consists of the GS50 / GS50+ sensor,TR500 terminal and antenna. This is used in the field tocollect and record spatial (position) and non-spatialattributes.

378Appendix K Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

The GS50 Receiver

The GS50 tracks the L1 C/A codeand uses it to reconstruct the carrierphase. Data can be stored for post-processing in SKI-PRO or GISDataPRO. Baselines can becalculated up to a precision of10-20mm +/-2ppm.With a radio modem or other DGPSsource the receiver can be used forreal-time measurements acceptingRTCM code corrections. Coordinatescan be calculated with a precision ofup to about 0.4 meters.

The GS50+ Receiver

The GS50+ is a 12 channel L1, 12channel L2 code and phase GPSreceiver. The standard GS50+records phase measurements forpost processing and RTK purposes.Data can be stored for post-process-ing in SKI-Pro or GIS DataPro.Baselines can be calculated to aprecision of 5-10 mm +/-1 ppm.

Hardware Configurations andSpecifications

The following pages contain differentpossible combinations for connectingthe GS50 / GS50+ sensor withvarious accessories.

Centimeter level accuracy can beobtained by using two GS50+receivers, one as reference and oneas rover. For real time applications, aradio modem is needed to transferthe correction signal from thereference to the rover.

The following solutions will allow theuser to obtain sub-meter positionalaccuracy using the Leica GS50.With post-processing it is typical toobtain positional accuracies of 30cm

Hardware and Accessories

With a radio modem the receiver canbe used for RTK measurements.Coordinates can be calculated with aprecision of up to about 1 m.

One Unit Operation

It is possible to use only one GS50 asa rover by downloading and post-processing RINEX data from theInternet or Public FTP server. Thequality obtained cannot generally beestimated because it depends on thequality of public data and the baselinelength1. In theory, it should be possibleto obtain 30cm accuracy withreasonable baseline length1 andquality reference data.Along with the GIS DataPROsoftware, the equipment shown in thechapter “Equipment Setup: Real-TimeRover, GIS Rover” is sufficient for thistype of application. The sameequipment would also be sufficient forsimple navigation, yielding accuraciesof 2-3 meters.

using 2 GS50s (one as a referenceand the other as a rover.) Noadditional options are necessary for apost-processing arrangement.


DGPS

For real-time DGPS positioning, thestandard equipment employs eitherpublic coastguard beacon or satellitedifferential signal provided by Racal-Landstar for differential corrections.Both equipment set-ups are shown toyou in the Equipment Setup chapter:Real Time Rover, GIS Rover. Bothrequire the use of GIS DataPROsoftware. While the Racal-Landstarsignal provides global coverage(except in the Polar Regions,) beaconstations only broadcast the publicsignal in certain areas.2 With eitheroption, a typical accuracy of 40cm to70cm can be expected, but isdependent upon location.Other DGPS sources are alsoavailable depending on your location.In most countries, one or moresources of public signal should beavailable. The GS50 / GS50+ is ableto work with any of these sources,

provided there is a radio or modemcapability to transmit the data in astandard RTCM data format.

The GS50 / GS50+ is also capable oftransmitting standard RTCMcorrections in real-time.

1Reasonable baseline length for best quality isabout 100km, depending on the atmosphereicconditions. The measurement range for thebaseline length is >1000km.

2For additional information on locations andinformation please visit http://www.csi-dgps.com


Hardware and Accessories (cont)

Racal RTS Module Type 90952/3/90 /GFU10and LandStar Mk4 Antenna Type 90952/3/30,

Racal Tracs Ltd. Surrey, England

RACAL/LANDSTAR RTS

In addition to the standard featurespreviously listed, additionalaccesories can be used in conjunc-tion with the GS50 to enhance datacollection methods. The Racal-Landstar satellite differental moduleand antenna can be used for RealTime corrections where beacon orreference data is not available. TheRacal module and antenna attach tothe GS50 in the same configurationas the RTB module and antenna (seechapter Equipment Setup - Real TimeRover, GIS Rover). Because of thenature of the satellite differential,signal coverage is global (except inthe polar regions.)

Because the RACAL signalcorrection is porprietary innature, it is necessary toobtain a subscription to theservice.


(Above)The LEICA Laser Locator and Laser LocatorPlus are modern high-performance binocular.They combine the functions of four instru-ments in one compact, handheld unit:binocular observation, distance measurement,northfinding and inclinometer. For moreinformation on the Vector family of products,please visit http://www.leica-geosystems.com.

Hardware and Accessories (cont)

LASER RANGEFINDERS ANDDISTANCE METERS

When objects cannot be occupieddirectly, a variety of choices areavailable for offset location and canbe interfaced via port 2 on the GS50 /GS50+.

The LEICA Disto (Below). The DistoTM pro4

and DistoTM pro4 a are capable of visible lightmeasurement with a range of 100 meters andsubcentimer accuracy. For more informationon the Disto family of products, please visithttp://www.leica-geosystems.com.

(Above)The Laser Ace is a laser rangefinder fromMDL in the UK. It has a range up to 300meters with an accuracy of 10cm. For moreinformation on the Laser Ace, visithttp://www.mdl-laser.com.

(Right) The Impulse, by Laser Technology is alaser rangefinder from Laser Technology witha range up to 500 meters with an accuracy ofabout 15cm. For more information on TheImpulse, please visit http://Lasertech.com.


If the PCMCIA card has been format-ted on the sensor (Please refer to theH/W user manual), then the followingdirectory structure should appear onthe card.

Real Time Beacon StationsIt is possible to select a beacon ser-vice from a list that can be placed onthe PCMCIA card. The file must becalled beacon.txt, saved in the GPSdirectory and finally be transferred tothe sensor.

The frequency of the beacon serviceshould be placed on the left, with thedescription on the right, seperated bya space as (shown right).

Sensor Transfer with SKI-Pro/GISDataPRO

Using the Remote interface it ispossible to download data directlyfrom the memory device of the sensorinto SKI-Pro or GIS DataPRO throughthe serial port of the PC withouthaving to remove the TR500 from theTerminal port.

Configure the Remote interface to theappropriate port and device asdescribed in chapter 9.15 “Interfaces-Remote”. This should normally bePort 2 and RS232 device using thestandard System 500 downloadcable.

Connect the sensor to the PC. Datacan now be downloaded to the PC, inthe normal manner, using the SensorTransfer component in SKI-Pro.

Compact Flash - Directory Structure and TransferUsing the standard default for external PCMCIA Flash memory, Firmware,Rawdata and Configuration information can easily be transferred to and fromthe GIS DataPRO software.Using Windows Explorer to transfer dataTo transfer data from the PCMCIA card to your PC, for use by the GISDataPRO software, you must first understand the directory/storing structureof the GS50 / GS50+ sensor.

228.0 Daiohzaki292.0 Cape Mendocino313.0 Helgoland

Compact Flash and Sensor Transfer


The GS50 / GS50+ Receiver

The GS50 and GS50 + receivers arespecifically designed for GIS datacollection. It uses a different ap-proach, measure coordinates in atopological format, relating attributeinformation to geographic location.Like all GIS systems, the GS50 /GS50+ collect three types of features:Points, Lines and Areas.

Because these sensors areconfigured for GIS use, the mainprograms Survey and Stakeout whichare found on the SR510, SR520,SR530 are replaced by the GIS DataCollection and the GIS Navigation/Update program.

Operation and Configuration

If the sensor is configured as areference station, there is no differ-ence between the GIS Data Collec-tion and the SR5xx Survey program.Additionally both GIS programs aresituated on the SR510/20/30 in theapplication menu and are available asa paid upgrade option to the surveyprogram.

Additional applications:

On board the GS50 / GS50+, theapplications Determine Coord Sys,Point Management, Calculator,COGO and CFC are available andidentical to those running on theSR510/20/30.

Point Management is located undera submenu Point/Line/Area Man-agement of the main applicationmenu.

The menu Point leads to the point listwhich is identical to the point man-agement. The menus Line and Arealead to lists containing measuredlines and areas.

PLOT (F4) shows a graph of thepoints, lines or areas.


The CONFIG Key

Described below are the changes thatapply to the use of the CONFIG keyin the GS50 and GS50+.

For example, the main configurationmenu uses the wording GIS DataCollection instead of Survey.

Configuration: Satellite

The Satellite configuration optionuses an additional choice for the trackmode. The default choice is Max.Accuracy, the additional choice onGS50 / GS50+ is MaxTrak™.

With the MaxTrak™ option, satellitetracking is much more stable underpoor GPS conditions. For long-timestatic measurements under goodconditions, the accuracy of the defaultMax. Accuracy setting is higher thanwith the MaxTrak™ setting.

The MaxTrak™ should be used whenno GPS measurement would normallybe possible.

Track Mode as well as the SV Healthconfigurations options are visible inAdvanced mode only.

LossOf Lock - When losing allsatellite signals for example due tosatellite shading caused by tallbuildings, trees, etc. a message“Complete loss of lock” appears. Thesensor may be configured to beepwith this loss of lock message or not.


Configuration: Coding

The GS50 / GS50+ only allowsthematical coding.

For this reason, the panel cannot beexited with CONT (F1) if no codelist isavailable. You can define a newcodelist or load a configuration filefrom the PC-Card.

This change applies from chapter 5.1to 5.4.

Configuration: Stake-Out

The Stake-Out Configuration isavailable under the nameNavigation.

The STORE -> Job configurationoption when staking from an ASCIIfile stake points is not available.Thisapplies to chapter 5.4.

Configuration: Point Template UserMaskThe configuration of the Cursor Posis not used in the GIS Data Collectionprogram, although it can beconfigured on the GS50 / GS50+.

This change applies to chapters 5.2and 5.4.

The use of the Point Template maskdiffers for the GIS Data Collectionprogram and the Survey program. Forthis reason, the working examplesgiven in chapters 5.2 and 5.4 do notapply to GS50 / GS50+.

Time and Date templates can beconfigured with EDIT (F3) to useeither the Code or the Sensor ID asthe prefix for the Point ID.


If a user defined point template maskis used on GS50 / GS50+, forexample “Point ###” with anincrement value 1, the Point Id isshown in the first line of the attributionpanel.

Assume the last measured point was“Point 202”, then the next proposedid is “Point 203”. The Point Id cannotbe overwritten manually.

Nevertheless the enumeration value203 is changeable. During GIS pointdata collection, Shift ENUM (F5)leads to the following panel.

Entering a different enumeration andCONT (F1) changes the Id enumera-tion immediately.

Configuration: Occupation settings

The configuration option AutoSTORE is not available for GIS Datacollection. This is because the GS50 /GS50+ always stores automatically.

This change applies to chapters 5.1,5.2 and 5.4.

In Advanced mode, the End Surveyoption is also not available. This isbecause the GIS Data Collection canonly be exited manually. Additionally,the Auto OCUPY option is notavailable because occupation alwaysstarts manually.

To configure the number of averagedpositions for nodes, press NODES(F4) in the Configure\ OccupationSettings panel.

This change applies to chapters5.1.1, 5.2.1 and 5.4.1.

Configuration: Logging

The configuration of logging for autologged positions is not available forGIS Data Collection. This is becausethe autologged positions are notconnected to any topology.

The GIS Data Collection programemploys a different method to collectpoints automatically which is moresuited to GIS data collection.

For post-processing of lines andareas measured in stream mode(START-STOP), it is mandatory to setLog Static and Log Moving to YES.

This change applies to chapters 5.1,5.2 and 5.4.


Configuration: Formats

The line for configuration of OCUPYcounter used in the SR510/20/30survey program is removed. This isbecause there is no such counter inthe GIS Data Collection Program.

This change applies from chapter 5.1to 5.4.

Configuration: Start-up

The Start-up Configuration allowsconfiguration of the sensor to eithercreate a daily job or to create a jobmanually. Enter the configurationStart-Up with the CONFIG key.

Configuration: Real-Time

The GS50 is a L1 code-only DGPSreceiver. It uses RTCM datamessages 1,2 or 9,2 only for dataexchange. The GS50+ uses allRTCM formats as the SR530.

The standard settings allowcommunication with public DGPSsources. For example, coast guardworld-wide differential signals use theRTCM 9,2 messages, whereas thesatellite differential service - RACALLandstar - uses the RTCM 1,2message.

If a pair of GS50 / GS50+ receiversare communicating with each otherthen any of the realtime formats canbe used on both receivers, as long asthose recievers are using matchingformats.

This applies to chapters 5.3 and 5.4.


Configuration: Hidden Point

The full Hidden Point Configuration isavailable under the different nameOffset.

This applies to chapters 5.4.1 and9.13.

Described below are the changes thatrefer to the use of the STATUS key.

The main status menu uses thewording GIS Data Collection insteadof Survey.

This difference applies to chapter 10.

The STATUS Key


GIS Navigation/Update:

Chapter 7.5, describing Staking Out,is similar for most operations. Thesmall differences are described here.

The PCKUP button is replaced by theNESTD button, which is also used inthe GIS Data Collection program. Itsimply leads to a new data collectionprocedure. After data collection iscomplete, navigation is continued.

Data Collection with the GS50 and GS50+

Described below are the changes thatrefer to data collection with the GS50/ GS50+.

Due to the different measurementprogram, the chapters 7.1, 7.2 and7.4 are not applicable at all on aGS50 / GS50+.

The manual “Getting Started withGS50 / GS50+” is availabledescribing the GS50 / GS50+ mainprograms in detail.

Chapter 7.3 describing realtimereference station operations is fullyapplicable.

OCUPY differentiates if the targetpoint is taken from a job or from anASCII file.For an ASCII file target point havingno topological information, point datacollection is started to measure thecoordinates and to enter new codeand attribute values.For a job target point, OCUPYreplaces the old point coordinateswith the new measured coordinates.

SHIFT AUXPT(F5) leading toauxiliary point stake-out is notavailable on GIS Navigation program.


Codelist administration on GS50:

From chapter 8, Coding, only thechapters up to 8.1.2 apply to theGS50 / GS50+.

The GIS thematical coding does notuse layers, but differentiates codingtypes for points, lines and areas.Therefore defining a new code on theGS50 / GS50+ allows entering of thenew code with the choice of the type.

Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg,Switzerland, has been certified as beingequipped with a quality system whichmeets the International Standards ofQuality Management and QualitySystems (ISO standard 9001) andEnvironmental Management Systems(ISO standard 14001).

Total Quality Management-Our commitment to total customersatisfaction

Ask your local Leica agent for moreinformation about our TQM program

Leica Geosystems AGCH-9435 Heerbrugg

(Switzerland)Phone +41 71 727 31 31

Fax +41 71 727 46 73www.leica-geosystems.com

Printed in Switzerland - Copyright LeicaGeosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland 2002Original text

712646-4.0.0en

GPS500 Technical Reference Manual...

Documents

Transcript of GPS500 Technical Reference Manual...